RES SH
ra er te r a> ave ne ed
LY ae PCE Uy wf EME GS 8 * ate ON ft ath it tik
Wethes Hath sy Te Ph eh ee 2
SL gre m4 Nn F J ygiot One ny on nps ’ Sen)
wae area Go tek Ybe ‘ et! Pee Se Lek yarn at 3?
Pypeas ingore > 4 5 Nt
Siege et
4 SES
whe diet 8 Sages ee 6a a AS <4) gear
ANDERE BRST WEG AEE IROL Cat b toy Parse
; } 2 wes “J Saabs Ee
dedisgecnitl , i. * iy Te i r Tish tig Weds adeeb 5 at
sivtd (Un ted t= , & . a ; 5 y yin traphee hg Meviniy Te ate thyaga EAS
= i A sha © Fs z ; ; x ( 5 ey DN Ca Ue Sa acne fad
Sort “ : : Sransr ff : 0 4 : aie Mas;
~ bf M ; a2. Ci Not “ wera a tS hr
Pro? otter « rs SSNS Be s ae pint eaty
ca Nos alteitetve Sih tel a K . Z . > } a AS re hl
Bet aL Oe dy Sateen hens 7 Z is 3 ¥ 2 ’ i : tt
2 dete heh ee ; AISI Sey BN $ : 4 :
¥ AY te Ng. pets Wey fe te Pea cra ose F
ab fon MC aha ds GOAT MS Nis Colne ; i
ER MD vetted =) pate de voy Bebe § She Weg AEEN 4 F ne
>
Trg ey
Sag, SS METRE Sates Fu Many tie WE ODS 1g EB
Tet Sane 08 fgtint ese ‘ " Bee Seg p 3 POE TEA i : Od Aaah “ 7
pein esr ; 7 Fast at 7 c y 2 i . eyes da th ge
FNM dS Wet : . : * . Aes ‘
Se ‘ ¥ sum
Sater : : : sane ote
owe dpe te
Bink Z . : este
AES , “ r ! font one
Tec stlny Avcaks Ganatecshs SecteS LAS Mee as : : : i : mes
. — ee SS ae f ye 3 rs Lis doe!
eseS Ne ey ae Pere ter ta (ear as : coats 7 Pet ate : + Mai that Kiva!
—_ re Perera ~ " s ‘ “ : y ‘ ap eM eo Ber afin de sh gti St EAN Lay fens
Be OD eet eee See SSS Sst TS : Mee dg nated 1 i r - ee ov eadiidey he a j m ‘ ‘ “aida tates em an
Bawa henedine Gas So : ‘ 3 ; Sw : ‘ ey
SS ees ! c > < r “ Famer ten
tented AA fa ite % s ed Te tis DR ENTEINE 5 n Spee ee eee
he Pathe gs - ae teed, deni : a ae : beicep aN
ste Ga Peite tte a7 iP ' wera ee seth pends A tee te : :
s~ Sresn eae AB get atte de dae 4 b : ; SERED tL ORT S anh 4 é 4 i é Suir
ros be Gadend S Yieie Sa Tee 2" As ah he Gein Ket z s 4d) S - : . ini! 5 : : Wwitee nets nee ass
atta Se a Dg belie Bite Mh el oA ‘ B 4 * Te sneak Nyinsthin eal Me hin By ot
eat ret Sp Sagara : x é FNAME SSA : : moARS BO SY 4 Sb op
Sees as ‘ i wicks
ha Padieiese fe * . as 7 Akane tah
Saute fhe The Qe : WO oe ede
s Shyitrcte S35
ae Meteo net
yee
grtiiue Sint # 7
Sant ely eh
ai reer
Peon ANP te
Paeecesoen
See gente Pig be ST : - 4 ‘i Cates saes *
Be ced Mater “Sete She Sey ot . 3 - é 5 NI q cts : eunngs 1 Aye
Shi Me Te MN Et Catteni Tenney F : . fore rN et
yee ee en ON : ez ‘ : we ; . bt segs Sell z
Seer OR ae . ; ; : 4 ‘ Argh SYA ONE de ey PERNT,
ta aie DET pS AD - 2 9 ‘ : * - : F ‘i : : 4 rela ai eee
Stet, ora eeS
TE Se Pe
Bo Idee att aN SNF
eget : Wake Vagos abate
Stee ae a ‘ Ont BS eS a : ae Ha QUO fhe ’ 2 Rhea
thet ‘ ’ - ‘ * 2 : Vid fe aN Gee A Meese medi bee LE 5 Pee ON subg aN cg! te ee REAR Non
a “ 2 - * Sirens wen ree ia = - wyis' Spm
Nena, (82 ot eg ot
Sean eng ay comes TEC
seed purr Kee igiaten : WDC Se!
Osea ee ee
oleae ane
se vena en tnem
Lr Re = ee yg = ' > + anes»
Tyde REF pee ip oe eigen
eka
eer re AV Shee Ss
fl
i ak, MR RM TPIS angi tek st stad af aia sats ees.
ais 2 we ete rere ‘
ae intra © RAI AE RO
se atma EN
eens ented MEW ESN AT MTOR) ts 22 PISTONS ae we Om Se taptet See ONeuedsdenens -
A “ oe eS5cth= o>. = _ Tiga ne
- Sib my Bhs Pry) aes * ir ye SA ese Y ~
SW as A Teg ORNS A eR ite pigasee Gye in scandal
Pee ¥ |
‘9
peek dead abd beat
4
, IX
2 ANNALS OF THE
SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
VOLUME 96
ANNALE VAN DIE
SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
BAND 96
Cm,
— '
ed
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
VOLUME 96 BAND
HE TRUSTEES OF THE DIE TRUSTEES VAN DIE
SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
CAPE TOWN KAAPSTAD
1985-1988
SET, PRINTED AND BOUND IN THE REPUBLIC OF SOUTH AFRICA
BY THE RUSTICA PRESS (PTY) LTD, NDABENI, CAPE
D2109
LIST OF CONTENTS
Page
AGUIRRE URRETA, M. B.
Aptian ammonites from the Argentinian Austral Basin. The subfamily Helican-
eylinae Hyatt. 1894- (Published’'December 1986:).. 2 ....2622 52-556. 5 eee nee 271
AGuIRRE Urreta, M. B. & KLINGER, H. C.
Upper Barremian Heteroceratinae (Cephalopoda, Ammonoidea) from Patagonia
and Zululand, with comments on the systematics of the subfamily. (Published
DWeccmucilO SOs) hn Ont: Peete” ne es cee eA Aes Seem ow ee S15)
AVERY, G.
Late Holocene use of penguin skins: evidence from a coastal shell midden at Steen-
bras Bay, Liideritz Peninsula, South West Africa-Namibia. (Published June
Soe A Perc se Ee Cs NE bea sera ewe ee ae 55)
DINGLE, R. V.
Turonian, Coniacian, and Santonian Ostracoda from south-east Africa. (Published
i Deresrr al over AST) ay ate aaa ae te oes my eect re fea oe en a 1228
ENpDRODY- YOUNGA, S.
Evidence for the low-altitude origin of the Cape mountain biome derived from the
systematic revision of the genus Colophon Gray (Coleoptera, Lucanidae).
busca Sepicmer 19685). aetna e 5 4 oe ne ene oss aaa ROR assem ee 359
GosLINER, T. M. & LILTVED, W. R.
Aspects of the morphology of the endemic South African Cypraeidae with a dis-
cussion of the evolution of the Cypraeacea and Lamellariacea. (Published
UNELIS tale) OOM) ESRC ire rete era aie ae anal BS SiGe wh Ss} aS eae 67
Hu .iey, P. A. & Krerrt, G.
A zoogeographic analysis of the fishes of the family Myctophidae (Osteichthyes,
Myctophiformes) from the 1979-Sargasso Sea Expedition of R. V. Anton
Dour (eupusnec bepriary 1985.) 0! veces Se odes ae pene sb ohare ie 19
KLINGER, H. C. SEE AGUIRRE URreETA, M. B.
KRreEFFT, G. see HULLEY, P. A.
LILTVED, W. R. see GOSLINER, T. M.
LILTVED, W. R. see ROELEVELD, M. A.
ROELEVELD, M. A. & LILTVED, W. R.
A new species of Sepia (Cephalopoda, Sepiidae) from South Africa. (Published
ic UAT EL S95) eae ee eR are One eel ainda See ume Es megs 1
WILLIAMS, G. C.
Morphology, systematics, and variability of the southern African soft coral Alcy-
onium variabile (J. Stuart Thomson, 1921) (Octocorallia, Alcyoniidae).
AES e de Nira BL OSG aire pence hike ees eee ae ns occ eee Sarge oe 241
Volume 96 is complete in 9 parts.
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
” MUSEUM.
CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes .. .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 19696; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
“As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.—H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHerR, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Koun, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. Jn: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 96 Band
February 1985 Februarie
Part i Deel
0°, y
S B:8.B:8-e
SS
S
Up
SLouig you 8S
A NEW SPECIES OF SEPIA
(CEPHALOPODA, SEPIIDAE)
FROM SOUTH AFRICA
By
MARTINA A. ROELEVELD
SX
W. R. LILTVED
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
WAGES, 520), lea), HES, Gar), SUES, 5, 79).
| Ady oa Uy, Gh, OOD, 1), 1003).
1112, 5, 7, t.=p.i.), 142), 15(4=5), 242), 27, 311123), 326); 33s 36a
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 064 8
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty., Ltd., Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
A NEW SPECIES OF SEPIA
(CEPHALOPODA, SEPIIDAE) FROM SOUTH AFRICA
By
MARTINA A. ROELEVELD
&
W. R. LILTVED
South African Museum, Cape Town
(With 14 figures and 4 tables)
[Ms accepted 31 July 1984]
ABSTRACT
A new species of the genus Sepia is described from the Atlantic Coast of the Cape Penin-
sula, South Africa. Sepia pulchra sp. nov. is the fifth species of Sepia maturing at a small size
(MLd approx. 20 mm) to be recorded from South African waters. The female animal most
closely resembles S. dubia, which has been placed in the problematic subgenus Hemisepius.
However, the shell of S. pulchra indicates that this species is more closely related to members
of the subgenus Sepia s.s. The use of the ventral keels on the mantle, and the position of
spermatophores on the hectocotylus, are illustrated for the first time in sepiids.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Rae CHOI Ue Inc. 0 Says aa ke <a ee ind Big hah Settee. 1
SS CPPOEDELICIE GES Pi MOVE ees Fete Peet ghee hc ashe ws eS ye ei ane et 2
[SJ RUSTE, OM, Sta eh oie MAS hen ce eg a Pee eee a 2
ROO SIS ee ae ees tried CSI? ag ee fia ee 3
WV CSER PEON erates ie See che reer nies sae Oe Aa ee Sil oe Oh 5)
ERC AKG tree ae eRe A oie REMI fu 2 oad Plse Bsg eS 12
Pxbiiibt Swit he rateCUSPECIES «ar LA fac Gieisain sk Sitoe hss Pee nealele siete 14
BiolacicavouseivalOUuSy -- sane. ee. Wed lek ace ee ees Mee awe ea 15
PaConoOWle(SCMICIMS) nee: aeisont cys = hoy) Sd cvae bye seuss eee He ee aS 18
IRCEC RCN CC SE Eres rs Uae olay ic es sheeals We che ce ee su levees 18
INTRODUCTION
On a series of SCUBA dives off the Atlantic Coast of the Cape Peninsula a
number of small sepiids were collected by one of us (W.R.L.). These specimens
were originally thought to be Sepia dubia, a species known from a single female
specimen (Adam & Rees 1966: 119-120), also from South Africa.
On closer examination the newly acquired specimens were found to differ
from the description of S. dubia in the sucker arrangement on the ventral arms
and the structure of the shell. A re-examination of the holotype of S. dubia
1
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 96 (1), 1985: 1-18, 14 figs, 4 tables.
2 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
showed that the female animals of both S. dubia and the new specimens do not
seem to differ significantly (the male of S. dubia being unknown). The shells,
however, are quite different.
The measurements, indices and abbreviations used in this paper are defined
by Roeleveld (1972: 196). Additional measurements and counts are as follows:
EMLv —effective ventral mantle length, i.e. excluding that part of the
mantle lying outside the limits of the ventral keels; measured
along the ventral midline from the anterior edge of the mantle
to the posterior limit of the keels.
HcL —length of the hectocotylized (left ventral) arm.
MHL —length of the (proximal) modified portion of the hectocotylus,
from the most proximal suckers to the first normal (distal)
suckers; the length of the modified portion is calculated as a per-
centage of the total length of the hectocotolized arm (HcL) and
not of the mantle length.
Club suckers —the total number of suckers on the tentacular club.
Furthermore, an estimate of the maturity stage of each specimen is indi-
cated by a roman numeral I-III (see Table 1). Since the sex, size and maturity
TABLE 1
Definition of maturity stages.
Maturity stage
I: immature
II: maturing
III: mature
Male
Spermatophores absent; testis
small, undeveloped.
Testis and accessory reproductive
glands partially developed, but
spermatophores absent.
Spermatophores present in Need-
ham’s sac, penis and/or’ on
hectocotylus.
Female
Ovary and nidamental glands
small, undeveloped.
Ovary and nidamental glands
partially developed; no eggs
visible in ovary.
Nidamental glands large; fully
developed eggs present in
ovary.
stage affect the morphology (especially the degree of modification of the hecto-
cotylus in males), these conditions are relevant in comparing specimens. A
particular specimen can then conveniently be designated, for example, d II 24,
indicating a mature male with a dorsal mantle length of 24 mm.
Sepia pulchra sp. nov.
Figs 1-14; Tables 2-4
Material
Holotype: SAM-S1036, do III 17, Llandudno, Cape Peninsula, 25 m,
collected by W. R. Liltved, 11 October 1982, SCUBA; deposited in the South
African Museum.
A NEW SPECIES OF SEPIA FROM SOUTH AFRICA 3
Fig. 1. Sepia pulchra sp. nov. Dorsal view of
holotype, SAM-S1036, ¢ III 17.
Scale = 5 mm.
Paratypes: SAM-S822, ¢ III 22, Hottentots Huisie, Cape Peninsula, 15 m.
SAM-S982, @ III 21, Bakoven, Cape Peninsula, 21 m. SAM-S1007, ¢ III 16,
21117, Llandudno, Cape Peninsula, 25m (same data as_ holotype).
SAM—S1029, 6 119, 921121, Llandudno, Cape Peninsula, 26m.
SAM-S1030, @ III 22, Llandudno, Cape Peninsula, 40m. SAM-S1031,
3S 1117, 3 Ill 18, Llandudno, Cape Peninsula, 30 m. SAM-S1032, ¢ III 19,
2 III 22, Llandudno, Cape Peninsula, 30 m. SAM-—S1033, 6 III 20, ¢ III 24,
Llandudno, Cape Peninsula, approx. 50 m. SAM-S1034, ¢ II 15, Hottentots
Huisie, Cape Peninsula, 15 m. SAM-—S1038, @ III approx. 19, Llandudno, Cape
Peninsula, 32 m. SAM-—S1039, 2 III 19, Llandudno, Cape Peninsula, 35 m.
Diagnosis
Mantle with numerous complex dorsal papillae and fleshy ventral keels;
suckers biserial on arms I-III and distally on arms IV, quadriserial proximally
on arms IV; sexual dimorphism involving sucker enlargement on arms II and
sometimes III and modification of sucker shape and size on right arm IV in
males; tentacular club with subequal suckers; shell not calcified, delicate,
broadly oval, with phragmocone extending to anterior margin, with reflexed
inner cone and no posterior spine.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
89-LS 8 as 89 09 6S 6S 09 LS HS 09 STOYSNS
qn[D
€-97-9'€1 p'6l 8 0°02 0°SZ 9°LT > L’or Wie E97 OST 9°ET PL
(ol 00ST p'78 0001 6 88 L'¥6 ESOL 0'SET sil g |
0021 0°SZI 0001 6 SOL 9°Ss 5°68 area! 0'SZI 8°18 relae hp
0'0L-S ‘SP 78S 6 9°SS 0°09 0°09 0°0L ‘7S SSP 0°09 0°09 €°8¢ (TPH %)
. — THN
¢°79-0'0S pls 6 0°09 $*79 8°8S 8°8S 119 6 LS 9°7S 00S ‘rs ‘PH
9°0L—-0°SS 9°19 6 0°09 $*79 L'v9 9°0L L‘99 6 LS 6 LS 0'ss 16S Yu Al
8°8S—0'0S p'ss 6 EES €°9¢ 8°8¢ 8°8¢ 9°Ss 6 LS 6 LS 00S 0°0S III
8°8o-S'Sp 61S 6 EES €°9¢ 8°8S 8°8¢ 0°0S vLy . y'Ly 0°0S S'Sp II
6 7S—6 OF v Ly 6 L’9r ser 67S 67S a7 9°7S y'Ly O'S 6 OF I TV
p'67—-0 02 Vv 6 L'9@ 0°SZ p67 SE? G G6 IC €°97 0°02 LC MA
6 SOI-S°68 9°L6 6 €°€6 0001 6 SOT 0001 000T L'v6 ¢°68 0°S6 0°00T qd
p°89-0'S¢ (oe) 6 L'99 $*79 8°8¢ L'v9 ‘19 7 €9 p°89 0'SS 16S MH
7 £9-6 OF 9°LS 6 0°09 $°79 8°8S 8°8S 9°Ss 7 €9 7 €9 ESS 6 OF TH
p°78-0'09 CPL 6 Ben E18 p78 SOL GOL, ef en 0°09 SIL MW
GA €18 6 L‘98 E18 p78 p78 8°LL Eh, L'v6 0°08 ge A TWH
€SOL-S'68 6 S6 6 0001 8°€6 T'6 0001 v'V6 S°68 €°SOL 0°56 6°06 “IW
wu @7—-SI PIN 6 ST Ill 2 SE ol & AVI 2 LY Ill 2 81 Ill P 61 Ill 2 6 Il P 07 Ill 2 CC Il P
asUuvy ubdW u_EeOIS-NVS LOOIS-NVS IE0IS-NVS 9E0IS-NVS IE0IS-NVS ZEOIS-NVS 620IS-NVS €f0IS-NVS CC8S-NVS
adKjojoy
‘So]BU IO} sjyUNOD puke sooIpuy ‘AOU ‘ds vuyojnd vidas
Z ATaV
A NEW SPECIES OF SEPIA FROM SOUTH AFRICA 5)
Description
The animals are small, attaining maturity at a dorsal mantle length of
15-22 mm in males and 19-24 mm in females.
The mantle is broadly oval, its anterior margin convex dorsally and deeply
emarginate ventrally around the funnel. The fins are of variable width, usually
fairly wide, beginning relatively far back (the distance between the anterior ends
of the mantle and fin is 23-33% MLd). Posteriorly the fins are rounded and
separate.
The colour is reddish-brown dorsally on the mantle, head and arms, with
the pigmentation of the mantle extending on to the bases of the fins. Mid-
dorsally on the mantle there is a large oval purplish patch. The entire dorsal
surface of the mantle, head and arms is covered with tubercles of variable size
and complexity. The tubercles occur as three main types: simple tubercles,
complex turrets, and even more complex flat oval tubercles. The larger tubercles
are arranged in a distinct pattern that can be traced in all the specimens,
although not all the tubercles of the pattern are readily distinguishable in every
specimen. The degree of distinction of these large tubercles depends on the
preservation and degree of skin contraction or ‘wartiness’ of the specimen; in
addition, a particular large tubercle may have an overall flat oval appearance in
one specimen and be more turret-like in another.
Fig. 2. Sepia pulchra sp. nov. Ventral view of
holotype, SAM-S1036, ¢ III 17.
Scale = 5 mm.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
99-95 9 79 19 19 = 9S 99 €9 soyons
qn[o
EGaG SL 0° fe SET LG 87 8°€7 781 Le 8°07 PL
0002 0001 ELST 7 quell p9El (sre L991 ot
Zz It 8°STI 9871 [LSI SSH 7 8IT S791 rel ORE
8°8S—-0°0S Les IE 8°8S 6 LS VTS pS 0°0S Sr 00S AI
8°8S—-6 OP l6r LE 8°8S 9°7S 9 LY v7S 6 OF CSP 8° SP Ill
6 7S—6 OF (a7 Ie 6 CS v Ly 6 CY 6 CY 6 OF 6 OF Liv II
ULp-r'9¢ LO L UL Ut V8 6 p°9€ 6 OF CLE Lay
9°87-7 81 07 Le CEC €°97 9°87 87 Ge 781 0°SZ MA
6 SOI-S°L8 86 IL 6 SOL € SOL 8 P01 7 $6 6 06 0001 S°L8 Ad
L'99-0'0S 7 6S Hb Lv9 6 LS ULS L°99 6S T'6S vs MH
COL-P TS 0°79 L SOL 6 LS v'7S ILS 7 89 9°€9 €°8S TH
788-8 OL Uy L 788 7 18 7 OL TOL El GEE 8°OL MW
6 06-1 IL 7'S8 [L 788 5°68 IL 5°06 6 06 p98 7 6L A"TIWaA
8'r0I-1'r6 8°66 [E V6 0001 0001 8° P01 0001 0001 0001 IW
war yc Lt PAW iL LI I 3d 61 Ill 3 12 Il 6 Ic Il 3 CC Ill 6 CC III d be Ill 6
asuny UDIW ue LOOIS-IVS 6£0IS-NVS C86S-NVS 6cC0IS-NVS OfOIS-NVS CEOIS-WVS ceOIS-WVS
“SO]BUIDJ IOJ sJUNOD puke sddIpuT “AOU ‘ds D1Yyojnd vidas
¢ ATdV
A NEW SPECIES OF SEPIA FROM SOUTH AFRICA 7
Fig. 3. Sepia pulchra sp. nov. Diagrammatic
representation of relative sizes and distribution of
the larger tubercles on the dorsal mantle surface.
In most specimens (including the holotype) three larger tubercles form cirri
over each eye. On the mantle the pattern is most readily traced from the dorsal
median patch. The patch bears two large, flat, oval tubercles (Fig. 3, a)
posteriorly and two turrets (Fig. 3, b) anteriorly; four slightly smaller turrets
(Fig. 3, c—f) run along the midline of the patch. The first of these median turrets
(Fig. 3, c) is sometimes enlarged, forming a group of three with the two lateral
turrets (Fig. 3, b). The median line of turrets on the patch is continued ante-
riorly by a single turret (Fig. 3, g) between the patch and the anterior mantle
margin. Immediately posterior to the patch a pair of turrets (Fig. 3, h) straddles
the dorsal midline; a second and somewhat larger pair of turrets (Fig. 3, j)
occurs halfway between the posterior end of the patch and the posterior mantle
margin. The latter pair of turrets (Fig. 3, j) is part of a series of eight tubercles
(Fig. 3, j-m) that are arranged around the patch in a line roughly parallel to the
lateral and posterior margins of the mantle. The six anterior tubercles of this
lateral line are usually flat oval tubercles, whereas the posteriormost pair
(Fig. 3, j) is turret-like. A marginal line of tubercles (Fig. 3, n—s) lies outside the
lateral line. The first two tubercles (Fig. 3, n) of the marginal line lie anterior to
the fins and the remaining tubercles are on the fin bases, alternating in position
with the tubercles of the lateral line. The marginal line usually consists of ten flat
oval tubercles. The spaces between the primary tubercles are filled with smaller
tubercles ranging from simple to fairly complex, with several protrusions. All
the principal tubercles described above are present in the holotype, but the
posteriormost four tubercles (Fig. 3, r—s) of the marginal line are not very
clearly distinguishable.
8 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The ventral surface of the mantle, head and arms IV is buff in colour and
forms a sole, made up of a pair of fleshy keels on the mantle and the swollen
under-surfaces of the ventral arms (Fig. 2). The keels do not extend to the pos-
terior end of the mantle, nor to the fin bases laterally; the lateral and posterior
areas between the keels and fin bases are a somewhat lighter shade of the colour
of the dorsal mantle surface.
The arms are short and stout, with well-developed fleshy protective mem-
branes. The upper three pairs of arms are joined by an interbrachial membrane.
Arms I and II are trapezoid in cross-section, with a flattened aboral surface;
arms III and particularly arms IV bear lateral keels.
The suckers are globose, with small apertures. The sucker rings have a
smooth inner edge, without teeth.
In the females, the suckers are biserial on arms I, II and III, though when
the arms are compressed the suckers may give the appearance of being triserially
or even quadriserially arranged on the proximal half of the arm, this compres-
sion most commonly occurring on the lateral arms (II and III). The suckers are
largest near the base of the arm and gradually decrease in size distally. On the
ventral arms of the females the suckers are quadriserially arranged on the proxi-
mal half to two-thirds of the arm but become biserial on the distal part.
In males the left ventral arm is hectocotylized. The proximal two-thirds of
the arm is modified: the oral arm surface is wider than usual and bears numer-
ous transverse folds. The suckers of the modified portion are reduced in size and
form two longitudinal series of suckers on either side of the ridged oral region.
The dorsal suckers clearly pertain to two longitudinal series as the suckers alter-
nate in a zigzag manner. The two ventral series of suckers have merged to form
an almost straight longitudinal row. Distal to the modified portion, the suckers
are biserial.
In the holotype, the hectocotylus bears two pairs of widely separated
suckers proximally. The dorsal and ventral margins of the modified region each
bear eleven alternating lateral and medial suckers. Distally the arm bears seven
to eight pairs of biserial suckers; the first few pairs of biserial suckers are larger
than those in the modified region, but the sucker size decreases towards the arm
tip. In the other males the number of suckers bordering the modified portion of
the hectocotylus varies from ten to fourteen on either side of the ridged region.
The right ventral arm is also modified in males. Proximally there is a group
(usually eight) of large globose suckers, irregularly arranged. Following these
there are two to four medium suckers and two to four minute suckers; these
occur either as a transverse row of four medium-sized suckers followed by two
minute suckers, one on each extreme edge of the oral surface, as in the holo-
type, or as one medium-sized sucker on each extreme edge of the oral arm
surface followed by minute suckers in a transverse row of four. This proximal
group of suckers, which occupies about 40 per cent of the arm length, is fol-
lowed by a pair of highly modified suckers (usually the 15th and 16th from the
arm base). These suckers (Fig. 5) are greatly enlarged and asymmetrically
A NEW SPECIES OF SEPIA FROM SOUTH AFRICA
Fig. 4. Sepia pulchra sp. nov. Hectocotylus and right ventral arm of holotype,
SAM-S1036, ¢ III 17. Scale = 2 mm.
ME:
Fig. 5. Sepia pulchra sp. nov. Detail of modified suckers on
right ventral arm of holotype, SAM-—S1036, ¢ III 17.
Scale = 1 mm.
10 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
elongate, with the ring proximal to the main body of the sucker, their overall
shape being reminiscent of the pitcher plant (Nepenthes). The modified suckers
are followed by a pair of very small suckers. In contrast, the next pair (usually
the 19th to 20th suckers) is much larger, attaining at least the size of the medium
suckers of the proximal group. Thereafter 24 to 28 suckers gradually reduce in
size to the arm tip and are generally biserially arranged, though contraction of
the arm may sometimes give a quadriserial appearance to the suckers on the
middle of the arm. In one specimen (SAM-S1007, 3d III 16) a second pair
of suckers (the 19th to 20th) is modified as well as the 15th to 16th suckers on
the right ventral arm, though not to the extent of the more proximal pair.
A further form of sexual dimorphism is shown in the enlargement of several
suckers towards the tips of the lateral arms in males. The most marked sucker
enlargement occurs on arms II, where there are usually three (but occasionally
four) pairs of enlarged suckers in the 8th to 12th pairs from the arm base. A ten-
dency towards enlargement of suckers is sometimes also shown on arms III.
Where present, this enlargement affects one to three (usually two) pairs of
suckers in the 10th to 14th rows from the arm base. In the holotype there are
seven enlarged suckers on each arm II; these suckers pertain to the 8th to 11th
pairs on left II and the 9th to 12th pairs on right Il. There is no marked enlarge-
ment of suckers on arms III in the holotype.
Fig. 6. Sepia pulchra sp. nov. Dorsal and lateral arms of holotype, SAM-—S1036, ¢ III 17,
showing enlargement of distal suckers on arms II (brackets). Scale = 5 mm.
A NEW SPECIES OF SEPIA FROM SOUTH AFRICA ot
The tentacular club is short and broad, somewhat recurved, and bears sub-
equal suckers in transverse rows of four to six. The dorsal protective membrane
is well developed and separate proximally from the ventral protective mem-
brane, which curves around the base of the club. The natatory membrane is
broad and continues along the tentacular stalk beyond the proximal end of the
club. A terminal pad found on the club of many Sepia species, e.g. Sepia faurei
(Roeleveld 1972, fig. 16b) and S. robsoni (Adam & Rees 1966, pl. 46, fig. 279),
is situated at the anterior end of the dorsal protective membrane and is of
similar size and shape to the club suckers. The dorsal surface of the club bears
several transverse rows and a number of scattered chromatophores.
The beaks, radula and spermatophore are illustrated in Figures 8 and 9.
The lower beak of SAM-—S1033, ¢ III 24, has the following dimensions (after
Clarke 1962 and Wolff 1982): rostral length (RL) 0,86 mm, wing length (WL)
3,24 mm, rostral tip to inner margin of wing (RW) 4,08 mm, crest length (CL)
3,26 mm, hood length 1,50 mm, jaw-angle width (JW) 1,66 mm. The hood and
lateral wall are darkened around the rostrum and jaw angle, but leave a clear
strip between them along the jaw edge. The darkening of the lateral wall
gradually diminishes posteriorly and the wing is only slightly pigmented. The
jaw angle is indistinct and obtuse, and is not obscured by a wing fold. The
lateral wall has no distinct ridge or fold and there is no indentation in its poste-
rior margin. The wing is long in relation to the rostrum (WL/RL 3,8).
Fig. 7. Sepia pulchra sp. nov. Tentacular clubs, SAM-S822, ¢ III 22.
Scale = 1 mm.
12 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 4
Sepia pulchra sp. nov. Indices for shells.
Holotype
SAM-S822 SAM-S982 SAM-S1038 SAM-S1039 SAM-S1036 n Mean Range
3 III 22 ? Il 21 Spike ds 2 Ill 19 3 Ill 17
Nn
Lin mm 21 19 19 CoN) 16 16-21
W 52,4 63,2 63,2 Gye 9s 5653 5 ¢. 58,6 52,4=6582
Str z Caled O, SUE) 63,2 Oe SITS 62,5 5. ¢. 61D: 6 S226-e.gtes
The shell is not calcified and is broadly oval, becoming somewhat angular
anteriorly; posteriorly the shell is broad, with a strong ventral curvature and a
dorsal hump over the posterior end of the phragmocone. There is no posterior
spine. The dorsal surface of the shell is finely reticulate and shows no distinct
median ridge; the striae of the phragmocone are clearly visible through the thin
dorsal shield. The phragmocone covers virtually the entire length of the shell
and is very thin; the ventral surface is flat or somewhat concave, with at most an
indistinct median groove; the striated zone is long and triangular, the striae
wavy with an overall convex shape. The inner cone is reflexed and fused to the
outer cone; in the holotype it is narrow, the limbs of the inner cone extending
anteriorly along the lateral edges of the striated zone; in a larger shell
(SAM-S1038, Fig. 9A) the inner cone is rather broader laterally, then tapers
rapidly and twists, curving over the lateral edge of the striated zone. The outer
cone is very broad laterally but narrow posteriorly, separating the posterior end
of the inner cone from the shell edge by a narrow strip of outer cone.
Remarks
The female animals of Sepia pulchra are difficult to distinguish from
S. dubia. Adam & Rees (1966: 120) described the arm suckers of S. dubia as
being biserial, but re-examination of the holotype, 2 II 17, showed that, as in
Fig. 8. Sepia pulchra sp. nov. Beaks, SAM-S1033, ? III 24. A. Upper beak, rostral length
1,0 mm. B. Lower beak, rostral length 0,86 mm.
A NEW SPECIES OF SEPIA FROM SOUTH AFRICA 13
Fig. 9. Sepia pulchra sp. nov. A-B. SAM-S1038, ° III approx. 19. A. Detail of posterior
part of shell, ventral view. B. One row of teeth from radula. C. SAM-—S822, ¢ III 22.
Spermatophore from Needham’s sac, with enlargement of the oral end. Each scale = 0,5 mm.
S. pulchra, the suckers are biserial on arms I-III, with a tendency to irregularity
on the lateral arms due to crowding, and quadriserial in the middle of arms IV.
According to Adam & Rees (1966: 119), in the holotype of S. dubia ‘the
dorsal surface of mantle, head and arms is covered with well spaced, round
papillae, creating a very rugose appearance. .. . On the dorsal surface of the
mantle, approximately in the middle, there are two oval patches of contracted
papillae, one on each side of the median line, and a third one anteriorly near the
mantle-margin.’
On careful scrutiny, the arrangement of the tubercles of the holotype of
S. dubia was found to be remarkably like that of S. pulchra. The oval patch on
either side of the midline in S. dubia corresponds with the two main complex
tubercles (Fig. 3, a) in S. pulchra; the third anterior patch of S$. dubia is much
larger than the corresponding tubercle, c, in S. pulchra and may represent an
amalgamation of tubercles c and d of S. pulchra, as in S. dubia there is only this
one large tubercle between the two smaller tubercles, g and e, found in both
14 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
species. The area of the median tubercles (a—f) does not appear as a distinct
dorsal patch in S. dubia.
The remaining tubercles (h—-s) on the dorsal mantle surface of S. dubia,
though not very distinct, appear to show the same arrangement as in S. pulchra,
with the exception of tubercle n. In S$. dubia tubercle n lies immediately above,
rather than in front of, the anterior fin margin, since the distance between the
anterior margins of the mantle and the fin is less (12,5 % MLd) in S. dubia than
in S. pulchra (23-33 % ML4d).
At this stage it is not possible to assess the significance of the differences in
the tubercles (c, d, n) and the presence or absence of the median patch in separ-
ating the two species, since S$. dubia is known from a single female specimen.
However, the two species differ markedly in their shells. Sepia dubia has a
Hemisepius-like shell, with the phragmocone having an inverted triangular shape
and occupying little more than half the shell length, as in Sepia (Hemisepius)
typica. The shell of S. pulchra, on the other hand, has an overall resemblance to
that of S. tuberculata, though being much more fragile; this further weakens the
distinction between the subgenera Sepia and Hemisepius.
AFFINITIES WITH RELATED SPECIES
Sepia pulchra is the fifth small species of Sepia to be found in South African
waters and further compounds, rather than resolves, the intriguing problem of
their interrelationships. The other species are Sepia robsoni, S. faurei, Sepia
(Hemisepius) typica and S. (Hemisepius) dubia. All five species are small,
maturing at a dorsal mantle length of about 20 mm. They all have a very broad
mantle (MW 60-90% ML4d), the anterior margin of which is convex dorsally and
deeply emarginate ventrally, and fleshy keels ventrally on the mantle; suckers that
are biserial, at least on arms I, II and III; and a tentacular club bearing small sub-
equal suckers and protective membranes that are separate proximally.
Sepia typica, S. dubia and S. faurei have a Hemisepius-like shell with an
abbreviated phragmocone, whereas that of S. pulchra is typically sepiid. The
shell of S. robsoni is virtually unknown. Massy (1927: 160) mentioned only that
‘The calcareous portion of the shell has unfortunately been totally dissolved,
only the membranous part remaining’. Adam & Rees (1966: 121) found the shell
to be in poor condition and compared it to S. hieronis and S. insignis. If the
phragmocone of S. robsoni was not of the normal sepiid type, Adam & Rees
would certainly have mentioned it.
The convenient separation of these five species into three with a hemisepiid
shell and two with a normal shell is not borne out by other characters of the
animals. Sepia robsoni and S. faurei both have dorsal arms with finger-like tips,
devoid of suckers, whereas S. dubia and S. pulchra are virtually indistinguish-
able at present except by the shell characters.
The resolution of the relationships within this group of five species must
await the collection of further specimens of S. robsoni, S. dubia and S. faurei,
A NEW SPECIES OF SEPIA FROM SOUTH AFRICA LS
Fig. 10. Sepia pulchra sp. nov. Fig. 11. Sepia pulchra sp. nov.
Dorsal view of shell of holotype, Ventral view of shell of holotype,
SAM-S1036, ¢ III 17. SAM-S1036, ¢ III 17.
Scale = 5 mm. Scale = 5 mm.
each of which is known only by the holotype. The problem is further compli-
cated by the small size of the animals and the difficulty in extracting the very
delicate shells.
BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
The collection of live specimens of Sepia pulchra has provided the oppor-
tunity to add a few notes on the biology of the species. The sole, formed by the
fleshy keels on the mantle (Fig. 12) and the swollen under-surfaces of the ventral
arms, is found in several species (see above), but its use has not been figured
before. Since most of the specimens of S. pulchra were observed (by W.R.L.)
adhering to vertical rock faces in the head-down position, the sole must be of
considerable importance in maintaining this position. Camouflage against the
background would then be effected by the extensive tuberculation of the dorsal
surface of the mantle, head and arms; the well-known ability of sepiids to
undergo extreme variation in colour pattern would be a further contributing
factor. The reason for the pigmentation of the part of the ventral mantle surface
between the keels and fin bases in this species became obvious on observing
animals in an aquarium. When an animal adheres to the hard substrate, these
parts of the mantle are clearly visible (Fig. 12) and thus also require to be
camouflaged, whereas in species that settle on a sandy substrate this part of the
mantle is not usually visible.
Two mature males (SAM-S1031) were found to have spermatophores
attached to the hectocotylus, allowing the position of the spermatophores to be
16 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 12. Sepia pulchra sp. nov., adhering to rock by fleshy keels of
mantle; in this instance the ventral arms are not participating in the
~adhesion; SAM-S1039, 2 III 19, photographed in aquarium.
illustrated for the first time (as far as could be established). While copulation has
been observed in S. officinalis (Grimpe 1926; Bott 1938; Tinbergen 1939), it has
been found difficult to see the actual transfer of spermatophores, since this is
obscured by the intermingled arms of the mating animals. Bott (1938: 155) has
given a detailed description of spermatophore transfer from male to female: the
modified (proximal) portion of the hectocotylus, which bears a number of trans-
verse folds on the oral surface bordered by a reduced number of rudimentary
suckers, forms a groove connecting the funnel of the male with the bursa copula-
trix on the buccal membrane of the female. According to Bott’s observations the
hectocotylus thus functions as a passage for the spermatophores.
The structure of the hectocotylus of S. pulchra is basically like that of
S. officinalis. However, observations on S. pulchra suggest that the spermato-
phores not only pass along the hectocotylus but are actually attached to the arm
(Figs 13-14). Furthermore, Figure 14 shows that the spermatophores are
attached to the hectocotylus not only in the ridged area between the rudimen-
tary suckers, but also on the lateral part of the arm outside the sucker rows.
Though the attachment of spermatophores to the hectocotylus is not very firm,
since the spermatophores are fairly easily dislodged in preserved specimens, the
strength of attachment was nevertheless sufficient to maintain the spermato-
phore position during capture, transport and preservation of these two
specimens. The means of attachment of the spermatophores to the hectocotylus
would appear to be mucous, since there was no evidence of any structural
attachment, nor did the suckers appear to play a part.
Examination of the bundle of spermatophores of S$. pulchra illustrated in
Figure 13 showed the spermatophores to have discharged and be interspersed
A NEW SPECIES OF SEPIA FROM SOUTH AFRICA
Fig. 13. Sepia pulchra sp. nov. Position of spermatophore bundle
on modified portion of hectocotylized left ventral arm; SAM-—S1031,
3 III 17. Scale =2 mm.
Fig. 14. Sepia pulchra sp. nov. Position of individual spermato-
phores on hectocotylus, after most of spermatophore bundle
removed; SAM-—S1031, d III 18. Scale = 2 mm.
i
18 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
with sperm reservoirs, the bundle being held together by mucus or perhaps
cement from the cement bodies of the spermatophores. The spermatophores in
this bundle were all held together by their oral ends, an apparently unnatural
condition possibly attributable to the capture and handling of the animal.
However, the spermatophores illustrated in Figure 14, which had also ejacu-
lated, were attached to the hectocotylus by their aboral ends, an orientation
more consistent with the observation that spermatophores leave the penis
aboral-end first and are carried to the female oral-end first, being held in posi-
tion by the male until the spermatophores have discharged and the sperm
reservoirs are fixed by the cement to the female, either in the mantle cavity or
on the buccal membrane (Drew 1919: 398, 413).
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
We would like to thank Mr F. Naggs of the British Museum (Natural
History) for making the holotype of Sepia dubia available for re-examination.
We would also like to thank the following colleagues at the South African
Museum for their help: Dr V. B. Whitehead for comments on the manuscript;
Mr S. X. Kannemeyer and Ms S. Dove for assistance with the photography.
REFERENCES
ApaM, W. & REES, W. J. 1966. A review of the cephalopod family Sepiidae. Scient. Rep. John
Murray Exped. 11(1): 1-165. ;
Bott, R. 1938. Kopula und Eiablage von Sepia officinalis L. Z. Morph. Okol. Tiere 34:
150-160.
CLARKE, M. R. 1962. The identification of cephalopod ‘beaks’ and the relationship between
beak size and total body weight. Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Zool.) 8: 421-480.
Drew, G. A. 1919. Sexual activities of the squid Loligo pealii (Les.). Il. The spermatophore;
its structure, ejaculation and formation. J. Morph. 32: 379-435.
GrimPe, G. 1926. Biologische Beobachtungen an Sepia officinalis. Verh. dt. zool. Ges. 31:
148-153.
Massy, A. L. 1927. The Cephalopoda of the South African Museum. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 25:
151-167.
ROELEVELD, M. A. 1972. A review of the Sepiidae (Cephalopoda) of southern Africa. Ann. S.
Afr. Mus. 59: 193-313.
TINBERGEN, L. 1939. Zur Fortpflanzungsethologie von Sepia officinalis L. Archs néerl. Zool. 3:
323-364.
Wo rr, G. A. 1982. A beak key for eight eastern tropical Pacific cephalopod species with
relationships between their beak dimensions and size. Fishery Bull. natn. ocean. atmos.
Adm. 80: 357-370.
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the Jnternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. *... the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’; *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. DuToit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
MARTINA A. ROELEVELD
&
W. R. LILTVED
A NEW SPECIES OF SEPIA
(CEPHALOPODA, SEPIIDAE)
FROM SOUTH AFRICA
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN >
CAPE TOWN
CO ESE ie
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced
with 2,5 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of
legends for illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All
pages should be numbered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small
capitals; second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered
italics. Further subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals)
of headings and abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking
up should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18 cm (19 cm including
legend); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated; originals larger than
35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and final
size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the legend; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be
taken into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates
are not printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a
single series. Items of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of
figures is not set in type and should be in lower-case letters.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of
the paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes...’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 19696; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
Dagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically
within each name, with suffixes a, b, etc. to the year for more than one paper by the same
author in that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 19695) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher. :
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (abbreviated according to the World list o,
scientific periodicals. 4th ed. London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part
number (only if independently paged) in parentheses, pagination (first and last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BULLOUGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FISCHER, P.—H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de le vitalité des mollusques. J. Conch., Paris 88: 100-140.
FiscHer, P.-H., DuvAL, M. & RarFFy, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archs
Zool. exp. gén. 74: 627-634.
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon.
Ann, Mag. nat. Hist. (13) 2: 309-320.
Konn, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean.
Bull. Bingham oceanogr. Coll. 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca: B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische
und anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Siid-Afrika 4: 269-270.
Jena: Fischer. Denkschr. med.-naturw. Ges. Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 96 Band
February 1985 Februarie
Rant’) 2) Deel
A ZOOGEOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF THE
FISHES OF THE FAMILY MYCTOPHIDAE
(OSTEICHTHYES, MYCTOPHIFORMES) FROM
THE 1979-SARGASSO SEA EXPEDITION OF
~~ R.V. ANTON DOHRN
By
P. ALEXANDER HULLEY
&
GERHARD KREFFT
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
Te Ges, S29) OL as), tev ES, 5, EO),
GGL, G0), C—), & OED, 1), OES),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t.-p.i.), 14(1-2), 15(4-5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 45(1)
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 063 X
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The’ Rustica’ Press, Pty, (tds, Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
A ZOOGEOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF THE FISHES OF THE
FAMILY MYCTOPHIDAE (OSTEICHTHYES, MYCTOPHIFORMES)
FROM THE 1979-SARGASSO SEA EXPEDITION
OF R.V. ANTON DOHRN
By
P. ALEXANDER HULLEY
South African Museum, Cape Town
&
GERHARD KREFFT
formerly Institut fiir Seefischerei der Bundesforschungsanstalt
ftir Fischerei, Hamburg
(With 22 figures and 12 tables)
[MS accepted 31 July 1984]
ABSTRACT
During the second leg of the 1979—Sargasso Sea Expedition, R.V. Anton Dohrn occupied a
series of stations running south-east of Bermuda to about 25°N and then north-eastwards to the
mouth of the English Channel. The MT-1600 and IKMT myctophid samples are analysed
independently, using abundances and employing the Bray-Curtis similarity measure with group-
average sorting and multi-dimensional scaling ordination. The analyses suggest that for the
temperate and subtropical regions of the North Atlantic Ocean, the regional system proposed by
Backus et al. (1977) is basically accurate, but that the division into North and South Sargasso Sea
Provinces requires greater scrutiny, particularly with regard to depth. Indicator species are
extracted from the data by the application of information statistic tests. These allow for some
comment on community structuring in the geographic regions covered by the transect. The South
Sargasso Sea Province is distinguished from the North Sargasso Sea Province by differences in
species abundances rather than by differences in faunal structure. The distribution patterns of
Electrona risso, Hygophum benoiti, Benthosema glaciale, and Lampanyctus crocodilus are
discussed, those of the latter two species in more detail. It appears that various intraspecific
changes do occur across boundary zones, so that the interpretation of these changes should be of
prime concern in future investigations of distribution. In conclusion, when catch data are
compared with described patterns and subpatterns of distribution, the general rule that species
diversity decreases with increasing latitude and that larger populations occur in cold-water
species than in warm-water species is confirmed.
CONTENTS
PAGE
MAPTOMN GIO wires an wee ae ee om Miike gh a en oy ce 20
WiatehialsvanCIMmethodS 2.2 ona ease cea ee ceed ss 20
ResSulisranediGiSCUSSiONe 2s 6 =. eee 3 oe eS eed eek en Sk 24
NCKMOWICCSEMEMES Me 2 eri sicRytisle secyans 2a Behe tee Bek qaoek sais 53
EX CRCOLCH CCS ME ey ene re A ee ames ete MeL 53
19
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 96(2), 1985: 19-53, 22 figs, 12 tables.
20 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
INTRODUCTION
Recent investigations of Atlantic mesopelagic ichthyogeography have
culminated in a series of distributional analyses by Parin et al. (1974), Krefft
(1974, 1978), and Hulley (1981). A system of zoogeographic regions and
provinces has been proposed by Backus et al. (1977), whose method is based on
the conformance of distribution patterns of individual species to selected oceanic
physical boundaries.
The aims of this paper are threefold: firstly, to attempt to assess the accuracy
of the faunal region and province system, as proposed by Backus ef al. (1977), in
the subtropical-temperate North Atlantic, using the Myctophidae and a method
based on abundances; secondly, to examine some of the nuances of myctophid
intraspecific change at boundary zones, which may help to justify this system; and
thirdly, to hone current ideas on the problematic distribution patterns of some
lanternfish species.
MATERIALS AND METHODS
The data used in this analysis are the Myctophidae collected by the R.V.
Anton Dohrn during the 1979-Sargasso Sea Expedition. The primary objective of
this expedition was to investigate aspects of the distribution and biology of eels.
The stations occupied are given in Figure 1. During the first leg of the expedition,
about 5 000 lanternfish specimens were obtained from the stepped MT-—1600,
IKMT and MOCNESS hauls (stations AD 23/79 through AD 256/79). The area
sampled lay mainly to the south-south-east of Bermuda. The second leg (stations
AD 268/79 through 401/79) yielded 15 494 lanternfishes from an MT-1600
transect and 1 715 specimens from IKMT stations, which were occupied during
the same transect. The transect ran south-east from Bermuda to about 25°N and
then in a north-easterly direction towards the southern entrance of the English
Channel (Fig. 1). All material was identified, counted and measured at sea, and
representative collections are now housed in the following institutions:
Institut fiir Seefischerei, Zoologisches Museum, Hamburg (ISH)
Muséum National d’Histoire Naturelle, Paris
National Museum of Natural History, Smithsonian Institution, Washington
South African Museum, Cape Town
Zoologisk Museum, Copenhagen
In addition, data from a series of synoptic neuston tows have been examined
(H.-C. John, Zoologisches Museum, Hamburg, pers. comm.).
A description of the XBT sections has been given by Wegner (1979) and the
temperature section is reproduced as Figure 12. The hydrographic features for
some second-leg stations, AD 265/79 through AD 303/79, are included in the
descriptions of the Sargasso Sea in spring 1979 (Wegner 1982).
Data only from the second leg have been used for zoogeographic analysis
because of the more extensive area sampled during the transect. Further, since
A ZOOGEOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF THE MYCTOPHIDAE ps
SARGASSO SEA _ EXPEDITION
1.LEG 2. LEG
OMT 1600 @ MT 1600
OO ikmtT)3 @ oikmt
MOCNESS NOT PLOTTED
Fig. 1. Station positions for MT—1600 and IKMT hauls for first and second legs of the 1979-
Sargasso Sea Expedition of R.V. Anton Dohrn. (Note: The 14 IKMT stations from the second
leg of the transect are symbolized in this figure; due to the close proximity of certain stations, only
18 of the 38 MT-—1600 stations from this leg are depicted; relevant station data are given in
Tables 1 and 2.)
both an MT-1600 and an IKMT were deployed, data sets from the two sampling
methods could be tested independently. A data matrix of 63 species at 38 stations
resulted from the MT-—1600 samples, and a data matrix of 33 species at 14 stations
from the IKMT samples.
The strategy for analysing marine biological survey data described by
Field et al. (1982) was used. The methodology is only briefly described below, so
that the reader should refer to Field et al. (1982) for full details. The advantage of
the method is that biotic data are analysed completely separately from
environmental data, thereby avoiding any previous assumptions about relation-
ships between biota and environment, cf. Backus et al. (1977). The method allows
for normal or ‘q’-type analysis, in which stations are arranged into groups, each
having a similar biotic composition, and inverse or ‘r’-type analysis, in which the
species are grouped. Further, the application of the information statistic (/-) tests
to the data matrix provides a means for the recognition of indicator species
(Fig. 2).
In the case of the MT-—1600 samples, the raw data matrix was scaled to
achieve the number of specimens of each species in each haul (station) for a
standard period of one hour at fishing depth. The relationship between the
computer-generated station numbers and the R.V. Anton Dohrn MT-1600
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
dip
“SUIJIOS OBeIOAR
dnois Jo sosejueApesip suIpnjour
NOILVNIGUO
‘¢
eyep ASAINS [edIdO[OIQ Jo sIsAyeue JO POYJOU (786) “70 12 POL OY} JOJ eYO MOT °Z
XIYLVW ALIYVIIWIS
U
ONITVIS XJONI e+eq
—————S—SS>S—————— SO
TVNOISN3WIG- 1L7NW SILYNI -AVag pawuojsuew]
@
paziseydwa saijinuijuoosip 1o00u¥-10048
Aseyyique aduanbas
Ajuo sdiysuoijejay dnov6-sajui
NOILVIISISSV13
3]qiSuaAauu! Ayduevaly
ejeqg
ONILYOS J9VYEFIAV - dN0d9
pazipuepuels
U
aOR Ve SINISVa'S h
I USTU AES
NOILVWYOSNI
saijadg sojeripu]
©
.
314
A ZOOGEOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF THE MYCTOPHIDAE Mp)
station numbers is given in Table 1. Since density data are apparently often
skewed, in that the abundant species swamp the other data (Field et al. 1982), the
matrix was root-root transformed. Although the raw data matrix from the IKMT
samples was similarly transformed, no scaling factors were employed, because
each haul was fished for a standard time and to a similar depth.
The transformed data were then subjected to similarity analysis using the
Bray-Curtis measure, resulting in a triangular similarity matrix, whose entries
compare each of the samples with every other sample. The technique used to
TABLE 1
1979-Sargasso Sea Expedition (2nd leg). Station list of MT-1600 hauls indicating computer-
generated station numbers and their equivalent R.V. Anton Dohrn station numbers.
Computer AD sy Depth Time
eon no. station no. Osun OT ee (m) at depth
1 268/79 SING 163-27 W. 19.04.79 ce. 1700 1510-1555
2 269/79 30°0S'N 63°23'W 19.04.79 170 1944-1959
é) 270/79 31°01'N 63°15'W 19.04.79 250 2055-2110
4 276/79 28°41'N 60°54'W 20.04.79 c. 1800 1510-1600
5 284/79 26°11’N 58°26'W 21.04.79 2000 1500-1600
6 293/79 25°49'N 54°58'W 22.04.79 c. 2000 1505-1600
7 301/79 PEP ES IN SYN 23.04.79 2000 1455-1545
8 302-1/79 27°49'N = 52°13'W 23.04.79 300 =: 1915-1928
9 308/79 29°40'N 49°38'W 24.04.79 c. 2000 1535-1630
10 309-1/79 29°41’N 49°27'W 24.04.79 Oe OA 1932
11 314-1/79 30°43’N 46°16’W 25.04.79 2000 1637-1735
12 314-II/79 30°45’N 46°08’W 25.04.79 195 2015-2030
is) 315/79 30°47'N 46°04'W 25.04.79 306 =. 2110-2125
14 321/79 31°S1’N 42°55'W 26.04.79 1950 1630-1725
15 322/79 31°53’N 42°48'W 26.04.79 190 2002-2017
16 323/79 31°55'N 42°46'W 26.04.79 380 = 2057-2112
17 329/79 32°59'N 39°41'W 27.04.79 1950 1535-1630
18 330/79 33°01'N 39°34'W 27.04.79 185 1955-2010
19 331/79 33°04'N 39°29'W 27.04.79 345 = 2050-2110
20 338/79 34°21'N 35°29'W 28.04.79 1300 1700-1800
21 Boo 19 34°20'N 35°24'W 28.04.79 170 2040-2055
22 340/79 34°21'N 35°22'W 28.04.79 320 =. 2133-2148
23 345/79 35°24'N 32°01'W 29.04.79 1800 1700-1750
24 346-1/79 35°24'N 31°53'W 29.04.79 350 2030-2045
M5) 348/79 35°20’N 30°16’W 30.04.79 c. 1900 0640-0710
26 361/79 41°02'N 9 23°52'W 02.05.79 >2000 1135-1230
7]} 364/79 42°0S'N 23°30'W 02.05.79 155 = 2020-2035
28 365/79 42°06'N 23°29'W 02.05.79 340 = =2110-2125
29 371/79 44°54'N 22°16'W 03.05.79 2000 1638-1730
30 372/79 44°56'N 22°00'W 03.05.79 175 =. 2022-2037
Sill 373/79 44°56'N_ 21°57'W 03.05.79 340 2113-2128
32 380/79 44°S5’N_ 17°34'W 04.05.79 2000 1720-1820
33 381/79 44°55'N 17°22'W 04.05.79 205 2100-2115
34 382/79 44°56’N_ 17°18'W 04.05.79 c. 350 2204-2219
35 389/79 45°41'N 13°42'W 05.05.79 c. 2000 1713-1810
36 390/79 45°54'N 13°30'W 05.05.79 205 2044-2059
Si) 391/79 45°55'N 13°27'W 05.05.79 350. =. 2136-2151
38 398/79 47°42'N 09°08'W 06.05.79 2000 1837-2000
24 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
produce the dendrogram from the similarity matrix was group-average sorting,
which joins two groups of samples together at the average level of similarity
between all members of one group and all members of the other.
While dendrograms have the advantage of simplicity, they have a number of
disadvantages (fide Fig. 2), so that a multi-dimensional scaling (MDS) method of
ordination was also employed. This seeks to reconcile the interstation distances in
a specified number of dimensions in ordinary Euclidean space, with the physical
distances between points on a two-dimensional map.
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
Normal (‘q’-type) analysis
The dendrogram given in Figure 3 shows station affinities based on the root-
root transformed abundances of all 63 species of Myctophidae taken during the
MT-1600 transect. The broken line drawn at the arbitrary similarity level of
20 per cent. delineates two major groups of stations, while the broken line drawn
at the arbitrary similarity level of 40 per cent delimits three groups of stations:
Ss——6L/48Z2
9——6L/€62
L— 6L/LOE
1—— 6L /89E
8—6L/1-Z0E
7— 6L/9L2
6-— 6L /80€
—6L/1-71E
—6L/1-60€
——6L/0EE
t
0
8
Z
%
wn
=
(oat
>
a
+
=<
BREMERHAVEN - MT-1600 SAMPLES CLUSTERED (ROOT- ROOT TRANSFORMED)
Fig. 3. Dendrogram for station affinities for MT-—1600 hauls.
Group 1: which subsequently divides into three sub-groups at the 54 per cent
similarity level (arbitrary choice), designated Groups 1A!, 1A? and 1B (Fig. 3).
Groups 2 and 3: which are more closely related to each other than to
Group 1, and which both divide into two sub-groups, also at the 54 per cent
A ZOOGEOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF THE MYCTOPHIDAE 25
similarity level, designated Groups 2A and 2B and Groups 3A and 3B,
respectively.
The ordination of the similarity matrix using MDS (Fig. 4) gives the same
groupings as the dendrogram (Fig. 3). Attention should be directed to the
proximity of the two stations numbered 8 (in Group 3A) and 26 (in Group 1A‘),
BREMERHAVEN -MT 1600 STATIONS
PLOT: MDS (ROOT-ROOT TRANSFORMED)
54% SIMILARITY GROUP 1
33
GROUP 2
Subgroup 1A2
Subgroup 1B
Subgroup 1A!
Subgroup 2B
Subgroup 2A
Subgroup 3A
Subgroup 3B
GROUP 3
Fig. 4. MDS ordination of MT-—1600 station affinities.
to Groups 2A and 1B respectively. In order to check that the dendrogram is not
an artifact of the standardization employed in the manipulation of the raw data
matrix, the scaling factors have been superimposed on the MDS ordination
(Fig. 5). There appears to be no marked correlation, as is evident from the
numerous anomalies. The correlation appears to be somewhat better if daylight
and night data are superimposed on the ordination (Fig. 6). However, since the
sampling programme on board was such that the deep stations were usually fished
during the day and shallower stations usually at night, depth data have been
superimposed on the ordination (Fig. 7) and result in the best correlation:
1. All Group 1A? stations are shallow hauls; all Group 1B stations are deep
hauls; and the single station in Group 1A! (Station 26), a deep haul, has a close
affinity to the deep-haul stations of Group 1B.
2. Group 2A stations are all shallow hauls, while Group 2B stations are all
deep hauls.
3. Of the stations in Group 3, Station 8 (shallow haul) has a close affinity
with the shallow-haul stations of Group 2A.
26 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
BREMERHAVEN -MT 1600 STATIONS Suomen 1A"
PLOT: MDS (ROOT-ROOT TRANSFORMED)
SCALING FACTOR
(BX
ZS
CXS)
ee
Subgroup 2B
Subgroup 3A
Subgroup 3B
Fig. 5. Scaling factors superimposed on MDS ordination for MT—1600 hauls.
BREMERHAVEN -MT 1600 STATIONS
PLOT: MDS (ROOT-ROOT TRANSFORMED)
TIME OF DAY GROUP 1
(pec KOLA sro 1B
Subgroup 1A!
Subgroup 102
Suaorous 2) << Bes
Op =
@ ®
O eee en 3B
@
Subgroup 2B
Subgroup 3A
GROUP 3 O Day 06°°-18°°h
@ Night 18°°-06°°h
Fig. 6. Day and night data superimposed on MDS ordination for MT—1600 hauls.
A ZOOGEOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF THE MYCTOPHIDAE yay)
BREMERHAVEN -MT 1600 STATIONS subgroup aac
PLOT: MDS (ROOT-ROOT TRANSFORMED)
|cRouP 1
me v2
Yee aN ZS aula 1B
Lae = a ar
Zz Subgroup 2B
») ae 3B
Subgroup 3A
GROUP 3 © 110-380 m
@ > 1000m
Fig. 7. Depth data superimposed on MDS ordination for MT-—1600 hauls.
Geographic plots of these station groupings in terms of the Backus et al.
(1977) regional system (Fig. 8) reveal that:
(i) Group 1 stations are all found to the north of the proposed boundary
between the Temperate Region and the Subtropical Region, i.e. the 15 °C
isotherm at 200 m. They are Temperate Region stations, and both deep-
and shallow-haul stations belong to this group.
(ii) Group 2 stations are, in the main, found in the North Sargasso Sea Province
and the North North African Subtropical Sea Province. They are Subtropi-
cal Region stations and are closely associated with Group 3 stations.
(iii) Group 3 stations are in the main in the South Sargasso Sea Province, with
Group 3B representing the most southerly stations of the transect.
Of interest is the fact that at three geographical positions, both Group 2 and
Group 3 elements are present. The analysis shows that in each case the shallow-
haul stations are related to Group 2, i.e. they are subtropical, while the deeper-
haul stations are related to Group 3. This will be discussed below.
A similar procedure was followed for the IKMT data, but was less
complicated due to the fact that all hauls were at night and to about 200 m. The
relationship between the computer-generated station numbers and the R.V.
Anton Dohrn IKMT station numbers is given in Table 2. Figure 9 is the
dendrogram of the station affinities, based on root-root transformed abundances
of 33 species of Myctophidae taken at 14 stations. The broken line drawn at the
arbitrary similarity levels of both 20 per cent and 40 per cent delimits two major
GROUP 2 - 170m: 250m
GROUP 3 - 1700m
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ERATE
AS
GROUP 2 -
GROUP 3 -
GROUP 2 - 110m
GROUP 3- 2000m
—~_l
REGION
h African Subtropical Sea
195m: 306m
2000m
GROUP 1
GROUP 2
[_] GRouP 3
70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0
Fig. 8. Geographic plots of MT-—1600 hauls showing distribution of Groups 1, 2, and 3.
TABLE 2
1979-Sargasso Sea Expedition (2nd leg). Station list of IKMT hauls indicating
computer-generated station numbers and their equivalent R.V. Anton Dohrn
station numbers.
Computer
AD
station no. station no. Position Date
1 277/79 28°20'N 60°33'W 20.04.79
2 286/79 25°52'N 58°12-W 21.04.79
3 294/79 25°49'N 54°31’W 22.04.79
4 302-IT/79 24 SUING S21 Wi 23.04.79
5) 309-IT/79 29°41'N 49°27'W 24.04.79
6 316/79 30°48’N 46°02’W 25.04.79
7 324/79 31°56’N 42°43'W 26.04.79
8 332/79 33°04’'N 29°34'W 27.04.79
9 346-IT/79 35°23'N 31°51’W 29.04.79
10 366/79 42°07'N 23°29'W 02.05.79
11 374/79 44°56’N_ 21°55'W 03.05.79
12 383/79 44°56'N_ 17°17'W 04.05.79
13 399/79 47°44'N_ 08°58'W 06.05.79
14 401/79 47°58'N 08°16'W 07.05.79
A ZOOGEOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF THE MYCTOPHIDAE 29
°
eS
n
=
>
aD
=
~<
BREMERHAVEN -IKMT SAMPLES CLUSTERED (ROOT - ROOT TRANSFORMED)
Fig. 9. Dendrogram for station affinities for IKMT hauls.
groups of stations, while the broken line drawn at the arbitrary similarity level of
50 per cent delimits three groups of stations, designated Groups 1, 2 and 3. The
MDS ordination plots for the IKMT stations (Fig. 10) support this and
demonstrate further that Groups 2 and 3 have a closer affinity to each other than
either to Group 1. The geographical plots of the IKMT groupings (Fig. 11)
support not only the results obtained from the analysis of the MT—1600 samples,
but also support the ideas regarding the affinities of those stations immediately
adjacent to the boundaries between the provinces of the Subtropical Region.
That is, these shallow hauls show an affinity with the North Sargasso Sea or North
North African Subtropical Sea Provinces within the boundaries proposed by
Backus et al. (1977), while Group 3 stations are well within the South Sargasso
Sea Province.
Examination of the temperature section for the transect (Fig. 12) reveals that
there are three main hydrographic features:
1. Stations AD 275/79 through AD 305/79 are characterized by the presence
of water warmer than 20 °C in the upper 50 m; by a layer of ‘18 °C water’ between
200 m and about 400 m, the intermediate layer of the whole Sargasso Sea Region
(Wegner 1979); and by the position of the 15 °C isotherm below about 500 m.
These stations cover the region of the warm South Sargasso Sea Water. While
Wegner (1982) points out that the convergence area is demarcated by the 21 °C
and 22 °C isotherms in depths of 100 m, this feature is not well defined over the
MT-—1600 transect (Fig. 12; Wegner 1982, fig. 3a), due to the fact that there is a
masking layer of transition water to the north. A similar condition appears to be
40
30
BREMERHAVEN - IKMT STATIONS
PLOT: MDS (ROOT-ROOT TRANSFORMED)
SIMILARITY
50%
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH
AFRICAN MUSEUM
GROUP 1
GROUP 2
GROUP 3
Fig. 10. MDS ordination of IKMT station affinities.
70
(rear Even)
YJ
ERATE REGION
30
IKMT STATIONS
a
African Subtropical Sea
iY
©) Group 1
A Group 2
[_] GRouP 3
10
Fig. 11. Geographic plots of IKMT hauls showing distribution of Groups 1, 2, and 3.
3)
A ZOOGEOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF THE MYCTOPHIDAE
002
009
oos
007
Oo€
002
ool
‘(6L6[ 1OUSIAA I91Je) UOTIPedx| vag ossesIeS—6/6] 9Y} JO 3a] puOdas dy} JO UONSES sINjeIOdWa], “7 “SIF
\fv vA bee ‘ 7
Ni
ol
OS Wor
Bae
rai
AN.
J
€l
004
009
00S
007
OO€
002
ool
89€
08d
642
Lz
942
SLZ
7LZ
EL7
CLG
892
992
YN
S9¢
O02
oos
007
00Z
009
00s
007
Oo€
002
ool
32 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
evident over that region which includes stations AD 306/79 through AD 318/79.
Unfortunately, salinity distribution, which usually gives a better resolution for
convergence determination, gave only the surface distribution across this transect
(Wegner 1982). South Sargasso Sea Water probably occurred from about
AD 279/79 to AD 306/79. On the basis of the biological analysis, the stations from
this region represent those of Group 3.
2. Stations AD 321/79 through AD 351/79 are characterized by water of
17-19 °C, which replaces the warm South Sargasso Sea Water (>20 °C) in the
upper 150 m; the absence of ‘18 °C water’ in depths of 200 m to 400 m; the
position of the 15 °C isotherm between 200 m and 500 m; and the position of the
11 °C isotherm in depths below 500 m (550-650 m). Group 2 stations are found
over this region of the transect.
3. Stations AD 352/79 through AD 403/79, which include the biological
sampling stations AD 361/79 to AD 401/79, are characterized by the position of —
the 15 °C isotherm in depths shallower than 200 m; and by the position of the
11 °C isotherm in depths shallower than about 500 m. The biological grouping of
these stations is Group 1.
A summary of these relationships is given in Table 3.
TABLE 3
1979-Sargasso Sea Expedition (2nd leg). MT—1600 hauls: Relation-
ships of the myctophid MDS-ordination analysis to temperatures
at depth.
Temperatures (°C)
Depth ee
(m) Group I Group 2 Group 3
100 <=15 15-19 >20
500 <<ilil 12-15 >15
As has been pointed out above, at certain geographic positions (AD 268/79-—
270/79; AD 308/79-309-I/79; AD 314-I/79-315/79) both Group 2 stations (hauls
to 250 m) and Group 3 stations (hauls below 1 700 m) were present. As can be
seen in Figure 12, the temperature profiles at these positions reveal that, while the
15 °C isotherm lies below 500 m and there is ‘18 °C water’ between 200 m and
400 m, conditions that approximate those for Group 3 stations, the temperature
regime in the upper 200 m is characteristic of Group 2 stations, i.e. those of the
North Sargasso Sea and North North African Subtropical Provinces and the
transition zones immediately adjacent to the convergence. The inclusion of the
MT—1600 station, AD 276/79 (c. 1 800 m), of Group 3, with the adjacent IKMT—
station, AD 277/79 (100 f.w.o.) of Group 2, would tend to support the
temperature parameters suggested above, particularly if the position of the
convergence is defined according to Wegner’s (1982) criteria.
A ZOOGEOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF THE MYCTOPHIDAE 33
The groupings for the shallow-haul stations from both the MT-—1600 and the
IKMT transects have been amalgamated and isohalines at 200 m, taken from
Wist & Defant (1936), have been superimposed on a geographical plot (Fig. 13),
in order to elucidate relationships of these groups to salinity. The relationship of
the Group 3 stations to the region of high salinity is fairly good. Since the lens of
©) croup 1
A GRouP 2
[|] GRouP 3
70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0
Fig. 13. Geographic plots of shallow stations (MT-1600 and IKMT) in relation to isohalines,
from Wist & Defant (1936).
high-temperature and high-salinity water at the gyral-eye is inclined from 200 m
in the west to 800-1 000 m in the east, and since this warm, saline water extends
farther to the east and north-east at greater depths than at shallower depths (as
indicated by isohaline examination in Wist & Defant 1936), the above
interpretation of these data may be correct.
Indicator species and community structure
In discussing these topics with regard to the 1979-transect, several facts
should be borne in mind. Firstly, 2A/; has approximate chi-square distribution
but lacks statistical rigour (Field et al. 1982). The scores of 2AJ/; > 3,84 (5%
probability level) and 2A/; > 6,63 (1% probability level) are therefore only
employed as a ‘rule of thumb’ for the cut-off limits. Secondly, it is evident to us
that certain small species (Diogenichthys atlanticus and Notolychnus valdiviae)
and surface migrators (Gonichthys cocco, Myctophum nitidulum, and Symbo-
lophorus rufinus) are not well represented in MT—1600 samples. This may be due
34 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
to the mesh size in front of the cod-end liner of the MT—1600, or the fact that on
hauling the MT-—1600 collapses just below the surface, or both. Other species
(Lampadena anomala, Loweina interrupta, and Loweina rara) may indeed be
uncommon. Thirdly, our data result from a single transect. Therefore seasonal
changes in distributional range and seasonal variability in myctophid community
structure cannot be discussed. Unpublished data from more recent cruises have
indicated that this may be of importance, e.g. in Bolinichthys supralateralis,
Diaphus dumerilii, and Lampadena urophaos atlantica. Finally, and in addition to
its known inefficiency in sampling the myctophid fauna, the IKMT was fished only
to 200 m, thereby biasing the results for the deeper-living species (Lampanyctus
crocodilus and L. photonotus). Only about half (52,38 %) of the species caught by
the MT-—1600 are represented in the IKMT samples. Therefore a table of the
indicator species only is presented for the IKMT data (Table 8).
Results of information statistic (/-) tests for the MT—1600 data, which are
calculated from the numbers of specimens (density), are presented in Tables 4, 5
and 6. Table 4 lists the species that are characteristic of Group 1 and distinguish
them from combined species of Group 2 and Group 3. There are no ‘perfect’
indicator species. That is, there are no species that occur in all samples of Group 1
and in none of the samples of the compared groups. However, all those species
listed may be considered to be indicators, whose presence or absence at stations
TABLE 4
1979-Sargasso Sea Expedition (2nd leg). MT-—1600 hauls: Frequencies of occurrence (F) and
numbers of individuals (N) of species, ranked according to information statistics, which
distinguish Group 1 (Fi, Ni) from Groups 2 and 3 (F2+3, N2+3). 2A/; values are calculated from
numbers of specimens. Species above horizontal dotted line have 2A/; > 6,63; those below line
have 2A/; > 3,84; species with 2A/; < 3,84 are not included. Maximum values for F and F2+3
are given in parentheses.
Species as M eS N2+3 DLE
Benthosema glaciale 13) 11 698 il 4 25 026,911
Notoscopelus kroeyerii 12 7 163 0 0 15 366,595
Myctophum punctatum 12 1 969 1 4 4 169,793
Ceratoscopelus maderensis 10 613 3 70 922,185
Symbolophorus veranyi JU 494 6 32 845,378
Notoscopelus bolini 3) 743 8 187 817,022
Electrona risso 2 437 8) 721 \ 784,590
Diaphus holti 11 394 2 46 588,997
Lampanyctus crocodilus 1 285 4 10 532,432
Diaphus rafinesquii WZ 458 14 380 146,311
Lampanyctus intricarius 10 55 0 0 117,990
Lampanyctus macdonaldi 3 14 0 0 30,034
Lampadena speculigera 5 11 0 0 23,598
Protomyctophum arcticum 4 11 0 0 23,598
Loweina interrupta 1 4 0 0 8,581
Ce Ct tt i, cc
Diaphus metopoclampus 4 14 + 10 5,807
A ZOOGEOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF THE MYCTOPHIDAE
35
within the group is a function of their geographic range and/or vertical
distribution pattern, e.g. Lampanyctus macdonaldi and Protomyctophum arcti-
cum. Comparison of the frequencies of occurrence within (F:) and outside (F2+3)
the group is an expression of fidelity; that is, the degree of exclusiveness that the
species shows towards Group 1 (Temperate Region community), while numbers
TABLE 5
1979-Sargasso Sea Expedition (2nd leg). MT-1600 hauls: Frequencies of occurrence (F') and
numbers of individuals (N) of species, ranked according to information statistics, which
distinguish Group 2 (F2, N2) from Groups 1 and 3 (Fi+3, Ni+3). Other conventions as in Table 4.
Species
Ceratoscopelus warmingii
Hygophum hygomii
Lobianchia gemellarii
Hygophum benoiti
Lobianchia dofleini
Diaphus mollis
Bolinichthys indicus
Notoscopelus resplendens
Lampanyctus photonotus
Lampandena urophaos atlantica
Lepidophanes gaussi
Notoscopelus caudispinosus
Benthosema suborbitale
Lampadena chavesi
Lampanyctus festivus
Hygophum reinhardtii
Diaphus effulgens
Taaningichthys minimus
Diogenichthys atlanticus
Lampanyctus pusillus
Lampanyctus ater
Lepidophanes guentheri
Diaphus lucidus
Diaphus splendidus
Diaphus brachycephalus
Loweina rara
Diaphus problematicus
Diaphus perspicillatus
Notolychnus valdiviae
Myctophum selenops
Diaphus dumerilii
Hygophum taaningi
Bolinichthys photothorax
Centrobranchus nigroocellatus
Diaphus bertelseni
Lampanyctus lineatus
N2
4944
4214
F423
(21)
NAODOODOOPONDRCOOFROTOTBROBRRPNNANTOMA BRR N~TYNNO CO CO
hoocOoHhoOoUOOrOCOWCO SO
Zo Jed
6 826,668
5 741,827
4 534,569
2 540,122
2 358,445
ZW
11323) 72)1l
893,924
796,776
542,372
501,633
412,061
357,142
334,619
240,593
238,318
190,735
174,361
152,429
140,861
1385223
128,113
102,960
96,525
94,196
59,524
51,480
42,157
41,827
34,408
33,784
27,590
17,696
CO i
Diaphus termophilus
Lampanyctus nobilis
Lampanyctus alatus
36 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 6
1979-Sargasso Sea Expedition (2nd leg). MT-—1600 hauls: Frequencies of
occurrence (F’) and numbers of individuals (N) of species, ranked according
to information statistics, which distinguish Group 3 (F3, N3) from Groups 1
and 2 (Fi+2, Ni+2). Other conventions as in Table 4.
Species e N3 oh Ni+2 2 Ae
Lampanyctus cuprarius 8 184 13 126 214,132
of individuals (Ni) are indicative of their relative abundance. A plot of cumulative
percentage densities for those ranked species with 2A /; > 6,63 (Fig. 14) reveals
that 5 species (Benthosema glaciale, Notoscopelus kroeyerii, Myctophum puncta-
tum, Notoscopelus bolini, and Ceratoscopelus maderensis) are dominant and
comprise about 90 per cent of the total. The NM; and N2+3 values for Notoscopelus
bolini are high, and the sampled material consists mainly of very small juvenile
specimens (SL 24—42 mm). Only a single adult specimen (SL 92 mm) of this
species was taken during the transect (in the Group 1 area). A similar bias is
evident in the IKMT samples (see below). Shannon diversity indices (H) for the
Group 1 stations (MT-—1600 samples) were calculated using:
k
n logign — y fi logio fi
i=1
H=
n
H values ranged between 0,42 and 1,12 (Table 7). Of the 15 species (with
2 Al; > 6,63) involved in this community, 10 are endemic to the temperate North
Atlantic, 4 possess a Bitemperate Pattern and 1 species, Electrona risso, is said to
have either an Eastern Pattern (Backus et al. 1977) or a Widespread Pattern
(Hulley 1981). Two genera are represented by 2 species each (Diaphus holti,
D. rafinesquii, Notoscopelus bolini, and N. kroeyerii) and one genus by 3 species
(Lampanyctus crocodilus, L. intricarius, and L. macdonaldi). In relation to niche
separation, data from the 1982—Mid-Atlantic Ridge and 1983-—TIFI-8 cruises
indicate possible differences in spawning season and a noticeable degree of
vertical separation of adult specimens of the Lampanyctus species, while
Notoscopelus kroeyerii may well have to be re-assessed as a pseudoceanic species
(unpublished data). Comment on the association of Diaphus holti with
Mediterranean Outflow Water has already been made (Hulley 1981).
Similarly, Table 5 lists those species that are characteristic of Group 2 and
distinguish it from Groups 1 and 3. Again, there are no ‘perfect’ indicator species
for the group, but Notoscopelus resplendens is always present in Group 2 and
occurs very rarely (only once, with 13 specimens) in the other groups. There are
only 5 species that are endemic to the Atlantic; 19 species have Broadly Tropical
Patterns, 11 have Subtropical Patterns, 5 have Tropical Patterns, 3 have
A ZOOGEOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF THE MYCTOPHIDAE aT
DENSITY
O—A—S- Group 1
PERCENTAGE
== OO (OUP eZ
CUMULATIVE
0 10 20 30 40
NUMBER OF SPECIES
Fig. 14. Graph of cumulative percentage densities for Group 1 and Group 2.
Widespread Patterns, and 1 species (Hygophum benoiti) is said to have a
North Temperate Pattern (Hulley 1981). Cumulative percentage density plots
(Fig. 14) reveal that 11 species (with 2A J; > 6,63) comprise about 90 per cent
of the total, more than double the number in Group 1. Shannon diversity indices
(H) for the stations range between 0,91 and 1,21 (Table 7). It should
be noted that Hygophum benoiti, which has been included in the Temperate-
subtropical Subpattern of the Cool Water Group (Hulley 1981), is a Group 2
indicator.
Only one species (Lampanyctus cuprarius, an Atlantic endemic) is character-
istic of Group 3, when compared with Groups 1 and 2 (Table 6). It would appear
therefore that the community structure of Group 3 is not different from that of
Group 2 and that the distinction of these two groups is based rather on species
abundances. This feature has already been noted (Backus et al. 1969) and is
probably linked to differences in food supply, as indicated by the primary
38
1979-Sargasso Sea Expedition (2nd leg). MT-—1600 hauls: Shannon Index of Diversity (H) and
Evenness (J) based on 63 myctophid species. Maximum depth of haul in metres; computer station
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 7
number in parenthesis, following AD station numbers.
0-210 m
Group 1 (Hmax = 1,79)
390/79 (36) H=0,47
J =0,26
381/79 (33) H=0,47
d —
372/79 (30) H=0,54
J = 0,30
364/79 (27) H=0,95
J = 0,53
Group 2 (Amax = 1,79)
339/79 (21) H=1,09
J=0,61
330/79 (18) H=1,01
J =0,56
322/79 (15) H=0,94
J =0,52
314/79 (12) H=0,97
J=0,54
269/79 (2) H=0,91
J=0,51
309/79 (10) H=0,91
J=0,51
Group 3 (Hmax = 1,79)
Depths
211-350 m
391/79 (37) H=0,60
J =0,33
382/79 (34) H=0,64
J =0,35
373/79 (31) H=0,42
J=0,24
365/79 (28) H=0,77
J=0,43
346/79 (24) H=0,94
J=0,53
340/79 (22) H=1,17
J =0,65
331/79 (19) H=1,21
J =0,67
323/79 (16) H=1,07
J =0,59
315/79 (13) H=1,05
J=0,58
270/79 (3) H=0,93
J =0,52
302/79 (8) H=0,97
J=0,54
>1 800 m
398/79 (38) H=0,52
J =0,29
389/79 (35) H=0,81
= 0,45
380/79 (32) H=0,85
J =0,47
371/79 (29) H=0,61
J =0,34
361/79 (26) H=1,12
J =0,62
348/79 (25) H=1,16
J =0,64
345/79 (23) H=1,14
J =0,64
338/79 (20) H=1,07
J =0,60
329/79 (17) H=1,08
J =0,60
321/79 (14) H=1,12
J =0,62
268/79 (1) H=1,07
J =0,60
314/79 (11) H=0,86
308/79
276/79
301/79
293/79 (6) H=1,00
(5) H=0,80
7=0,45
284/79
Latitude
48°N
46°N
45°N
45°N
42°N
35°N
35°N
34°N
33°N
32°N
31°N
31°N
30°N
31°N
31°N
30°N
29°N
28°N
26°N
26°N
A ZOOGEOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF THE MYCTOPHIDAE 39
productivity values of the two areas (Hela & Laevastu 1962). However,
examination of our data and those of Nafpaktitis et al. (1977) reveals that the
following species, present in Group 2, have never been recorded from the South
Sargasso Sea Province: Diaphus bertelseni, D. lucidus, Lampadena chavesi, and
Notoscopelus bolini. Hygophum hygomii occurs at seven of the eight MT-—1600
stations of Group 3 and is represented in the IKMT data by a single specimen (SL
17 mm) from 27°51'N 52°11’W. Shannon diversity indices for Group 3 stations
range between 0,76 and 1,07 (Table 7).
Table 8 lists the indicator species extracted from the IKMT data using
information statistics. In general, there is good agreement between this set and
the set obtained from our MT—1600 data (Tables 4-6). However, there are three
exceptions (Lampanyctus crocodilus, L. photonotus, and Notoscopelus bolini).
These, we feel, are a reflection of the limitations of the IKMT sampling method
(see above) and should therefore be treated with extreme caution.
TABLE 8
1979-Sargasso Sea Expedition (2nd leg). IKMT hauls: Indicator species based on information
statistic (J-) tests, where 2/A/; > 6,63. Anomalous species (marked with an asterisk) are
discussed in the text.
Group 1 Group 2 Group 3
Benthosema glaciale Benthosema suborbitale *Lampanyctus photonotus
Ceratoscopelus maderensis Bolinichthys indicus
Myctophum punctatum Ceratoscopelus warmingii
Notoscopelus kroeyerii Diogenichthys atlanticus
Hygophum hygomii
* Lampanyctus crocodilus
Lampanyctus pusillus
Lepidophanes gaussi
Lobianchia dofleini
Lobianchia gemellarii
*Notoscopelus bolini
Notoscopelus resplendens
In summary then, the number of species comprising the myctophid
community in Group 1 (North Atlantic Temperate Region) is less than the
number in Groups 2 and 3 (North Atlantic Subtropical Region), with correspon-
ding lower values for the index of diversity, but a greater degree of dominance
among the most abundant species. The apparent increase in the species diversity
index (#7) with increasing depth (Table 7) is an artifact. The MT-—1600, which is
not an opening and closing net, samples the entire water column to the maximum
fishing depth of a particular haul.
Because of this, detailed examination of the correlation between fishing
depth and the subgroupings within each of Groups 1, 2, and 3 is somewhat
presumptuous. Such discussion is further constrained by the variable nature of the
sampling programme carried out during the transect. Firstly, two shallow hauls
40 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
and their associated deep haul were not made at each sampling position; except at
a single station (AD 302-I/79), all Group 3 hauls were deep (Fig. 7); and only in
the case of the Group 2 stations were shallow hauls (110-380 m) made at night
and corresponding deep hauls (1 300-1 950 m) made during the day (Fig. 6).
Secondly, shallow night hauls were aimed at just below or just above the deep
scattering layer (DSL) read from echo-sounder traces; deep day hauls were fished
either as deep as possible, the depth being determined from the depth-time
recorder on completion of the haul, or to an arbitrary selected depth of about
2 000 m, dictated by the length of trawling warp deployed. However, in order to
assess which species differ most between these subgroupings information statistic
tests were performed on the relevant data. The results of the tests are presented
in Tables 9, 10, and 11.
Table 9 lists the species that are characteristic of Groups 1A and 1B. No
species occurs at all stations in one group and in none of the samples of the other
group, although Ceratoscopelus maderensis and Lampanyctus intricarius approxi-
TABLE 9
1979-Sargasso Sea Expedition (2nd leg). MT-1600 hauls: Frequencies of occurrence (F') and
numbers of individuals (N) of species, ranked according to information statistics, which
distinguish Group 1A (Fia, Nia) from Group 1B (Fis, Mis). Asterisks (*) refer to Group 2
indicator species. Other conventions as in Table 4.
Species oO Mia iG Nip DAE
Group 1A
Benthosema glaciale 9 11 439 4 259 6 537,369
Notoscopelus kroeyerii 9 7 062 3 101 4 370,428
Myctophum punctatum 8 1 940 4 23) 1 192,920
Notoscopelus bolini 4 742 1 1 532,841
Ceratoscopelus maderensis 9 612 1 1 437,617
* Lampanyctus pusillus 9 559 2 4 372,998
Symbolophorus. veranyi 8 485 3 9 287,978
* Hygophum benoiti 5 368 0 0 270,645
Diaphus rafinesquii 9 439 3) 2 209,518
* Bolinichthys indicus 4 HOD 1 1 176,811
Diaphus holti 8 376 3 18 172,701
Electrona risso 8 411 4 26 166,403
*Lobianchia dofleini 3 192 0 0 141,206
*Lobianchia gemellarii 8 238 4 32 Doty Sill
*Hygophum hygomii 3 66 0 0 48 540
* Lampanyctus ater 5 58 1 2 29,833
*Lampanyctus photonotus 4 32 0 0 23,534
Lampanyctus intricarius 8 Il 2 4 18,267
Lampanyctus crocodilus 9 222 4 63 10,685
Diaphus metopoclampus 4 14 0 0 10,296
i
*Gonichthys cocco Y 6 0 0 4,413
Group 1B
Lampanyctus macdonaldi 0 0 3 14 33,002
A ZOOGEOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF THE MYCTOPHIDAE 41
mate this condition for Group 1A and Lampanyctus macdonaldi for Group 1B. In
the main, differences in abundances are responsible for the high 2A/; values.
Bearing in mind both the constraints pointed out above and the vertical
distribution data given in the literature, it would appear either that day samples
(c. 2 000 m) were below the depths of maximum abundance of the species and
night samples (155-350 m) were targeted at depths of maximum abundance, or
that the species are more dispersed vertically in the water column during the day
than at night, or both. The first ten species, ranked according to their 2 A/; values,
have their maximum abundance in the upper 100 m at night. During the Mid-
Atlantic Ridge cruise in June 1982, Lampanyctus macdonaldi was not taken at
depths less than 870 m, while during the TIFI—8 cruise in May 1983, it was not
taken at depths shallower than 600 m (ISH unpublished data), both of which
would support the result in Table 9. Certain subtropical species (Group 2
indicators: Bolinichthys indicus, Gonichthys cocco, Hygophum benoiti, Hygo-
phum hygomii, Lampanyctus ater, Lampanyctus photonotus, Lampanyctus
pusillus, Lobianchia dofleini), which transgress the boundary zone into the
Temperate Region, also serve to distinguish Group 1A from Group 1B. As is to
be expected, they are either absent from the deeper (= colder; see Fig. 12)
samples of Group 1B or occur in small numbers, perhaps representing
contamination of the catch when the net is heaved through the overlying warmer
water layers. The higher values for Lobianchia gemellarii in both Group 1A and
Group 1B (Table 9) could be accounted for by the expatriate distribution pattern
of this species in the temperate North Atlantic (Hulley 1981). Gonichthys cocco, a
surface-migrating broadly tropical species, is not well sampled by the MT-—1600
(p. 33), so that its inclusion in Table 9 should be treated with reservation.
Table 10 lists the species that serve to distinguish Group 2A (shallow night
hauls: 110-380 m) from Group 2B (deep day hauls: 1 300-1 950 m). Again, no
species occur in all samples of Group 2A and in none of Group 2B or vice versa.
Higher abundance values at night are responsible for the two groupings. Only two
temperate species (Group 1 indicators: Diaphus holti, Notoscopelus bolini) are
included in Group 2A. As pointed out above, Notoscopelus bolini samples taken
during the transect, south of the boundary between the Temperate and
Subtropical Regions, are small juveniles (22—42 mm), while Diaphus holti was
recorded only from the two stations immediately to the south of the boundary
zone. Two species are characteristic of Group 2B: Taaningichthys bathyphilus, a
bathypelagic widespread species, is known only from depths below 500 m; and
Electrona risso, a Group 1 (Table 4) indicator species. The present analysis
suggests that Electrona risso may occupy shallower depths in the Temperate
Region than it does in the Subtropical Region.
The separation of Group 3A from Group 3B appears to be related to
geographical position rather than to depth. One shallow haul only is included in
Group 3 and the hauls of Group 3B represent the most southerly stations
occupied during the transect. As pointed out above, differences between Group 2
and Group 3 stations rest primarily on the relative abundances of the species in
42 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 10
1979-Sargasso Sea Expedition (2nd leg). MT-—1600 hauls: Frequencies of occurrence (F) and
numbers of individuals (N) of species, ranked according to information statistics, which
distinguish Group 2A (Foa, Noa) from Group 2B (Fon, Np). Asterisks (*) refer to Group 1
indicator species; dagger signs (+) refer to Group 3 indicator species. Other conventions as in
Table 4.
Species ao N2a @ Nop 2A T
Group 2A
Lobianchia gemellarii 12 4212 5 IS 2 362,144
Hygophum hygomii 2 4 116 5 98 2 W76.223
Ceratoscopelus warmingii 12 4 739 5 255 HOU ES)
Hygophum benoiti ial 2 626 5 82 1 294,966
Lobianchia dofleini fl NZL 5 ~ 44 1 155,918
Bolinichthys indicus 12 1 432 5 42 718,678
Diaphus mollis 12 1 299 + 28 701,953
Lampanyctus photonotus 12 781 4 9 467,639
Lampanyctus pusillus 12 831 5 32 383,549
Lepidophanes gaussi 11 442 3 5 265 ,266
Lampadena urophaos atlantica 9 369 Zs 2 237,064
Notoscopelus resplendens 12 584 5 4] 204,540
Notoscopelus caudispinosus 12 318 4 is 143,692
Benthosema suborbitale 9 220 1 2 135,220
Lampadena chavesi 9 200 Z 8 91,085
Hygophum reinhardtii 11 198 4 10 82,195
Lepidophanes guentheri 6 140 2 2 81,399
Diaphus effulgens a 139 1 8) 75,092
Taaningichthys minimus 9 147 3 6 66,462
*Notoscopelus bolini 5 176 3 it 65,856
Lampanyctus festivus 11 168 3 10 64,495
Diaphus splendidus 6 60 0 0 41,797
Diaphus brachycephalus 6 71 1 1 41,368
Hygophum taaningi Z 48 0 0 3383437
Diaphus lucidus 7 61 1 3 25,017
Diaphus problematicus 3 32 0 0 22292
Diaphus perspicillatus 3 31 0 0 ZAC OS
*Diaphus holti 1 43 1 Z: 195097
Myctophum selenops 6 43 1 2 18,486
Notolychnus valdiviae 3 26 0 0 18,112
Lampanyctus ater 8 186 5 41 15,483
Diaphus dumerilii 4 21 0 0 14,629
+ Lampanyctus cuprarius 8 106 5 20 i527
Group 2B
Taaningichthys bathyphilus 0 0 3 10 24,476
* Electrona risso 1 8 2 13 9,481
the two groups. This can be linked to differences in food supply, as indicated by
primary productivity values for the two geographic areas. The inclusion of a single
species, Hygophum taaningi (Broadly Tropical Pattern: Thermophilic Eurytropi-
cal Subpattern), in Group 3B (Table 11) would tend to support this hypothesis,
since the species has a comparatively shallow night distribution between the
surface and 250 m.
A ZOOGEOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF THE MYCTOPHIDAE 43
TABLE 11
1979-Sargasso Sea Expedition (2nd leg). MT—1600 hauls: Frequencies of occurrence (F) and
numbers of individuals (N) of species, ranked according to information statistics, which
distinguish Group 3A (F3a, N3a) from Group 3B (F3s, N3s). Asterisks (*) refer to Group 2
indicator species. Other conventions as in Table 4.
Species Oo Noa a N3p YT
Group 3A
*Lobianchia gemellarii 5 152 3 6 103,632
Lampanyctus cuprarius 5 170 3 14 88,233
*Ceratoscopelus warmingii 5 141 3 14 65,986
*Hygophum hygomii 5 65 2 3 42,394
* Diaphus mollis 5 54 1 2} 37,427
*Lepidophanes gaussi 4 ah 0 0 34,780
*Hygophum reinhardtii 4 16 0 0 15,040
* Notoscopelus resplendens 1 13 0 0 12,220
* Lampanyctus photonotus 4 47 3 11 9,415
*Myctophum selenops Z 9 0 0 8,460
* Bolinichthys indicus - 30 3 6 7,530
* Lampanyctus lineatus - 13 1 1 6,977
* Notoscopelus caudispinosus 5 16 2 2 6,405
*Lobianchia dofleini 2 6 0 0 5,640
Group 3B
*Hygophum taaningi 1 4 3 10 6,625
Inverse (‘r’-type) analysis
The grouping of the species with inverse (or ‘r’-type) analysis was only
partially successful in revealing distribution pattern types. Initially all 63 species
from the MT-—1600 transect were included, but this led to a somewhat complex
dendrogram (Fig. 15), with many species showing little similarity to others. These
are either rare species, or species that are poorly represented in the R.V. Anton
Dohrn catches. These species were then excluded from the analysis by the
criterion of occurring at fewer than 10 stations and in densities of less than
6 specimens per hour per station of occurrence, as shown in Figure 16. The
reduced data matrix was then reworked through the programme. The resulting
dendrogram (Fig. 17) is somewhat clearer, indicating the existence of two major
species groups: those found in the Temperate Region; and those found in the
Subtropical Region and South Sargasso Sea Province. A similar picture of these
two groupings was obtained from the IKMT data. Unfortunately, neither the
dendrograms nor the ordinations allow for the recognition of the various
distribution-pattern types that have been formulated in the literature. We suggest
that this may be due to the fact that only the southern ranges of the temperate
species and the northern ranges of the tropical and subtropical species were
covered by the transects.
44 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
% SIMILARITY
60,00 40,00
. inferrupta
. macdonaldi
. arcticum
. speculigera
. kroeyerii
. punctatum
. glaciale
infricarius
holti
. risso
maderensis
veranyi
crocodilus
bolini
ater
. pusillus
. tafinesquii
minimus
. Cuprarius
. reinhardtii
resplendens
. Caudispinosus
. gaussi
urophaos afl.
dofleini
. benoiti
gemellarii
hygomii
warmingii
. photonotus
. indicus
. mollis
chavesi
festivus
. lucidus
. suborbitale
. selenops
. atlanticus
. lineatus
. valdiviae
. perspicillatus
. brachycephalus
fara
guentheri
. splendidus
. effulgens
. problematicus
. dumerilii
. taaningi
. photothorax
cocco
. metopoclampus
. bathyphilus
. supralateralis
. bertelseni
. nitidulum
. luminosa
nobilis
. termophilus
. fufinus
. Nigroocellatus
. alatus
. anomala
ROOT—ROOT TRANSFORMED)
(UNREDUCED
CLUSTERED
Fig. 15. Dendrogram of species affinities for 63 species from MT-—1600 hauls.
MT-1600 SPECIES
L
L
Pp
L
N
M
B
L.
D.
E
&
S.
&
N.
L.
L
D
Vr.
L
H
N.
N
L
L.
E.
H
L.
H.
(C.
L
B
D
L.
&
D
B
M
D
L
N
D
D
L.
L.
D
D
D
D
H
B
G.
D
T
B
D
M
L
IL,
D
S
C
L
L
BREMERHAVEN
45
A ZOOGEOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF THE MYCTOPHIDAE
Ip}DUOpoDW
D}dnssajul °
WNI1}9UD *
Dsabijnoeds ©
S!]}D49}0)D4dns ©
DIDJ°
lUaS}a}Jaq °
09900 °
SN}D|D°
D)DWOUD :
St}!gou"
sn)iydowa}
SN}D})a900 56 Iu *
W)IJeWnp ©
XDJOY}O}OUd °
sniydhyj0q °
snuljni:
Wh) NpIy!U"
DsSOUIWN) °
sndwp)d0doj}aw ©
GQ =) S2 wi te 3) fe) Oye) aa Soy fay SS oa So Se
INIS3Yd SNOILVLIS JO YSEWNN / YNOH Yad SNAWIDSdS JO YFAWNN
00S
00L
62 OO ZE
0S
Ol
O42 O67
87 Me
EO LEO
SEO O92
$70
zEO
£sO
ssO Ol
6€O
£70 Or, O 7€
ZO OY
0¢O
02 M21
70
S
'
€9/E7/07/8€@ (7/0L@
@7~¢
c9@
@sc
8L@ = @97/9E/7z
0s @
@19
77@ @09
£7@
-‘sisAqeur IoYIINy WOIJ popnyoxe satseds asoy]—sa]oI1d PI[OS “spNeY YOOT—LIN Wor sptydojoAw Jo sartsuep pue seouarind90 UONRIs oY} Jo YdeIH “OT ‘SI
LNIS3ud
SNOILVIS
JO YIGWNN
46 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
H
1
1
1
N
N
a
7
a |
N
1
S
snye)jiaidsuad gq
BeIAIDJEA ‘N
iBuluee4s “y
Snjifewe)qoud q
suab)nysa g
snpipuajds q
ayyuanb 7
snjeaul) 7
snaijueyye Gg
sdouajas py
ayeyiquoqgns ‘g
snpion) -g
SNAI}S3} “7
\SaAeys “7
s!j}ow qQ
SNIIpul -g
snjouojsoyd - 7
wBujwuem ->
we}jawab “7
\4]0Uaq
1ula)JOp
issneb
Wypyeyulas “}q
sniveudnd “7
snwiuiw ‘y
SN]!poj0I3
1Auedaa
sisuasapew *)
ossis 3
4,04 Q
SMIJEIJ4UI “7
ajeize)6 g
wnyeyound w
11u3A305¥ 'N
snjeydarAyreug ‘q
00001
00 001
00'08
0008
%
00'09
0009
ALIYVIIWIS
000%
000%
0002
0002
oO i>)
oO f=)
So =)
BREMERHAVEN - MT- 1600 SPECIES CLUSTERED (REDUCED, ROOT-ROOT TRANSFORMED
Fig. 17. Dendrogram of species affinities for reduced number of species from MT-—1600 hauls.
In discussing the second and third aims of this paper (see p. 20), the dis-
tributions of Hygophum benoiti (characteristic of the subtropical grouping) and
Electrona risso, Benthosema glaciale, and Lampanyctus crocodilus (all character-
istic of the Temperate Region) are examined.
Backus et al. (1977) are of the opinion that Electrona risso (Fig. 18) is an
Eastern Pattern species, which would seem to support its inclusion with the other
temperate species in the context of the 1979-transects. Hulley (1981), on the
other hand, suggests a relationship with the 10 °C and 15 °C isotherms at 200 m
and the 50 gCm~’y~! isoline. Except for the single larval specimen taken in a
neuston tow at about 28°N 51°W, for which there is some doubt about the
identification (H.-C. John, pers. comm.), the latter criteria are satisfied by the
A ZOOGEOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF THE MYCTOPHIDAE
ELECTRONA RISSO
ISOTHERMS AT 200m
105 @ 1979-CRUISE MT-1600
h MB 1979-CRUISE NEUSTO
K © OTHER DATA
201
30
40
Fig. 18. Distribution of Electrona risso.
47
48 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
1979-transect data. Seen against a background of an extensive distribution,
particularly in the South Atlantic (Fig. 18), Electrona risso should be excluded
from the Eastern Pattern and be considered a widespread species within the
apparent ecological constraints.
Hygophum benoiti has been described as a temperate-semisubtropical
species by Backus et al. (1977), and as a temperate-subtropical species, but within
the Northern Temperate Pattern, by Hulley (1981). The present transect data and
indicator analyses suggest that, while Hygophum benoiti is indeed distributed in
both temperate and subtropical regions (Fig. 19) and attains sexual maturity
throughout its distributional range, it shows a closer affinity to the Subtropical
April
1919 way
1982 June
© absent
Fig. 19. Distribution of Hygophum benoiti.
Region than to the Temperate Region (Table 5). This suggestion was recently
confirmed during the 1982—Mid-Atlantic Ridge Expedition, north of the Azores,
where the species was taken in any quantity only south of about 44°S
(unpublished data). This means that the distribution pattern of H. benoiti may be
different from those of other species presently included in the Temprate-
subtropical Pattern, namely Ceratoscopelus maderensis, Diaphus rafinesqui,
Notoscopelus bolini, and Symbolophorus veranyi. This warrants a closer
examination both of the above-mentioned temperate-subtropical species, and the
species currently held under the North Subtropical Subpattern, e.g. Lampadena
urophaos atlantica.
A ZOOGEOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF THE MYCTOPHIDAE 49
The distribution of Benthosema glaciale (Fig. 20), a shallow-living species
with a night distribution between 12 m and 200 m, reveals that this Temperate
Region indicator species transgresses the boundary limit, with a single specimen
being taken in the northern Subtropical Region. Ordination of the MT—1600 data
Fig. 20. Distribution of Benthosema glaciale.
for this species (Fig. 21) indicates that it was taken at all temperate stations, and
further, that in this region there was no apparent size stratification with depth
(although opening and closing nets were not employed). The specimen from the
Subtropical Region is very small by comparison (Fig. 21) and may only indicate
transportation of juveniles across the boundary by ocean currents. These
juveniles may have no potential for achieving sexual maturity.
By contrast, Lampanyctus crocodilus, a somewhat deeper-living Temperate
Region species, is also found to the south of the boundary between the
Temperate Region and the Subtropical Region. In IKMT samples, it was taken to
as far south as about 32°N, but only as small specimens (maximum SL 23 mm).
The ordination (Fig. 22) reveals a marked size stratification with depth in the
Temperate Region, and further, that large specimens do occur in deeper waters
south of the Temperate Region boundary, to about 34°N. Since these specimens
are of a potentially reproductive size (maximum SL 178 mm), future study will
include the examination of changes in sexual maturity across this boundary zone.
50 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Shallow Stations
BREMERHAVEN -MT 1600 STATIONS
PLOT: MDS (ROOT-ROOT TRANSFORMED)
BENTHOSEMA GLACIALE TEMPERATE
47, > Deep Stations
MAX. SL
A <30mm
A 30-40mm
\ 41-50 mm
Fig. 21. MDS plot for Benthosema glaciale with maximum size indicated for each positive
sample.
BREMERHAVEN -MT 1600 STATIONS Shallow Stations
PLOT: MDS (ROGT-ROOT TRANSFORMED)
LAMPANYCTUS CROCODILUS —~
ASI es © ya
A<50mm
51-80mm
Shallow Stations Ny 81 130mm
SOUTH SARGASSO eas
> 130mm
Fig. 22. MDS plot for Lampanyctus crocodilus with maximum size indicated for each positive
sample.
A ZOOGEOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF THE MYCTOPHIDAE 51
A summary of the myctophid catch data from the MT-1600 transect is
compared in Table 12 with the distributional patterns and subpatterns given by
Hulley (1981, table 3). For a given pattern or subpattern, abundances have been
calculated in mean number of specimens per hour for stations within each of the
Groups 1, 2 and 3, according to the formula:
» Nis
i(j) \s(2)
Pattern; : Abundance =
No. stations in f
where:
Nis is the number of specimens of species ‘7’ caught per hour at station ‘s’;
j is the assembly of species within a particular distribution pattern;
tis the stratum of stations in each of Groups 1, 2 and 3.
However, some reservation is expressed with regard to the absolute values
obtained with this gear, because of errors introduced while picking the net on
deck, uncertainty of the exact time-span in which the net is actively fishing, and/or
variations in the size of the mouth opening of the net.
No bathypelagic species of myctophid is endemic to the Atlantic. In the Warm
Water Group of 42 species, 6 (14,3%) are endemic to the Atlantic, while 11
(73,3%) of the Cold Water Group of 15 species are endemic. Further, all
myctophid species held under the North Temperate Pattern (Boreoarctic, Boreal,
Mediterranean and Temperate-subtropical Subpatterns) in the Atlantic are
endemic.
The Warm Water Group, representing 66,7 per cent of the total number of
species, averaged 98 specimens per hour per station in Group 1 stations, 1 284
specimens per hour per station in Group 2 stations and 112 specimens per hour
per station in Group 3 stations. Cold Water Group species, representing 23,8 per
cent of the total number of species, averaged 1 862 specimens per hour per station
in Group 1 stations, 202 specimens per hour per station in Group 2 stations and
less than one specimen per hour per station in Group 3 stations. Widespread
species, representing 6,3 per cent of the total number of species, averaged
48 specimens per hour per station, 136 specimens per hour per station, and one
specimen per hour per station in Group 1, Group 2, and Group 3 stations
respectively. Bathypelagic species, representing 1,6 per cent of the total number
of species, averaged less than one specimen per hour per station in Group 2 and
Group 3 stations and were absent in Group 1 stations.
The above confirms the general rule that species diversity decreases with
increasing latitude and that larger populations occur in cold-water species than in
warm-water species. Summed mean abundance values for stations in each of
Groups 1, 2 and 3 give a measure of the ‘standing stock’ of the three areas: Group
1 (Azores—Britain Province) is 18 times more productive than Group 3 (South
Sargasso Sea Province), while Group 2 (North Sargasso Sea Province—North
North African Sea Province) is 14 times more productive than Group 3. In terms
of oceanic myctophids, therefore, the North Atlantic Temperate Region is
Sy ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 12
1979-Sargasso Sea Expedition (2nd leg). MT-—1600 hauls: Comparison of myctophid specimen
abundances with distributional patterns and subpatterns as given by Hulley (1981).
Group I: mean no. specimens/hour
Group 2: mean no. specimens/hour
Group 3: mean no. specimens/hour
Percentage total no. of species
No. of species
MESOPELAGIC
WIDESPREAD GROUP
Widespread Patten. 2 oases re chee bane ee 4 6,3 48.38 136312 0,88
WARM-WATER GROUP
ropical Pattern’ 22.05, cae. & eae See eal 0:31 12,65 Pet
Eunytropical Batten: <a. n shearers dose 22 34,9 23.77 ~- Fies5 64,88
Subtropical'Patterm.. acco: eae eae ee 13) 20k6 74,38 495,00 44,13
COLD-WATER GROUP
DitempMerate Wabtenm as 25 cara oe ee ae ee 4 6,3 6,46 0,00 0,00
Boreoarctic Subpatterm - 2-2 hese ssh eee: 3 4-8 “1451562 0,24 0,00
Boreal Subpatiemes 2 og20+ seacecn es aoe Dy Bu 167,85 0,82 0,00
Mediterranean Subpatteml) 2) > -eere-) oon: 1 1,6 30,31 27k 0,00
Temperate-subtropical Subpattern............ 5 7,9 205,85 198,47 0,38
BATHYPELAGIC
WIDESPREAD GROUP
Widespread Patten 7 fone ete age © oe 1 16 0,00 0,59 0,63
WARM-WATER GROUP
Euryiropical Patter: . sa. 6.4. ones i! 1,6 0,00 0,00 0,13
STANDING STOCK
Summed mean abundance. 5... 2544550 2 008,93 1 623,13 113,78
Percentages. > Saree eee ee ee eee 53,63 43,33 3,04
A ZOOGEOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF THE MYCTOPHIDAE 53
1,24 times more productive than the North Atlantic Subtropical Region. Recent
unpublished data from the TIFI—8 Cruise, obtained while sampling a few metres
above the slope regions west of Great Britain, indicate that this value would be
considerably higher if the pseudoceanic population of Notoscopelus kroeyerii
were to be included.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
We would like to express our sincere thanks to Professor John Field and Mss
Elaine Rumback and Patti Wickens of the Zoology Department, University of
Cape Town, for setting up the data for the computer programme and for ensuing
discussion and to Dr Doug Butterworth, Department of Applied Mathematics,
University of Cape Town, for assistance with the estimation of abundances. We
would also like to thank both the Captain and crew of the R.V. Anton Dohrn for
collection of the material used in our analyses, and our colleagues on board, for
rewarding discussions of the implications of distribution. A portion of this paper
was originally presented at the Fourth Congress of European Ichthyologists. We
thank the Fisheries Development Corporation (South Africa), the C.S.I.R.
(Research Grants Division), and the Trustees of the South African Museum for
funding travel expenses for the senior author to participate in the cruise and
attend the Congress.
REFERENCES
Backus, R. H., Crappock, J. E., HArpricH, R. L. & Rosison, B. H. 1977. Atlantic
mesopelagic zoogeography. Mem. Sears Fdn mar. Res. 1 (7): 266-287.
Backus, R. H., Crappock, J. E., HAEpRICH, R. L. & SHorss, D. L. 1969. Mesopelagic fishes
and thermal fronts in the western Sargasso Sea. Mar. Biol. 3: 87-106.
FIELD, J. G., CLarKe, K. R. & Warwick, R. M. 1982. A practical strategy for analysing
multispecies distribution patterns. Mar. Ecol. Prog. Ser. 8: 37-52.
HELA, I. & LaEvastu, T. 1962. Fisheries hydrography. How oceanography and meteorology can
and do serve fisheries. London: Fishing News (Books) Ltd.
Hu tey, P. A. 1981. Results of the research cruises of FRV “Walther Herwig’ to South America.
LVIII. Family Myctophidae (Osteichthyes, Myctophiformes). Arch. FischWiss. 31 (1): 1-
300.
Krerrt, G. 1974. Investigations on midwater fish in the Atlantic Ocean. Ber. dt. wiss. Kommn
Meeresforsch. 23: 226-254.
KrerrT, G. 1978. Distribution patterns of oceanic fishes in the Atlantic Ocean. Rev. Trav. Inst.
Péches marit. 40: 439-460.
NaAFPAKTITIS, B. G., BAckus, R. H., Crappock, J. E., HAEpRicH, R. L., Ropison, B. H. &
KARNELLA, C. 1977. Family Myctophidae. Mem. Sears Fdn mar. Res. 1 (7): 13-265.
ParRIN, N. V., ANDRIASHEV, A. P., BoropuULINA, O. D. & TcHuvasov, V. M. 1974. Midwater
fishes of the Southwestern Atlantic Ocean. Trudy Inst. Okeanol. 98: 76-140 (in Russian).
WEGNER, G. 1979. R/V Anton Dohrn XBT sections in the North Atlantic Ocean between
January and May 1979. Polymode News 70: 3-4.
WEGNER, G. 1982. Main hydrographic features of the Sargasso Sea in Spring 1979. Helgol.
Meeresunters. 35: 385-400.
Wust, G. & Derant, A. 1936. Atlas zur Schichtung und Zirkulation des Atlantischen Ozeans.
Schnitte und Karten von Temperatur, Salzgehalt und Dichte. Wiss. Ergebn. dt. atlant.
Exped. ‘Meteor’ 6 (Atlas).
bh
oy
a
ad
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the Jnternational code of zoological nomenclature
(particularly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be
followed by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb.
nov., syn. nov., etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening
punctuation and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s
name and year. The author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a
species or subspecies is transferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of
a scientific name must be separated from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published
scientific names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological
order, with all references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) He alee Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, : 50.
Laeda bicuspidata eg 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby
the year is placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is
not acceptable.
In describing new’species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other speci-
mens mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material
not regarded as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number,
depository, description of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes
must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach
Port Elizabeth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
b]
e.g. ‘... the Figure depicting C. namacolus...’; *...in C. namacolus (Fig. 10)...’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded
by initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a
book or article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation
to initial capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title: it should be included in the
abstract, counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of
Biological Abstracts.
P. ALEXANDER HULLEY & GERHARD KREFFT
A ZOOGEOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF THE FISHES
OF THE FAMILY MYCTOPHIDAE
(OSTEICHTHYES, MYCTOPHIFORMES)
FROM THE 1979-SARGASSO SEA EXPEDITION
OF R.V. ANTON DOHRN
nF
6 PART 3 JUNE 1985 ISSN 0303-2515
ANNALS
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM >
‘CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous.
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced with
3 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of captions for
illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All pages should be num-
bered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small capitals;
second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered italics. Further
subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals) of headings and
abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking up
should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18cm (19 cm including
caption); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated (and preferably uniform); orig-
inals larger than 35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and
final size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the caption; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be taken
into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates are not
printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a single series. Items
of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of figures is not set in type and
should be in lower-case letters. If Letraset is used authors are requested to use Helvetica-style letter-
ing, if possible.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of the
paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes. . .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes...”
“As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
pagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically within
each name, with suffixes a, b, etc., to the year for more than one paper by the same author in
that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 1969b) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (according to the World list of scientific periodicals. 4th ed.
London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part number in parentheses, pagination (first and
last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BuLLouGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FIscHER, P. H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de la vitalité des mollusques. Journal de conchyliologie 88 (3): 100-140.
FiscHER, P. H., Duvat, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archives de zoologie
expérimentale et générale 74 (33): 627-634.
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon. Annals and
Magazine of Natural History (13) 2 (17): 309-320.
Koun, A. J. 1960b. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean. Bulletin of
the Bingham Oceanographic Collection, Yale University 17 (4): 1-S1.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca. B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische und anthro-
pologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Stid-Afrika ausgeftihrt in den Jahren
1903-1905 4 (15). Denkschriften der medizinisch-naturwissenschaftlichen Gesellschaft zu Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 96 Band
June 1985 Junie
Part 3 Deel
LATE HOLOCENE USE OF PENGUIN SKINS:
EVIDENCE FROM A COASTAL SHELL MIDDEN
AT STEENBRAS BAY, LUDERITZ PENINSULA,
SOUTH WEST AFRICA-NAMIBIA
By
GRAHAM AVERY
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
by Glee, SM), sD, 4-5 sos), SUES, 5, 7D).
Gil, eos) 1G), & COD, 7), OG),
11(1-2, 5, 7, t-—p.i.), 14(1-2), 15(4-5), 24(2), 27, 31(1-3), 32(5), 33, 36(2), 45(1)
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 070 2
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The” RusticamPress, "tye. sletde: Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
LATE HOLOCENE USE.OF PENGUIN SKINS:
EVIDENCE FROM A COASTAL SHELL MIDDEN AT
STEENBRAS BAY, LUDERITZ PENINSULA,
SOUTH WEST AFRICA-NAMIBIA
By
GRAHAM AVERY
South African Museum, Cape Town
(With 6 figures)
[MS accepted 20 August 1984]
ABSTRACT
Cut-marks on jackass penguin Spheniscus demersus humeri and tibiotarsi from a shell
midden dated to 2000 Bp are examined. Evidence from experimentation and the ethnographic
record shows that the marks were produced while skinning the penguins. High frequencies of
small convex scrapers and backed bladelets and segments are correlated with skinning and the
preparation of penguin pelts. This is amongst the earliest evidence for the manufacture of skin
garments in southern Africa.
CONTENTS
PAGE
EeRtOCMCHON er ee fo LMR e. ayer evi aeseni eis Gav tee oats ee 55
PSTTSTEIE BOSSI IC 9! -tareiee ee dO Cae a pene i yf
CUTIE LOSES of eee ee ON er y eo eaae ay
SMMMUAECXPCHINEMt (6.000% ont fe Powe ke ok eld ee sews wha ea es 60
Ethnographic evidence for the use of penguin skins............. 60
PHISCUSSION, Gio.2 2 set es 2 bs Aye OT Le tie eg a ies aa: 64
SOREIISION CR OP een So aE Core eds OAM RA we ace ee 8 65
PICKMOMICCOCMEN(S! min atacniy ane she Mead setoe Sade esese owls wanes 65
PRERCRCCCS es By ircas oe Reels nee ents ai ocak 65
INTRODUCTION
This paper reports on unusual bones from samples excavated in 1972 and
1982 by W. E. Wendt from a shallow shell midden (maximum 0,3 m in depth,
50 m? in area, 12 m’ in volume) at Steenbras Bay, Liideritz Peninsula (26°40’S
15°07’E) (Fig. 1).* The 1972 excavation at the site of a trench 3,5 m? in area was
reported on briefly by Wendt (1974). Material from the recent bulk sample is
being processed. Radiocarbon dates are available: Pta 1049 (S3) 2070+ 50 BP
(charcoal) 10-20 cm; Pta 1045 (S2) 2540 + 50 Bp (limpet shell, Patella sp.) 20 cm;
Pta 1042 (S1) 2440 + 50 Bp (limpet shell, Patella sp.) 3-5 cm (= surface). Vogel &
Visser (1981) in reporting these dates state that the determinations run on the
shells appear to be c. 420 years too old and that dating of the occurrence is,
therefore, consistently at about 2000 Bp.
* Wendt’s collection will be deposited in the State Museum, Windhoek.
a5
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 96 (3), 1985: 55-65, 6 figs.
56 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
I5°OS'E
26°35'S
Penguin
Island
NJ
Island
@
Steenbras Bay
midden
Fig. 1. Locality of Steenbras Bay midden and nearby islands.
LATE HOLOCENE USE OF PENGUIN SKINS yy)
PENGUIN BONES
Among the bones there is a series of jackass penguin (Spheniscus demersus)
humeri and tibiotarsi bearing a series of obvious cut-marks (Fig. 2). Although
other body parts were present in small numbers, no other evidence of cutting was
found.
Humeri
The collection consists of two virtually complete left humeri (Fig. 2A, B), a
proximal end of a left humerus (Fig. 2C), a shaft and distal fragment of a left
humerus (Fig. 2D), and a shaft of a right humerus (Fig. 2E), representing a
minimum of three individuals. All the bones are incompletely ossified and
therefore of immature birds. Figure 2 shows that the cut-marks occur consistently
on the proximal halves of the humeri.
Cut-marks are located in the capital groove and extend on to the head and
bicipital surface. Others are on the median crest of the pneumatic fossa, deltoid
crest, and the region of the nutrient foramen and attachment of the latissimus
dorsi posterioris. The marks clearly resulted from cutting in the region where the
flipper was attached to the body. The nature of the cut-marks and their extension
towards the shaft suggest both that some form of sawing action was exercised and
that the intention was to cut around the skin in order to remove it at the point
where the paddle-like flipper joins the body. The logical goal, therefore, seems to
have been to skin the bird. It would otherwise have been simple to rip off the
skin, locate the joint and sever the attachments with little or no damage to the
bone.
Tibiotarsi
A complete right tibiotarsus and a right distal end of a tibiotarsus of
immature birds showed cut-marks on the distal shaft (Fig. 2F—G). Cutting was
not as distinct as on the humeri. The position of the cut-marks, however,
corresponds to the point at which feathered skin on the leg becomes the bare skin
of the foot. This too is consistent with the suggestion that the marks resulted from
skinning the birds.
STONE ARTEFACTS
It is postulated that the relatively high frequencies of small convex scrapers
and backed bladelets (Fig. 3) that occur in the Steenbras Bay stone assemblage
may be correlated with skinning activities and the preparation of pelts, perhaps
not only of penguins but also of other animals such as the Cape fur seal
Arctocephalus pusillus. Recent examinations of the function of small convex
scrapers (Deacon & Deacon 1980; Binneman 1984) support the suggestion that
they were used hafted as skin scrapers. Only a limited number of backed bladelets
and segments have been examined as yet but Binneman (1984) has suggested that
58 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 2. Jackass penguin bones from Steenbras Bay midden (collected by W. E. Wendt).
A-E. Humeri. F-G. Tibiotarsi. Arrows indicate location of cut-marks. Note sinuous lines
caused by rootlets.
LATE HOLOCENE USE OF PENGUIN SKINS 59
Fig. 3. Examples of some stone artefact types from the Steenbras Bay midden (collected by
W.E. Wendt). A-—D. Small convex scrapers (raw material: cryptocrystalline silica); broken line
near worked edge of B indicates edge of mastic trace. E-H. Backed blades (raw material:
quartz).
60 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
they were hafted in series for cutting in much the same manner as a penknife. It
seems reasonable, therefore, to assume that the occurrence in relatively high
frequencies of convex scrapers and backed bladelets together with evidence
pointing to skinning is not fortuitous.
SKINNING EXPERIMENT
Experimental skinning of adult and immature penguins killed in an
underwater explosion and an oil spill confirmed that the archaeological cut-marks
could have been produced in the manner suggested above (Fig. 4). It proved
difficult to remove the skin by cutting at the body-—flipper link using decisive cuts.
This was because displaced feathers formed a mat under the blade preventing
penetration. Furthermore, the skin itself was loose over the bone necessitating a
number of cuts before it was completely detached. It was noted that careful
skinning at this point and at the tibiotarsus (thereby leaving the smallest possible
holes in the pelt requiring closing), and under the tail at the vent made the most
economical use of the whole skin. The pelt produced from the juvenile specimen
(Fig. 5) was in the form of a dark oval centre bordered by white. In the case of a
bird in adult plumage the dark centre is bordered by white with a black stripe
(Brown et al. 1982).
After the bird was skinned the skeleton was prepared. Cut-marks produced
around the proximal end of the humerus during skinning were found in the same
position as the marks on the Steenbras Bay specimens (Figs 2, 4). They did,
however, differ in their morphology. The most likely explanation for this is that a
steel-bladed knife was used in the experiment whereas a stone-bladed tool was
probably used on the specimens from Steenbras Bay. Similar cut-marks were
produced on the distal region of the tibiotarsus where the skin was removed from
the hind limbs of the penguin (Figs 2, 4).
ETHNOGRAPHIC EVIDENCE FOR THE USE OF PENGUIN SKINS
At least two lines of ethnographic evidence suggest that penguin skins were
used in the making of garments. Owen (1833: 229) described indigenous people at
Walvis Bay as being *. . . clothed in skins of either beasts or penguins, which
being in an undressed state, constituted a centre of attraction for flies.... A
vignette drawn by Col. R. J. Gordon (Fig. 6) depicts a Nama group seen on the
coast north of the Orange River in 1779. While some individuals are depicted
wearing plain skin karosses, two are covered by completely different garments.
These are apparently made of a number of pelts, each of which appears as a
roughly oval dark form surrounded by a lighter colour. No mammal would
produce pelts of this size and description and it is thought that they represent
penguin pelts. This is supported both by the size, shape and number of the pelts,
and details of texture depicted on both the external and internal surfaces (feather
texture, and stippled internal texture created by feather roots). The detail
LATE HOLOCENE USE OF PENGUIN SKINS 61
u—em
Fig. 4. Jackass penguin bones from experimental specimens. A. Humerus (SAM-ZO57364).
B. Humerus (juvenile) (SAM—ZOS57365). C. Tibiotarsus (juvenile) (SAM-—ZO57365).
Arrows indicate location of cut-marks; | = left, r = right.
62
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
} o lo, N
pylori a ie
Hi ey | N
ate } \
4 \
mh Vie
ve % | | | ws ss
ff wa
za f | \ x
/ j In | | iva | \ ‘
Z \ X
7 | be | a
Z jo || 1 'O \
g hl | cN X
aaa a
} ceo a. \
j (de i \
pe!
; Mgt yf \ ‘
; eer | N
" " | | || | ‘
My ( | | | | y)
ug, A | fe wl
yy YI I a! yee
“ \y So
20cm Ny fl
O
Ee eee ee
Fig? 5. A. Juvenile jackass penguin showing distribution of black and white
feathering. B. Pelt from juvenile specimen, SAM—ZO57365. Note distribution of
black and white areas and points (indicated by circles) at which humeri and
tibiotarsi were removed. The holes are only visible from the ventral surface of the
skin.
depicted, both as regards the Karosses and as regards other aspects of activity,
clothing, equipment, etc., suggests that Gordon was a keen observer of detail and
that the depictions are accurate, in spite of a slight discrepancy where the black is
not shown to extend down to the tail.
The karosses are obviously supple and the skins must have received some
form of preparation prior to being trimmed and sewn together. This is in apparent
contradiction to Owen’s (1833) comment, but nevertheless essential to prevent
rapid disintegration of the skin and loss of feathers through rotting (R. Rau,
South African Museum, pers. comm.). It is more likely, therefore, that the skins
were prepared. Flies would be attracted to the wearers’ bodies, which would have
been well-greased (Rudner 1982: 116 ff.), as well as to raw skins.
From the drawing it is estimated that some fifty pelts would be required to
make up a full kaross. It is of interest to note that Nama Hottentot informants
report that forty similar-sized hyrax (Procavia capensis) pelts are used to make a
blanket (often described as a kaross) approximately 1,20 m X 1,60 m in area. One
informant also described how hyrax skins were softened by hand and their raw
63
LATE HOLOCENE USE OF PENGUIN SKINS
‘gjdood s9y}0 oy) Aq UIOM s}UdUIeS UTS 94) Wo A[poyreU
Joyyip Ady, “oy oy) WoI, YIINOJ pue py) soinsy oy) Aq UIOM SossOIey IY) JO S9dvJINS 19]NO pu IOUT JO 91N}Xx9} dy) pue s}jod oy} Jo adeys pue Inojoo oy]
SION *(saatyory ade oy) Jo Asajinos ydessoj0yd ‘¢6 “ON UOIITJOD UOPIONH) 6LL] Ul JDANY BdUeIO SY} JO YINOW dy} JedU JseOd dy} UO ajdood eWRNY “9 “SIF
64 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
sides were cleaned by means of little stones (L. Webley, University of
Stellenbosch, pers. comm.).
Other illustrations by Gordon (Gordon Collection Nos. 84, 91, Cape
Archives) appear to depict similar karosses, the first of these illustrations
including what appear to be aprons made of a single penguin skin. These are not
as convincing as those illustrated in Figure 6, and were from inland observations.
However, the latter point, while relevant, need not present a problem, as it is well
known that Khoisan people moved over great distances.
DISCUSSION
The fact that relatively few penguin bones occur can be explained by the size
of the excavated sample. It is relevant that although relatively few bones ever
show evidence of cutting, all penguin humerus fragments recovered and most of
the tibiotarsus fragments show cut-marks. Furthermore, according to Thackeray’s
(1979) report on the earlier sample, penguins are the most common bird in the
sample, in a proportion of 3 to 1.
The occurrence of penguin remains in midden accumulations has hitherto
been assumed to indicate that these birds were eaten by the occupants of a site
(Avery 1977; Thackeray 1979). However, penguin skins would make excellent
pelts provided that they were preserved and softened; the skin is relatively thick
and durable and the short feathers would provide good insulation. In order to
preserve and soften them, the minimum of preparation required would involve
scraping away the subcutaneous fat and other tissue adhering to the skins and
working them to make them supple enough to be worn. Suitable scraping
artefacts such as the small convex scrapers that occur in large numbers on the site
would be essential to achieve this. In addition, experience from skinning a
number of avian species and Cape fur seals taken from beaches indicates that
even modern cutting instruments are rapidly blunted both by the presence of sand
and by the resistance offered by feathers and thick fur. It may be predicted,
therefore, that prehistoric skinning and scraping would have required regular
sharpening and discarding of stone artefacts. Examination of the artefacts for
wear traces would be a worthwhile test of this postulation.
Although there are instances of small numbers of penguins breeding on the
mainland in localities where they are protected from predators (Finkeldey 1984),
penguins are not normally accessible on the coast, as from choice they breed, and
usually come ashore, on offshore islands. The Lideritz Peninsula (Fig. 1),
however, is close to a number of islands on which penguins breed or may have
bred in the past (Rand 1963; Shaughnessy 1984). There are also other penguin
colonies to the north and south of the area shown. Penguins do sometimes rest on
the shore, moreover, and proximity to large breeding colonies would result in
larger numbers doing this and thus being accessible. Mienertzhagen (1950)
comments that large numbers of non-breeding individuals occurred on the shore
and in the water opposite Halifax Island. The lack of an adult stripe on the
LATE HOLOCENE USE OF PENGUIN SKINS 65
karosses depicted by Gordon suggests that the people were catching inexperi-
enced immature birds, which often occur alive on beaches (pers. obs.) and are,
therefore, more easily taken. Schultze (1907: 185) mentions Nama people
catching immature penguins on beaches.
CONCLUSION
Although evidence is limited it is considered that skinning presents the best
alternative to explain the location and nature of the cut-marks on the specimens.
It is further postulated that the occurrence of relatively high frequencies of small
convex scrapers and backed bladelets, and some segments, is correlated with the
skinning and preparation of penguin pelts.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I am greatly indebted to W. E. Wendt for permission to examine the faunal
samples from the Steenbras Bay midden, detailed information regarding the
excavations, permission to illustrate stone artefacts, and his willingness to extract
earlier material from storage. This paper has benefited from critical comment by
D. M. Avery, J. E. Parkington, W. E. Wendt and M. L. Wilson. Figures 1, 2 and
4 were produced by L. Lawrence. The experimental bones were cleaned by
V. Bartnick. Typing was done by M. Scheiner and S. Saven.
REFERENCES
Avery, G. 1977. Report on the marine bird remains from the Paternoster midden. S. Afr.
archaeol. Bull. 32: 74-76.
BINNEMAN, J. 1984. Mapping and interpreting wear traces on stone implements: a case study
from Boomplaas Cave. In: Hatt, M. J., Avery, G., Avery, D. M., WiLson, M. L. &
Humpnureys, A. J. B., eds. Frontiers: southern African archaeology today: 143-151. Oxford:
British Archaeological Reports (International Series no. 207).
Brown, L. H., URBAN, E. K. & NEwman, K. 1982. The birds of Africa 1. London: Academic
Press.
Deacon, H. J. & Deacon, J. 1980. The hafting, function and distribution of small convex
scrapers with an example from Boomplaas Cave. S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 35: 31-37.
FINKELDEY, H. 1984. Brillen-pinguin Brutkolonie auf dem Festland bei Sylvia-Hill entdeckt.
Mitt. orn. ArbGruppe S. W. Afr. scient. Soc. 19 (12): 11.
MIENERTZHAGEN, R. 1950. The Namib of South West Africa. [bis 92: 567-573.
Owen, W. F. W. 1833. Narrative of voyages to explore the shores of Africa, Arabia and
Madagascar. London: Richard Bentley.
RAND, R. W. 1963. The biology of guano-producing sea-birds. 5. Composition of colonies on the
South West African islands. Investl Rep. Div. Sea Fish. S. Afr. 46: 1-26.
Rupner, I. 1982. Khoisan pigments and paints and their relationship to rock paintings. Ann. S.
Afr. Mus. 87: 1-281.
SCHULTZE, L. 1907. Aus Namaland und Kalahari. Jena: Gustav Fischer.
SHAUGHNESSY, P. D. 1984. Historical population levels of seals and seabirds on islands off
southern Africa, with special reference to Seal Island, False Bay. Investl Rep. Sea Fish. Res.
Inst. S. Afr. 127: 1-61.
THACKERAY, J. F. 1979. An analysis of faunal remains from archaeological sites in southern
South West Africa (Namibia). S. Afr. archaeol. Bull. 34: 18-33. |
VoGEL, J. C. & Visser, E. 1981. Pretoria radiocarbon dates II. Radiocarbon 23: 43-80.
WENDT, W. E. 1974. Ein Rekonstruktionsversuch der Besiedlungsgeschichte des westlichen
Gross-Namalandes seit dem 15. Jahrhundert. J/ S. W. Afr. scient. Soc. 29: 23-56.
fe
i
ce
=
A
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nternational code of zoological nomenclature (particu-
larly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be followed
by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb. nov., syn. nov.,
etc:
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening punctuation
and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s name and year. The
author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a species or subspecies is trans-
ferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of a scientific name must be separated
from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published scientific
names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological order, with all
references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of piates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers.
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby the year is
placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other specimens
mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material not regarded
as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number, depository, descrip-
tion of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes must be recorded, e.g.:
» Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach, Port Eliza-
beth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
ee the Figure depicting 'C mamacolus.. . 73°: ... mC. namacolus (Fig. 10)... .
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded by
initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should preferably be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a book or
article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation to initial
capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively. The generic name should
not be abbreviated at the beginning of a sentence or paragraph.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title; it should be included in the abstract,
counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of Biological Abstracts.
GRAHAM AVERY
LATE HOLOCENE USE OF PENGUIN SKINS:
EVIDENCE FROM A COASTAL SHELL MIDDEN
AT STEENBRAS BAY, LUDERITZ PENINSULA,
SOUTH WEST AFRICA-—NAMIBIA
: 96 PART 4 AUGUST 1985 ISSN 0303-2515
OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
| CAPE TOWN
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, inteiligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous.
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced with
3 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of captions for
illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All pages should be num-
bered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small capitals;
second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered italics. Further
subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals) of headings and
abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking up
should be left to editor and publisher.
4, ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18cm (19 cm including
caption); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated (and preferably uniform); orig-
inals larger than 35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and
final size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the caption; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be taken
into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates are not
printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a single series. Items
of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of figures is not set in type and
should be in lower-case letters. If Letraset is used authors are requested to use Helvetica-style letter-
ing, if possible.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of the
paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes . . .’
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes. . .’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927) .. .’
‘As described (Haughton ef al. 1927) .. .’
Note: no comma separating name and year
pagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically within
each name, with suffixes a, b, etc., to the year for more than one paper by the same author in
that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 1969b) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (according to the World list of scientific periodicals. 4th ed.
London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part number in parentheses, pagination (first and
last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BuLLouGH, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FiscHER, P. H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de la vitalité des mollusques. Journal de conchyliologie 88 (3): 100-140.
FiscHer, P. H., Duvat, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archives de zoologie
expérimentale et générale 74 (33): 627-634.
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon. Annals and
Magazine of Natural History (13) 2 (17): 309-320.
Koun, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean. Bulletin of
the Bingham Oceanographic Collection, Yale University 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca. B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: SCHULTZE, L. Zoologische und anthro-
pologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Stid-Afrika ausgeftihrt in den Jahren
1903-1905 4 (15). Denkschriften der medizinisch-naturwissenschaftlichen Gesellschaft zu Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 96 Band
August 1985 Augustus
Part 4 Deel
ASPECTS OF THE MORPHOLOGY OF THE
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE
WITH A DISCUSSION OF THE EVOLUTION OF
THE CYPRAEACEA AND LAMELLARIACEA
By
TERRENCE M. GOSLINER
&
WILLIAM R. LILTVED
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
ih GES, 5) 3D, AES, Beat), SCS, 5, 7D),
GGL, ti), TO), &, SCY, 7), 10S).
111-2, 5, 7, t=p.i.), 141-2), 15G4™5), 240), 27, 313)y 326)) 38s sono
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 074 5
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
The Rustica Press, Pty eid Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
a
A —- é ‘ & : '
ae a ; 7 Se Wa F
la. tay Lay Pardo ae | ; ines P08), O57 ;
py i~*, ‘
- ’ - &
Fig. 1. Living animals. A. Cypraea fuscorubra Shaw, 1909. B-C. Cypraea algoensis Gray,
1825. D-E. Cypraea coronata (Schilder, 1930). F. Cypraea fuscodentata Gray, 1825.
G. Cypraea edentula Gray, 1825, with egg mass. _H. Advanced embryo of Cypraea algoensis
Gray, 1825.
ASPECS OF THE MORPHOLOGY OF THE ENDEMIC
SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE WITH A DISCUSSION OF THE
EVOLUTION OF THE CYPRAEACEA AND LAMELLARIACEA
By
TERRENCE M. GOSLINER*
California Academy of Sciences, Golden Gate Park,
San Francisco, CA 94118
&
WILLIAM R. LILTVED*
South African Museum, Cape Town
(With 35 figures and 1 table)
[MS accepted 24 September 1984]
ABSTRACT
Aspects of the morphology of eight endemic species of South African Cypraeidae are studied
and the variability of various characters within the family is discussed. Lack of knowledge at
present prevents the subdivision of Cypraea into monophyletic genera or subgenera. A discussion
of the phylogeny of the Cypraeacea and Lamellariacea confirms that the Triviidae are allied to
the Lamellariidae rather than the Cypraeidae and Ovulidae. Examination of Pedicularia
californica reveals that it is most closely allied to the Ovulidae. The three species of South
African Cypraeidae that have been studied exhibit direct development and lack a free-swimming
veliger larva.
CONTENTS
PAGE
LEO RTIGUOM. 1 gis blow’) s ple os a iia re Oe See 67
eaapOlOPICANGESCHPMONSE. <2 = lines etek hee ae eee eh eee ss 68
ES LELDG Se CSS EICIS. 5 Seas oe lad ee ee ee 103
Morphology of Pedicularia californica Newcomb, 1864 .................. 105
SEEMS SULDGI SOM) aaa eines Oleh oe Oe Se ae a ae 105
MAP HOLOPI Calan a Piet. yo oe es he cae dele ead Si OR Be ER Se 109
Systematics of endemic South African Cypraeidae .................-.... 112
Higher systematics and phylogeny of the Cypraeacea and Lamellariacea.... 116
PGES INST DET STT ES, ope ae cae ig
JP BEENEICES.. QS wie 5 cian Bie een eee ene a 120
INTRODUCTION
The family Cypraeidae is one of the most widely studied groups of molluscs,
yet surprisingly little is known about its morphology and biology. The vast
amount of systematic work within the Cypraeidae has been based largely on
conchological features with little attempt to correlate these with characters of the
* The authors have contributed equally to the content of this publication.
67
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 96 (4), 1985: 67-122, 35 figs, 1 table.
68 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
living animal, radula, or internal morphology of the nervous and reproductive
systems. The shores of southern Africa are rich in Cypraea species, and are
particularly noteworthy owing to the large number of endemic species. Burgess
(1970) listed ten endemic species from southern Africa. Since then Cypraea
cruickshanki Kilburn, 1972, C. iutsui (Shikama, 1974), C. lisetae Kilburn, 1975,
and C. connelli Liltved, 1983, have been described, although the validity of some
of these species has been questioned. Cypraea broderipi has more recently been
found from Somalia (Derry 1981), Mauritius and Réunion Island (Whatmore
1981) and can no longer be considered endemic. Morphological studies of the
endemic species of South African Cypraea are limited to the illustration of the
radulae of C. fultoni and C. capensis (Kilburn & Aiken 1972), C. iutsui (Barnard
1963, as globose form of C. fuscorubra) and C. cruickshanki (Kilburn, 1972), and
a brief description of the female reproductive system of C. capensis (Kilburn &
Aiken 1972).
Recent collections, by means of SCUBA diving along the South African
coast from the Cape Peninsula to Algoa Bay, have yielded living specimens of five
additional species of Cypraea. Their morphology is described here together with
that of preserved specimens of C. capensis, C. cruickshanki and C. iutsui. The
taxonomic status of the South African endemic Cypraeidae is reviewed.
Many authors (e.g. Schilder 1936) have suggested that Cypraea be
subdivided into numerous genera or subgenera while others have maintained that
the species should remain united within a single genus. The relative strengths and
weaknesses of these arguments are presented.
There has also been considerable question as to the relationships of the
various families comprising the Cypraeacea and Lamellariacea, particularly
regarding the status of the Triviidae and Pedicularia. The morphology of these
taxa is reviewed and the phylogeny of these superfamilies is discussed.
MORPHOLOGICAL DESCRIPTIONS
Cypraea fuscorubra Shaw, 1909
Figs 1A, 2-8, 33A
Cypraea similis Gray, 1831: 36, non Gmelin, 1791.
Cypraea fuscorubra Shaw, 1909: 302.
Cypraea gondwanalandensis Burgess, 1970: 31, pl. 1 (figs A-A2).
Material
Specimens (SAM-—A35990) were collected at several localities on the
Atlantic coast of the Cape Peninsula from 25 to 48 m depth. A single specimen
(SAM-—A35991) was collected from Danger Point in 30 m of water.
Distribution
Cypraea fuscorubra is known from the Atlantic coast of the Cape Peninsula
to Cape Agulhas.
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE 69
Shell
The shell (Fig. 2) is ovoid, 28—40 mm in length. The spire is generally not
umbilicate and the protoconch is generally covered by a callus. The labrum has a
dull finish with 17-18 coarse brown teeth. The aperture is moderately narrow,
widest anteriorly. The columella has 18—24 teeth, which are finer than the labral
teeth and do not extend beyond the aperture. The fossula is straight to convex
with three or four denticles. The dorsum is thickly calcified. The dorsal surface is
cream, slate-grey or mauve and is densely spotted with a reticulate pattern of
spots. The base is thick, cream in colour with brown spotting.
Living animal (Fig. 1A)
The foot is thick and wide, shortened and rounded posteriorly. The foot and
siphon are white in colour and their dorsal surface may be ornamented with
sparse black spots or stippling. The smooth siphon is short and wide, recurved
and slightly uneven at the apex. The yellow tentacles are straight and slightly
tapered. The opaque mantle is smooth but occasionally it has a slightly granular
texture. Typically the ground-colour of the mantle is red or whitish but
occasionally it may be cream with black longitudinal lines forming a ‘finger-print’
pattern of parallel lines.
Mantle complex (Fig. 3)
The mantle cavity is directed towards the right side of the body. The
ctenidium is large, consisting of approximately 200 triangular plicae. The
triradiate osphradium is situated anterior to the ctenidium and consists of
numerous leaflets. Posterior to the ctenidium, on the left side of the body, is the
vascular kidney. At the junction of the ctenidium and kidney is the two-
chambered heart. Near the opening of the mantle cavity, at the level of the
kidney, is the hypobranchial gland, which consists of 11 plicae.
Digestive system
The large, muscular buccal mass comprises the bulk of the anterior portion of
the body (Fig. 4). From it extend the wide, glandular oesophagus and the coiled
radular sac. The salivary glands are fused and possess a pair of ducts that pass
through the nerve ring and the buccal mass adjacent to its junction with the
oesophagus. The oesophagus narrows into the intestine, which forms a short
loop, the stomach. There are two ducts emanating from the stomach to the large,
granular digestive gland. No caecum was observed. The intestine curves to the
right beyond the stomach and terminates at the anus, near the opening of the
mantle cavity (Fig. 3).
The buccal mass contains a pair of flexible jaws (Fig. 5), which almost
completely dissolve when placed in 10 per cent sodium hydroxide. The
taenioglossate radula is a narrow, elongate ribbon, about two-thirds of which is
contained within the radular sac at the posterior end of the buccal mass. The
70
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH
AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 2. Cypraea fuscorubra Shaw, 1909. Shell. A. Dorsal aspect.
B. Ventral aspect. C. Lateral aspect.
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE
ea SS)
Fig. 3. Cypraea fuscorubra Shaw, 1909. Mantle complex.
a
UW ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 4. Cypraea fuscorubra Shaw, 1909.
Digestive tract.
bir CELBISES
a
a AEG, EA
\ ( KG
Fig. 5. Cypraea fuscorubra Shaw, 1909. Jaws.
radula (Figs 6, 33A) consists of 93-96 rows of teeth. Each row contains three
lateral teeth on either side of the rachidian tooth. Each tooth has a small rounded
denticle on either side of the strong central cusp. There is a thin outer margin and
a strong, centrally emarginate base to the rachidian tooth.
Central nervous system (Fig. 7)
The central nervous system is modified from the typical prosobranch plan. It
is highly cephalized and asymmetrical with most ganglia situated to the left of the
oesophagus. The paired cerebral ganglia are closely appressed to each other,
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE
Fig. 6. Cypraea fuscorubra Shaw, 1909. Scanning electron micrographs of teeth.
A. Entire width of radula. B. Central region.
13
74 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
without a distinct commissure between them. From the cerebral ganglia a pair of
nerves emanates anteriorly and joins the paired buccal ganglia on either side of
the junction of the oesophagus and buccal mass. Adjacent and slightly dorsal to
the cerebral ganglia are the pleural ganglia. From their anterior side a pair of
nerves connects with the supraintestinal ganglion, situated anterior to the
cerebral ganglion at the base of the osphradium, on the left side of the mantle
cavity. The nerve between the left pleural and supraintestinal ganglia represents a
zygoneurous connective. Nerves from the supraintestinal ganglion innervate the
osphradium and ctenidium, and extend to the posterior end of the body cavity.
From the posterior side of the cerebral and pleural ganglia extend the pedal
connectives, which are fused for most of their lengths. The pedal connectives join
the elongate pedal ganglia, which are fused anteriorly without a distinct
commissure. These ganglia are embedded in the muscular tissue of the foot.
There are nerves emerging from the outer side of most of the length of the pedal
ganglia and ladder-like connectives between the two ganglionic masses. A thick,
elongate nerve emerges from the posterior end of the left pleural ganglion and
Fig. 7. Cypraea fuscorubra Shaw, 1909.
Central nervous system.
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE i
joins the subintestinal ganglion near the posterior end of the body cavity. Three
large nerves emerge from the posterior portion of the subintestinal ganglion. The
nerve at the left side of the ganglion continues posteriorly and connects with the
small visceral ganglion, at the base of the genital mass, near the posterior limit of
the oesophagus. The visceral ganglion branches posteriorly to innervate the
genital mass and anteriorly gives rise to the right lateral nerve cord, which
continues anteriorly until it joins the supraintestinal ganglion.
Reproductive system
The animals are gonochoric. The female system (Fig. 8A) consists of a large,
yellowish ovary, which interdigitates with the digestive gland. From the anterior
Fig. 8. Cypraea fuscorubra Shaw, 1909. A. Female reproductive system.
B. Male reproductive system.
76 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
end of the ovary the narrow oviduct emerges. It widens into the albumen gland.
On the anterodorsal surface of the albumen gland is the dark grey, glandular
receptaculum seminis. Ventral to the receptaculum seminis is the narrow band of
the membrane gland. Anteriorly, the bulk of the female gland mass is composed
of the mucous gland (=capsule gland of Kay (1960b)). The mucous gland
narrows anteriorly and joins the bulbous bursa copulatrix near the gonopore.
The male system (Fig. 8B) consists of a large testis with numerous acini.
These empty into the elongate, highly convoluted ampulla (= seminal vesicle of
Kay (1960b)). The ampulla narrows to a glandular, prostatic vas deferens with an
Opening near the entrance of the mantle cavity. From this opening a ciliated
sperm groove connects the vas deferens to the tip of the muscular penis on the
right side of the head.
Cypraea algoensis Gray, 1825
Figs 1B, C, H, 9-11, 32, 33B
Cypraea algoensis Gray, 1825: 498.
Material
Numerous specimens have been collected and studied from 20 to 48 m depth
along the Atlantic coast of the Cape Peninsula (SAM-—A359972), in 17-35 m depth
in False Bay (SAM—A35993), and recorded from 30 m depth at Danger Point.
Distribution
Specimens have been collected along the south-western Cape coasts from
Saldanha Bay on the Atlantic coast to Cape Agulhas. This species may extend as
far north-east as Jeffreys Bay.
Shell
Conchologically Cypraea algoensis is variable but with some consistent and
distinctive features. The adult shell (Fig. 9) ranges from 12 to 31 mm in length.
The spire is generally not umbilicate and the protoconch may or may not be
visible. The labrum is strongly developed with 14-21 fine white teeth, which
extend across about half the width of the labrum. The narrow aperture is widened
anteriorly and strongly curved posteriorly. There are 9-21 finely denticulate
columellar teeth. The fossula is poorly developed or absent, occasionally with two
or three denticles. The shell varies in shape from pyriform to globular. Globose
specimens are generally characteristic of water deeper than 50 m, and are more
heavily calcified.
Shells from the Atlantic coast of the Cape Peninsula are generally about
one-third larger and have a flesh or orange ground-colour with fine brown dorsal
spotting, while shells from False Bay to Cape Agulhas are normally smaller and
may be dark purple with dark brown dorsal spots. The base of the shell and the
teeth are always whitish and dark brown marginal spots are present.
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE
Fig. 9. Cypraea algoensis Gray, 1825. Shell. A. Dorsal
B. Ventral aspect. C. Lateral aspect.
aspect.
Ty
78
Fig. 10.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Cypraea algoensis Gray, 1825. Scanning electron micrographs of
radula. A. Entire width. B. Central region.
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE 19
| Fig. 11. Cypraea algoensis Gray, 1825. A. Female reproductive system.
B. Male reproductive system.
The foot is short and thick, rounded posteriorly. Most commonly the foot is
salmon-pink in colour but it may occasionally be white, and black spots may be
present. Specimens from False Bay generally possess a dense pattern of black
lines. The smooth siphon is white or black with a white apex; the tip is slightly
thickened but smooth. The lemon-yellow tentacles are slender and slightly
| tapered. The mantle is salmon or translucent white, with finely stippled black
specks, or marked with fine brown lines forming a ‘finger-print’ pattern.
Specimens from False Bay to Cape Agulhas generally have a black mantle, which
often possesses white wart-like or fleshy finger-like papillae.
: Living animal (Fig. 1B, C)
Mantle complex
The arrangement of organs within the mantle complex is identical to that
described for C. fuscorubra. The ctenidium consists of about 150 leaflets while the
hypobranchial gland is composed of seven plicae.
a
80 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Digestive system
The digestive organs are arranged as in C. fuscorubra. The radular formula is
77-91 X 3.1.3. The rachidian tooth (Figs 10, 33B) is broad and rectangular with a
small central cusp flanked by a pair of oblong cusps. The base of the rachidian
tooth is short with a slight medial indentation. The lateral teeth are also broad
with three cusps. The central cusp is shortest on the inner lateral tooth and
longest on the outermost.
Central nervous system
The arrangement of ganglia is identical to that described for C. fuscorubra.
Reproductive system
The configuration of both the male and female reproductive organs is similar
to that described for C. fuscorubra. The only significant differences are the
proportionately smaller receptaculum seminis in the female (Fig. 11A) and the
discrete prostate in the male of C. algoensis (Fig. 11B).
Cypraea coronata (Schilder, 1930)
Figs 1D-E, 12-15, 33C
Luponia coronata Schilder, 1930: 113, text-fig.
Cypraeovula gloriosa Shikama, 1971: 101.
Material
Five specimens (SAM-—A35988) were examined from the Atlantic coast of
the Cape Peninsula where they were collected in 25—48 m of water. A single
specimen was also recorded from 30 m depth off Danger Point.
Distribution
Cypraea coronata is known from the Atlantic coast of the Cape Peninsula to
Transkei.
Shell (Fig. 12)
The shell varies in length from 26 to 36 mm and is pyriform with closely
spaced growth lines. The spire is slightly umbilicate with a well-developed callus
covering the protoconch. The prominent labrum and thickened columellar
margin are tuberculate. Tubercles may be absent in juvenile specimens and
occasionally in adults. The aperture is narrow, widening slightly anteriorly and
curving posteriorly. There are 18—20 coarse teeth on the labrum, some of which
are occasionally fused. The anteriormost and posteriormost teeth may extend
over the labrum and fuse with the tubercles. There are 16—22 columellar teeth.
The mid-columellar teeth are fine and become coarser and pigmented towards
either end of the columella. These anterior and posterior columellar teeth extend
on to the columella. The dorsal surface of the shell is mauve, slate-grey or cream
with transverse rows of olive-green or brown pigment. This pigment is usually
81
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE
A. Dorsal aspect.
C. Lateral aspect.
Fig. 12. Cypraea coronata (Schilder, 1930). Shell.
B. Ventral aspect.
82 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
overlaid with blotches of olive-green or chestnut-brown, which may cover most of
the dorsal surface of the shell.
Living animal (Fig. 1D-E)
The external morphology of Cypraea coronata is less variable intraspecifi-
cally than in any other species of endemic Cypraeidae in southern Africa. The
creamy-white foot is thick, short and fleshy. It is thickened anteriorly. The siphon
is usually sparsely papillate throughout with minute wart-like papillae, and is
thickened at its tip. The lemon-yellow tentacles are slender and gradually taper;
the tips are blunt and slightly darker in colour. The mantle is covered with white
wart-like papillae approximately 1 mm in diameter. Between these papillae are
more numerous smaller papillae about 0,2 mm in diameter. The margins of the
mantle lobes are covered with a reticulate pattern of dark-brown or black
pigment. This pigment does not extend on to the surface of the papillae. The
intensity of the pigment decreases away from the margins of the lobes and is
replaced by pink pigment. Specimens with a black or translucent white mantle
and white papillae have been encountered but are rare.
Mantle complex
The arrangement of organs within the mantle complex is identical to that
described for C. fuscorubra. The ctenidium consists of approximately 200 leaflets
while the hypobranchial gland contains four plicae.
Digestive system
The only significant feature of the digestive system distinguishing C. coronata
from C. fuscorubra is the morphology of the radula. The radular formula is
95 x 3.1.3 in one specimen examined. The rachidian teeth (Figs 13, 33C) are
Square in shape rather than trapezoidal. The central cusp is triangular and is
flanked by a pair of rounded lateral denticles. At the base of each of the lateral
denticles is a small secondary denticle. The base of the rachidian tooth is small
and medially slightly emarginate. The lateral teeth (Fig. 14) also possess a pair of
primary denticles on either side of the elongate central cusp and a secondary cusp
at the base of the inner primary denticle of the first two laterals. The bases of the
lateral teeth are proportionately smaller than in C. fuscorubra.
Central nervous system
The configuration of the ganglia is identical to that described for
C. fuscorubra.
Reproductive system
The male system is identical to that described for C. fuscorubra. The female
system (Fig. 15) is only slightly different; the receptaculum seminis of C. coronata
appears to be more ramified than that of C. fuscorubra.
Fig. 13.
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE
Ten.
oS Sieg
< a SS
Cypraea coronata (Schilder, 1930). Scanning electron micrographs of
radula. A. Entire width. B. Rachidian tooth.
83
84
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 14. Cypraea coronata (Schilder, 1930). Scanning electron micrograph of inner
lateral tooth.
mu
Fig. 15. Cypraea coronata (Schilder, 1930).
Female reproductive system.
ee ee
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE 85
Cypraea fuscodentata Gray, 1825
Figs 1F, 16-18, 33D
Cypraea fuscodentata Gray, 1825: 499.
Material
Ten specimens (SAM—A35989) were collected from 6 to 35 m in False Bay,
Cape Peninsula.
Distribution
Cypraea fuscodentata has been collected from False Bay to Jeffreys Bay.
Shell
The shell (Fig. 16) is cylindrical to pyriform, ranging in length from 21 to
44 mm. The spire is umbilicate and the protoconch is generally obscured. The
labrum has 15-19 coarse, dark-brown teeth. The aperture is very narrow. The
15-20 coarse columellar teeth extend from the aperture across most of the width
of the columella. The fossula is straight or convex, without denticulations. The
dorsal surface is thickly calcified with a cream or grey ground-colour and a dense
pattern of brown spots. The margins of the shell may be cream, brown or purple.
Living animal (Fig. 1F)
The broad foot is short and posteriorly rounded. The siphon is recurved at
the smooth tip and may be white or black with a white tip. The tentacles are
elongate and slightly tapered, and yellow to orange in colour. The coloration of
the mantle and foot is exceedingly variable. It may be black, white, orange,
brown or red in individuals from the same population. Sparse papillae of variable
shape may be present or absent from the outer surface of the mantle. When
present the papillae tend to be denser near the margins of the mantle.
Mantle complex
The organs of the mantle cavity are arranged identically to those described
for C. fuscorubra. In a juvenile specimen the ctenidium consists of about 150
leaflets and the hypobranchial gland of seven plicae.
Digestive system (Figs 17, 33D)
The organs of the digestive system are arranged identically to those described
for C. fuscorubra. The rachidian tooth of C. fuscodentata has a pair of distinct
ridges on the inner face, which are absent in C. fuscorubra and C. coronata. The
radular formula in one specimen is 83 X 3.1.3. The central cusp is short, as are the
oblong adjacent cusps. The central cusp of each of the lateral teeth is elongate, as
are the smaller adjacent cusps.
Central nervous system
The arrangement of ganglia is identical to that of C. fuscorubra.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
86
YW,
Mb; yy,
Dorsal aspect.
.
A
. Shell.
C. Lateral aspect.
1825
Cypraea fuscodentata Gray,
B. Ventral aspect.
16
1g
\eh
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE
Fig. 17. Cypraea fuscodentata Gray, 1825. Scanning electron micrographs of
radula. A. Entire width. 8B. Central region.
87
88 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Reproductive system
Both the female and male systems are arranged in the manner described for
C. fuscorubra with the exception that the receptaculum seminis is far more
elaborate in C. fuscodentata (Fig. 18).
Fig. 18. Cypraea fuscodentata Gray, 1825. Female reproductive system.
Cypraea capensis Gray, 1828
Figs 19-20, 33E
Cypraea capensis Gray, 1828: 573.
Material
The single specimen (SAM-—A35995) examined was removed from the
stomach of a fish collected in Algoa Bay.
Distribution
Cypraea capensis is known from the eastern Cape Province and Transkei
from Jeffreys Bay to Port St. Johns, and from deep water off Natal.
Shell (Fig. 19)
The shell is elongate, pyriform, from 22 to 39 mm in length. The spire is
umbilicate and the protoconch may be obscured by a callus. The labrum is
ornamented with 20—28 fine, brown teeth, which extend on to and across the
dorsum and columella as transverse ribs. These ribs continue on to the columella,
where they merge with the columellar and fossular denticles. The fossula is
convex. The dorsum may be brown, grey or purple in colour, and may or may not
be ornamented with dark brown mottling.
Living animal
The only description of the external morphology of C. capensis is that of
Kilburn & Aiken (1972). In the specimen they described the foot and tentacles
were bright orange-yellow and the mantle was brownish with dark spots and faint
white lines.
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE
Fig. 19. Cypraea capensis Gray, 1828. Shell. A. Dorsal aspect.
B. Ventral aspect. C. Lateral aspect.
89
90
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 20. Cypraea capensis. Scanning electron micrographs of radula.
A. Entire width. _B. Central region.
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE 91
Mantle complex
Owing to the desiccation of the specimen details of the mantle complex could
not be determined.
Digestive system (Figs 20, 33E)
The radular formula is 76 X 3.1.3. The rachidian tooth is trapezoidal with a
well-developed triangular central cusp. There is a pair of strong ridges on the
inner side of the rachidian tooth. The base of the rachidian tooth is large and
deeply emarginate. The lateral tooth possesses an elongate cusp and rounded
adjacent denticles.
Central nervous system
Although the specimen was poorly preserved it was possible to determine
that there is an elongate lateral nerve cord present between the left pleural and
subintestinal ganglia as in C. fuscorubra. The pedal ganglia are also elongate.
Reproductive system
The specimen was not sufficiently preserved to examine the reproductive
system. Kilburn & Aiken (1972) stated that the female specimen they examined
had a glandular receptaculum seminis and a bursa copulatrix. However, it is
unclear whether the receptaculum consists of small glands as described by Kay
(1960a) or if it is lobate as in the other South African species examined in this
study.
Cypraea edentula Gray, 1825
Figs 1G, 21-23, 33F
Cypraea algoensis var. edentula Gray, 1825: 498.
Material
One specimen destroyed by dissection was collected off the Sunday’s River
Mouth north of Port Elizabeth in 48 m of water. A second specimen (SAM-
A35994) was collected from 12 m in Algoa Bay.
Distribution
Cypraea edentula has been collected from Tsitsikama Coastal National Park
to the south-western Transkei.
Shell (Fig. 21)
The shell of Cypraea edentula varies in length from 12 to 33 mm and is highly
variable in shape and coloration. The spire may be slightly umbilicate or
produced. The protoconch is usually visible. Generally, labral and columellar
teeth are entirely absent. Some specimens have poorly-developed denticles on the
labrum but these are normally limited to the anterior end and are very faint. The
fossula is smooth and convex with as many as six denticles. Typically the shell is
2
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 21. Cypraea edentula Gray, 1825. Shell. A. Dorsal aspect.
B. Ventral aspect. C. Lateral aspect.
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE
Fig. 22. Cypraea edentula Gray, 1825. Scanning electron micrographs of radula.
A. Entire width. B. Central region.
2)
94 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
thinly calcified with a brown or flesh ground-colour. Fulvous spots or blotches
cover the dorsal surface. In some specimens, which are known as C. edentula var.
alfredensis Schilder & Schilder, the shell is noticeably more heavily calcified. In
these specimens the denticles tend to be more strongly developed on the labrum
and the ground-colour of the shell is slate-grey. In all varieties the margins of the
shell are white with brown spots. Cypraea edentula var. alfredensis may prove to
represent a distinct species.
Living animal (Fig. 1G)
The foot is short and posteriorly rounded, the siphon is translucent white,
strongly recurved and uneven at its tip. The tentacles are lemon-yellow to orange.
They are slightly tapered and rounded at their tip. In one specimen the mantle
was dark pink stippled with fine black spots. It had sparse whitish wart-like
papillae, which were denser on the labral lobe than on the columellar lobe. On
the columellar lobe were three large irregular protuberances. The second
specimen had a lighter, more transparent mantle covered with dense green
tomentose papillae. A few randomly spaced cabbage-like papillae were also
present.
Fig. 23. Cypraea edentula Gray, 1825. A. Male reproductive system.
B. Penis, opposite view.
ee
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE 95
Mantle complex
The arrangement of organs is identical to that described for C. fuscorubra.
The hypobranchial gland is poorly preserved in the present material but the
ctenidium consists of approximately 150 leaflets. The osphradium is triradiate.
Digestive system
The radular morphology is the only feature of the digestive system that
differs from that of C. fuscorubra. The radular formula is 66 x 3.1.3 in one
specimen. The rachidian teeth possess a rounded central cusp with round
adjacent cusps (Figs 22, 33F). The base of the rachidian teeth is thin and centrally
emarginate. The lateral teeth are broad and possess elongate central and adjacent
cusps.
Central nervous system
The arrangement of ganglia is similar to that described for C. fuscorubra with
a long pleural-subintestinal connective and elongate pedal ganglia.
Reproductive system
Only the male system has been studied (Fig. 23). There is a discrete prostate
present at the posterior limit of the sperm groove, as in C. algoensis.
Cypraea cruickshanki Kilburn, 1972
Figs 24-27, 33G
Cypraea (Cypraeovula) cruickshanki Kilburn, 1972: 210, pl. 1, text-fig. 1.
Material
A single, freshly dead specimen (SAM-—A35987) was collected by a
commercial fishing trawler in about 800 m of water approximately 50 km east of
Durban. Dead shells of other specimens in the private collections of several
individuals were also examined.
Distribution
This species appears to be restricted to the coast of Natal in relatively deep
water. It inhabits depths that exceed that of any other known species of Cypraea.
Shell (Fig. 24)
The shell is globose, 25,8—33 mm in length. The spire is umbilicate and
calloused, covering the protoconch. The labrum is broad, widest centrally and is
not glossy. The labrum possesses 20—22 coarse denticles that extend across one-
half to three-quarters of the width of the labrum. The anteriormost and
posteriormost labral teeth occasionally extend around the labrum, forming
tubercles that are visible dorsally. A tubercle is always present on either side
of the siphonal canal. The aperture is narrow, widest anteriorly. There are
96 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 24. Cypraea cruickshanki Kilburn, 1972. Shell (dorsally pigmented specimen).
A. Dorsal aspect. B. Ventral aspect. C. Lateral aspect (left). D. Lateral aspect (right).
18-21 columellar teeth, which are finer than the labral teeth. The fossula is well
developed with 4-7 weak to strong denticles. The dorsum may be white, yellow
or orange. Occasionally specimens may have brown dorsal spots or blotches.
Living animal
Although living specimens have not been observed, the freshly dead
specimen examined in this study had a smooth mantle and foot that were whitish
in colour. The slender tentacles were also white.
Mantle complex
The organs within the mantle cavity are arranged in the same manner as in
C. fuscorubra.
Digestive system
The buccal mass, oesophagus, digestive gland and intestine are arranged in
the same fashion as in C. fuscorubra. The radular formula is 76 X 3.1.3 in the
single specimen examined. The rachidian tooth (Figs 25, 33G) is broad with a pair
Fig.
DS.
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE
Cypraea cruickshanki Kilburn, 1972. Scanning electron micrographs of
radula. A. Entire width. B. Central region.
97
98 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
of ridges on either side of the centre of the tooth. The base of this tooth is well
developed and centrally emarginate. On either side of the rounded central cusp is
a round denticle. The central cusp and adjacent denticles are rounded on the
inner lateral tooth and increase in length successively in the outer two laterals.
Central nervous system
The arrangement of ganglia is similar to that described for C. fuscorubra with
the exception of the pedal ganglia. In C. cruickshanki (Fig. 26) the pedal ganglia
are spherical with nerves extending from their posterior surface.
Fig. 26. Cypraea cruickshanki Kilburn, 1972.
Pedal ganglia.
Fig. 27. Cypraea cruickshanki Kilburn, 1972. Female reproductive system.
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE 99
Reproductive system
The single specimen available is a mature female (Fig. 27). The configuration
of the reproductive organs is similar to that described for C. fuscorubra.
However, the glandular receptaculum seminis of C. cruickshanki is less ramified
than that of C. fuscorubra.
Cypraea iutsui (Shikama, 1974)
Figs 28-31, 33H
Cypraeovula (Crossia) iutsui Shikama, 1974: 24, fig. 2.
Material
The single preserved specimen (SAM-—A35986), an immature female, was
collected by the Department of Zoology of the University of Cape Town in
360-365 m of water off Cape Point.
Distribution
Specimens have been collected from the Olifants River mouth on the
Atlantic coast of the Cape Province to the vicinity of Port Elizabeth, on the
south-east coast.
Shell (Fig. 28)
The shell is globose, 23 to 38 mm in length. The spire is umbilicate and the
protoconch is generally obscured. The labrum is rough in texture and not glossy.
Its edge bears 17—25 fine teeth, which are generally white but occasionally are
tinged with brown. These teeth extend across about one-quarter of the width of
the labrum. The aperture is narrow and curved posteriorly. The columella
possesses 12-23 teeth, which are strongest anteriorly. The fossula is poorly
developed and generally lacks denticles. In one specimen three weak teeth are
present on the fossula. The dorsal surface of the shell is pinkish with dense
chestnut mottling. The basal callus is thin and white.
Living animal
The mantle surface is smooth off-white with fine irregular black dots.
Mantle complex
The arrangement of the organs within the mantle cavity is largely the same as
in C. fuscorubra.
Digestive system
As in the preceding species the digestive system of C. iutsui is identical to
that found in C. fuscorubra, with the exception of the radula. The radular formula
is 80 X 3.1.3. The rachidian teeth are rectangular with a thickened central area
and a strong slightly emarginate base (Figs 29, 33H). Their central cusp is
100 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 28. Cypraea iutsui (Shikama, 1974). Shell. A. Dorsal aspect.
B. Ventral aspect. C. Lateral aspect.
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE 101
Fig. 29. Cypraea iutsui (Shikama, 1974). Scanning electron micrographs of
radula. A. Entire width. B. Central region.
102 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
rounded, triangular with round lateral denticles. On either side of the lateral
denticles is a rounded central cusp, as in C. coronata. The lateral denticles, unlike
those of C. coronata, lack secondary denticles on their inner edge.
Central nervous system
The ganglia of C. iutsui differ in their arrangement from that described for
C. fuscorubra. Cypraea iutsui is significantly more cephalized than any other of
the South African endemic Cypraeidae. Most notably, the lateral nerve cord has
been shortened so that the left pleural ganglion is immediately adjacent to the
subintestinal ganglion (Fig. 30). As in C. cruickshanki, the pedal ganglia are
spherical but there is only a single pair of nerves, which extend from the anterior
rather than posterior end of the ganglia.
Fig. 30. Cypraea iutsui (Shikama, 1974).
Central nervous system.
Reproductive system
The single specimen is an immature female (Fig. 31). The oviduct has not yet
undergone differentiation into the female gland mass and receptaculum seminis,
although the bursa copulatrix is well developed.
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE 103
Fig. 31. Cypraea iutsui (Shikama, 1974).
Immature female reproductive system.
BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Ecology
The majority of known species of cowries are found in shallow tropical seas.
Only a few species are known from temperate waters. Cypraea spadicea is known
from cold waters of central and southern California. Only in southern Australia
and South Africa are there large faunas of temperate endemics, consisting of
more than ten species.
Eleven of the endemic South African cowries are limited to temperate waters,
but four endemic species are restricted to the warm, subtropical waters of Natal.
The endemic cowries of southern Africa are unusual in that they are
generally restricted to the sublittoral zone, the only exception being two
specimens of Cypraea capensis that were found in the intertidal zone at Gonubie,
near East London (Kilburn & Aiken 1972). Several species, C. citrina,
C. fuscorubra, C. fuscodentata, C. coronata, C. capensis, C. edentula and
C. algoensis are found in the sublittoral as shallow as 10-100 m depth, while
C. cruickshanki and C. tutsui are known from depths of 400-800 m and 110-365 m,
respectively. The depth distributions of C. lisetae* and C. fultoni remain largely
unknown as most specimens have been collected from fish stomachs.
Most cowries are known to prey on a variety of benthic algae and
invertebrates including sponges, polychaetes and bryozoans, but little is known
about their prey specificity. Hayes (1983) has recently demonstrated that the diet
of some species of Cypraea may be restricted to a single species of sponge while
others are far more generalized predators. Cypraea coronata, C. fuscorubra,
C. fuscodentata and C. algoensis are often found in association with sponges. The
intestine of the single specimen of C. iutsui examined in this study was full of
sponge spicules, as were those of individuals of C. edentula and C. fuscorubra.
Cypraea coronata has also been found together with bryozoans and polychaetes.
Darkly pigmented specimens of C. algoensis from False Bay are usually found
upon or adjacent to the crinoid Comanthus wahlbergi.
Developmental biology
Those tropical species of Cypraeidae of which the developmental patterns
have been described possess a free-swimming veliger stage that metamorphoses
* See note on p. 122.
104 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 32. Cypraea algoensis Gray, 1825. A-B. Developing embryos.
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE 105
into a juvenile following a variable planktonic phase (Ostergaard 1950). Direct
development has been observed in several species from southern Australia
(Griffiths 1962) and in Cypraea mus from the northern coast of South America
(Anonymous 1981). Kilburn & Rippey (1982) suggested that the cold-water
endemics from southern Africa might exhibit direct development since the
temperate Australian species demonstrate this pattern of development. In this
study we have observed developing embryos of three species of endemic South
African cowries, C. algoensis, C. fuscodentata and C. fuscorubra. These three
species lack a free-swimming veliger stage and the post-metamorphic juvenile
emerges directly from the egg capsule. The eggs are generally laid on the under-
surface of rocks and are brooded by the female. One egg mass of C. fuscodentata
consisted of 52 capsules with numerous white eggs. The capsules are 3,9 mm in
diameter. The egg mass of C. algoensis consisted of 28 egg capsules, 3,8—4,0 mm
in diameter, and contained whitish or yellow eggs. A single egg capsule was laid in
a bucket of sea water by a freshly collected specimen of C. fuscorubra. It was
similar in size and appearance to the capsules of the other two species.
Developing embryos have been observed only in C. algoensis. The velum is
greatly reduced but recognizable as a single ovoid lobe (Fig. 32). Juveniles have
not been observed hatching from the egg capsules but well- developed embryos
(Fig. 1H) have been observed with nurse eggs and were probably about ready to
emerge from the egg capsules.
MORPHOLOGY OF PEDICULARIA CALIFORNICA NEWCOMB, 1864
Examination of specimens of Pedicularia californica Newcomb, 1864, in the
course of this study, yields several interesting facts. The osphradium is triradiate
with leaflets absent from the left margin (Fig. 34A). The pedal ganglia are
spherical in shape without posteriorly directed extensions. The animals are
gonochoric. The male system (Fig. 34B) consists of a highly convoluted ampulla,
which gradually forms a short vas deferens. The tubular vas deferens terminates
near the opening of the mantle cavity, where it empties into a ciliated sperm
groove. The sperm groove continues along the right side of the body and along
the ventral side of the penis. Kay (1957a) erroneously stated that Pedicularia has
closed reproductive ducts. At the base of the penis is a dermal prostate gland that
empties into its own ciliated groove and joins the sperm groove. The female
system (Fig. 34C) is similar to that described by Ghiselin & Wilson (1966) for
Cyphoma gibbosum, except that an ectal bursa copulatrix is absent.
GENERIC SUBDIVISION
The Cypraeidae represent a large family of gastropods with an extensive
literature, primarily owing to their interest to shell collectors. Most of these works
are strictly conchological or distributional in nature and few morphological
106 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ABQ
CONS
ALQY
HEA
Fig. 33. Radulae of South African Cypraeidae. A. Cypraea fuscorubra Shaw, 1909.
B. Cypraea algoensis Gray, 1825. _C. Cypraea coronata (Schilder, 1930). D. Cypraea
fuscodentata Gray, 1825.
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE 107
Beg %
DOA
Ve
wr,
Fig. 33 (continued). E.Cypraea capensis Gray, 1828. F. Cypraea edentula Gray, 1825.
G. Cypraea cruickshanki Kilburn, 1972. H. Cypraea iutsui (Shikama, 1974).
108 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ga 5 Cc
Fig. 34. Pedicularia californica Newcomb, 1864. A. Osphradium.
B. Male reproductive system. C. Female reproductive system.
studies have been conducted (Shaw 1909; Vayssiére 1923, 1927; Riese 1931; Rau
1934; Risbec 1937; Kay 1960a, 1960b, 1961, 1963). Wilson & McComb (1967)
utilized subgeneric names within Cypraea. Kay (1960a: 283) stated that ‘the
species of Cypraea thus far examined are characterized by an extremely
conservative anatomical picture’. However, she described considerable variability
in the radula and female reproductive morphology, which had not previously
been recorded. Recognition of these features resulted in species groups that
differed from previous systems, which were based largely on conchological
features. As the morphology of about only one-third of the described species was
known, Kay (1960a) stated that it was better to include all members of the
Cypraeidae in the single genus Cypraea until more comparative data became
available. This was a dramatic departure from previous classifications (Schilder
1936; Steadman & Cotton 1946; Allan 1956), which subdivided the family into
24-61 genera. Subsequently, Cernohorsky (1965) incorporated many of the
specific changes suggested by Kay (1960a), but divided the family into 28 genera.
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE 109
A similar situation exists in the closely allied Triviidae. Cate (1979) subdivided
the triviids into 15 genera based solely on conchological features. More recently,
Gosliner & Liltved (1982) found considerable variation in internal morphology
and suggested that all species be contained in the single genus Trivia until
sufficient information was available to ascertain natural groupings. The fact that
the present study demonstrates even greater morphological variability within the
Cypraeidae supports Kay’s contention that insufficient information is presently
available to divide the family. The present study therefore maintains all species
within the single genus Cypraea, until the morphology of the endemic Cypraeidae
of southern Africa is more fully known.
MORPHOLOGICAL VARIABILITY
Great variability exists in the morphology of the shell. Despite claims by
several workers that there is little morphological variability in the Cypraeidae,
most organ systems vary considerably more than previously indicated. For this
reason it is imperative to review the available morphological data.
Shell
The South African endemic cypraeids exhibit a propensity for sinistrality not
found in other members of the family. Sinistral shells are rare, in any case, but
have been found in specimens of Cypraea edentula, C. fuscodentata and
C. capensis.
Mantle
Schilder (1936), Kay (1963), Cernohorsky (1965), and Wilson & McComb
(1967) have suggested that the coloration and ornamentation of the mantle and
siphon in living specimens are important criteria for distinguishing species. This is
particularly true of the shape of the papillae. Schilder (1936) stated that closely
allied species such as C. staphylea and C. limacina can be distinguished by their
shells and living animals despite the fact that their radulae are very similar. The
usefulness of mantle characteristics for the separation of species groups into
higher taxa has been successfully employed (Kay 1963, 1981) but needs to be
more fully explored.
Our observations of living representatives of these species from South Africa
in the present study confirm Schilder’s (1936) observations. Within the endemic
South African Cypraeidae most species possess simple wart-like papillae. In
C. algoensis, C. fuscodentata and C. fuscorubra the number and density of
papillae are variable and they may often be entirely absent. The mantle of
C. coronata, on the other hand, is always densely papillate with wart-like tubercles.
In C. edentula cabbage-like papillae are present in addition to simple ones. The
colour of the mantle varies intraspecifically. Cypraea fuscorubra exhibits the
greatest variability in coloration while in C. coronata only the proportions of the
various pigments vary. Despite the intraspecific variability of mantle colour most
110 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
South African endemic species can be distinguished on the basis of their mantle
characteristics (Fig. 1).
Mantle complex
A certain degree of variability has been described for the mantle complex in
the Cypraeidae. Schilder (1936) suggested that differences in elaboration of the
osphradium and ctenidium might constitute a basis for the division of genera in
the family. Kay (1960a) stated that such differences might be useful in separating
closely related species but discounted their usefulness in separating genera. Later
(1963) she noted that C. testudinaria and C. hesitata are unique in having a bifid
rather than triradiate osphradium, but all other morphological features confirm
that the species are not closely related. From this study it is apparent that there is
little variation in the morphology of the mantle complex between species of
endemic South African cypraeids.
Digestive system
The morphology of the digestive system of Cypraea has been studied by Rau
(1934), Risbec (1937), and Kay (1960b). Minor interspecific differences have
been noted in the elaboration of the salivary glands, stomach and buccal mass
(Risbec 1937) but their intraspecific variability has not been fully determined.
Therefore the systematic value of these characters remains open to question.
There is little variation in the gross morphology of the digestive system in the
species examined in this study, and the pattern agrees with that described by Rau
(1934, fig. 43) and Kay (1960b) with the exception that the salivary glands are
largely fused into a single mass.
Most of the variation in the digestive system has been focused on the
morphology of the radular teeth. Kay (1960a) described four basic radular types.
The majority of species are known to possess a ‘R1’ radula with dumb-bell shaped
internal bracts at the base of the rectangular rachidian tooth. Within this radular
‘type’ there seem to be several major variants. The presence or absence of basal
denticles on the rachidian and inner lateral teeth and the subtending bract at the
base of the rachidian appear to be species-specific. Kilburn & Aiken (1972) noted
that the radula of C. fultoni lacked a subtending bract and denticles and compared
its radula to that of C. rosselli (Wilson & McComb 1967). The same
morphological pattern is found in the radulae of all of the other South African
endemics examined in this study. No species studied had either subtending bracts
or basal denticles. The radular teeth of C. edentula and C. algoensis appear to be
significantly broader than those of any cypraeids with a ‘R1’ radula and differ
markedly from those of other South African species (Fig. 33). Kay (1960a) stated
that in Cypraea the radular teeth generally possess a single denticle on either side
of the central cusp. Kilburn & Aiken (1972) noted that in the specimen of
C. fultoni that they examined, there is a smaller secondary denticle on the outer side
of the primary cusp and questioned whether this is characteristic of the species.
Secondary denticles have also been described in several other species (Vayssiére
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE LL
1923, 1927; Risbec 1934). In the single specimen of C. iutsui examined in this
study, secondary denticles are present on the rachidian tooth although they were
not indicated by Barnard (1963, fig. 5C, as C. fuscorubra ‘globose form’).
Secondary denticles on the rachidian teeth and on the inner side of the inner
laterals are characteristic of all specimens of C. coronata examined in this study
(Fig. 13B).
A great deal more information is required to determine the range of
variability within and between species of Cypraea to ascertain the systematic
significance of the observed radular differences.
Central nervous system
The central nervous system in the Cypraeidae is highly modified from that of
less specialized mesogastropods such as Littorina (Fretter & Graham 1962). The
lateral nerve cords do not cross each other and are largely euthyneurous. A short
zygoneurous connective links the left pleural and supraintestinal ganglia. There
does not appear to be a zygoneurous connection between the right pleural
ganglion and the subintestinal ganglion, although a thin connective was indicated
by Riese (1931).
Shaw (1909) differentiated Trivia from Cypraea on the basis of the shape of
the pedal ganglia: elongate in Cypraea and spherical in Trivia. This has served as
a major criterion for separating the Cypraeacea from the Lamellariacea (Schilder
1936). Since Shaw’s (1909) work all three subsequent studies of the nervous
system of the Cypraeidae (Riese 1931; Risbec 1937; Kay 1957b) have confirmed
the presence of elongate pedal ganglia within the family. Specimens of
C. fuscorubra, C. fuscodentata, C. coronata, C. algoensis, C. edentula and
C. capensis examined in this study had elongate pedal ganglia (Fig. 7). However,
the ganglia of C. iutsui and C. cruickshanki are spherical as described for the
Lamellariacea. In C. cruickshanki there are several elongate nerves emanating
from the posterior ends of the ganglia (Fig. 26), while in C. iutsui a single pair of
nerves extends anteriorly (Fig. 30).
Most authorities have stated that there is very little variability within the
nervous system in the Cypraeidae. In addition to the differences already noted in
the pedal ganglia, the length of the lateral nerve cord between the left pleural and
subintestinal ganglia varies considerably between species. Risbec (1937) demon-
strated that in species from New Caledonia this nerve cord is elongate in
C. arabica, C. lynx, C. tigris and C. carneola, and short in C. clandestina,
C. moneta, C. annulus and C. erosa. In C. staphylea the subintestinal ganglion is
immediately adjacent to the left pleural ganglion. In all of the South African
cowries examined in this study the lateral cord is elongate, with the exception of
C. iutsui, in which the pleural and subintestinal are adjacent as in C. staphylea.
Risbec (1937) also noted that a variable number of accessory ganglia are
present along the lateral nerve cords in the various Cypraea species he studied.
Some species, such as C. clandestina, have only a single accessory ganglion.
Cypraea erosa, C. moneta, C. errones and C. annulus possess two ganglia;
161 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
C. staphylea and C. carneola three, C. arabica four, and C. tigris seven. All the
South African species examined have only a single accessory ganglion present
between the supraintestinal and visceral ganglia, as in C. staphylea.
Reproductive system
Kay (1960a) described two basic forms of the female reproductive system of
the Cypraeidae: in the first instance a bursa copulatrix is present and also a
glandular receptaculum seminis, which is granular in texture; in the second form a
bursa is absent but a saccate receptaculum is present. Kay (1963) described
interspecific morphological variability in the shape of the bursa copulatrix.
Kilburn & Aiken (1972) stated that in the reproductive system of C. capensis a
bursa is present and the receptaculum is apparently glandular. All of the six
species of South African Cypraeidae in which the female reproductive system was
examined in this study, possess a bursa copulatrix and a saccate, diverticulate
receptaculum seminis. In each instance the bursa is simply saccate as described
from C. argus (Kay 1963, fig. 6a). The receptaculum, although saccate, appears to
have a glandular epithelium, but this needs to be verified by means of histological
examination. The fact that all South African endemic species thus far examined
(with the possible exception of C. capensis, which needs to be re-examined)
possess both a saccate receptaculum and a bursa further suggests that the
structure of the female reproductive system is likely to be systematically
significant.
Little variation has been described in the male system of the Cypraeidae.
There appear to be only minor differences in the shape of the penis (Kay 1960a).
All of the South African species examined possess a simple conical penis with a
ventral sperm groove extending to its tip as described by Kay (1960b). The
prostate in Cypraea has been described as an elongate, club-shaped or rectangular
structure (Kay 1960a). Wilson & McComb (1967) described some variation in the
shape and size of the prostate. In the South African Cypraeidae there are two
types of prostate glands. In C. fuscodentata, C. fuscorubra and C. coronata a
distinct prostate is absent and the walls of the sperm groove are lined with
glandular cells (Fig. 8B). In C. edentula and C. algoensis a discrete prostatic
region is situated at the ental end of the sperm groove (Figs 11B, 23).
SYSTEMATICS OF ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE
The taxonomy of the endemic Cypraeidae of southern Africa has historically
been a source of considerable confusion, and this situation persists. The precise
number of constituent taxa cannot be accurately determined at present. Until
now the majority of species have been known only from beach-worn shells. While
many questions remain unanswered, the information presented in this study does
permit some of the systematic controversy to be resolved.
The endemic Cypraeidae of South Africa consist of several major com-
ponents. Cypraea citrina Gray, 1825, is found from the coast of Mozambique
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE 113
to Jeffreys Bay in the eastern Cape Province. It appears to be closely allied to the
widespread Indo-Pacific species C. helvola and C. marginalis, although nothing is
known about its internal morphology. Cypraea lisetae Kilburn, 1975,* is
conchologically most similar to C. midwayensis, which was designated as the type
species of Nesiocypraea Azuma & Kurohara, 1967, because of the unique shape
of the rachidian teeth. Unfortunately the radula of C. lisetae remains unknown.
Cypraea fultoni Sowerby, 1903, has been placed in Bernaya and appears to be
allied to several species that are restricted to south-western Australia (Schilder
1936).
The remaining endemic species have been placed in the genera Luponia and
Cypraeovula (Schilder 1936), which appear to be restricted to southern Africa but
may be allied to the south-western Australian endemics. Within these taxa there
appear to be three species complexes, which can be recognized conchologically
and by their internal morphology. The first group consists of Cypraea cruick-
shanki Kilburn, 1972, and C. iutsui (Shikama, 1974). The status of these species
has been the subject of much debate. When Kilburn described C. cruickshanki he
also included photographs and a discussion of several specimens that Barnard
(1963) had previously considered as a globose form of C. fuscorubra Shaw.
Kilburn contended that this form appeared to be distinct from C. fuscorubra and
was similar to C. cruickshanki, but insufficient material prevented a detailed
comparison. Shikama (1974) described Cypraeovula iutsui based on a single
specimen collected from southern Africa. Burgess (1977) suggested that Cypraea
ijutsui is merely the fully mature stage of C. cruickshanki. Kilburn & Rippey
(1982) recently stated that C. iutsui is either a cold-water form of C. cruickshanki
or a deep-water form of C. fuscorubra. Examination of preserved animals and
shells in this study confirms that C. iutsui is distinct from both C. cruickshanki and
C. fuscorubra. The conchological features distinguishing C. iutsui (as
C. fuscorubra globose form) from C. cruickshanki described by Kilburn (1972:
214, table II) are consistent with material examined in this study. The most
obvious difference between the two is the prominent versus fine labral teeth of
C. cruickshanki, which traverse most of the width of the labrum. The fossula of
C. cruickshanki is prominent with 4—6 denticles while in C. iutsui it is poorly
developed with no or, more rarely, three denticles. In C. iutsui the posterior limit
of the labrum extends beyond the body whorl while in C. cruickshanki they are
approximately the same length. In C. cruickshanki the anterior and posterior
columellar teeth extend on to the columella while in C. iutsui they do not.
The internal differences between the two species are even more profound.
The rachidian teeth of C. cruickshanki have a narrow raised portion while in
C. iutsui this area is much wider (Figs 29, 33). Cypraea iutsui has small accessory
denticles on the outer side of the rachidian tooth, which are absent in
C. cruickshanki. The most significant morphological differences are present in the
central nervous system. In C. iutsui the subintestinal ganglion is immediately
= Sce note on p. 122.
114 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
adjacent to the left pleural ganglion while in C. cruickshanki they are separated
by a moderately long nerve cord. The nerves emanating from the pedal ganglia
are anteriorly directed in C. iutsui and posteriorly directed in C. cruickshanki.
The two species appear to be entirely geographically isolated, as well.
Burgess (1977) suggested that C. cruickshanki should probably be placed in a
separate genus based on its conchological uniqueness. The fact that C. cruick-
shanki and C. iutsui are the only cypraeids known to possess spherical pedal
ganglia adds credence to this idea. However, more information concerning the
range of variability of this character within the Cypraeidae is required to establish
generic or subgeneric limits.
The second major group of endemic cypraeids includes Cypraea algoensis
Gray, 1825, and C. edentula Gray, 1825. Conchologically these two species are
pyriform to globular. In both cases the margin of the shell is ornamented with
dark purple or brown spots. These taxa share certain internal features that are
absent from other South African cypraeids. The radular teeth are significantly
broader than in other species and a discrete prostate gland is present. These
characteristics may justify the placement of these taxa within the distinct
subgenus Luponia Broderip, 1837. Cypraea edentula and C. algoensis can be
distinguished by several conchological and morphological features. Cypraea
edentula generally lacks labral or columellar teeth, but rudiments may occasion-
ally appear on the labrum. Cypraea algoensis possesses fine but well-developed
teeth on the labrum and columella. In C. edentula the fossula is well developed
and strongly denticulate while it is poorly developed with occasional denticles in
C. algoensis. There appear to be slight but consistent radular differences between
the two species. The central and adjacent cusps of the rachidian teeth are rounded
in C. edentula and elongate in C. algoensis. There do not appear to be any
significant differences in the nervous and reproductive systems. The two species
are geographically isolated; C. edentula is known from Tsitsikama Coastal
National Park to the south-western Transkei, while C. algoensis has been found
from the Atlantic coast of the Cape Peninsula to Cape Agulhas.
The largest number of endemics are contained within the third group. The
constituent species of this group have been the subject of considerable systematic
confusion and disagreement. Unfortunately the morphology of several of these
taxa remains largely unknown. All authorities who have studied the South
African Cypraeidae agree that Cypraea fuscodentata Gray, 1825, C. fuscorubra
Shaw, 1909, and C. capensis Gray, 1828, represent distinct valid species. Beyond
this, there is little agreement about the systematics of the remaining taxa.
Much of the controversy surrounding this group relates to a pair of species
that have been confused, synonymized, or renamed owing to homonymy. A
detailed historical account of the problems is provided by Burgess (1982). Briefly,
Cypraea similis Gray, 1831, was found to be a junior homonym of C. similis
Gmelin, 1791 (=C. erosa Linnaeus, 1758). Later, Cypraea castanea Higgins,
1868, was discovered to be a junior homonym of C. castanea Roding, 1798. Shaw
(1909) noted this problem and considered Gray’s and Higgins’ species as
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE IES
subjective synonyms. He provided C. fuscorubra as a new name for Cypraea
similis Gray and designated Gray’s specimen as the holotype of C. fuscorubra.
Burgess (1970) recognized that there were conchological differences dis-
tinguishing Gray’s and Higgins’ material but erroneously provided a new name
for Gray’s rather than Higgins’ material. Thus C. gondwanalandensis became a
junior objective synonym of C. fuscorubra Shaw (Kilburn 1972). This error was
corrected by Burgess (1982): he named C. verhoefi based on Higgins’ holotype of
C. castanea. Kilburn & Rippey (1982) considered C. verhoefi (as C. castanea) as a
junior subjective synonym of C. fuscorubra despite the significant conchological
differences discussed by Burgess (1970, 1982). No preserved animals of
C. verhoefi have been examined, nor are any presently available. A definitive
statement concerning the taxonomic status cannot be made until the morphology
of C. verhoefi is known, but the consistent conchological differences between
them strongly suggest that Burgess is correct in maintaining their separation.
Cypraea coronata (Schilder, 1930), which is normally characterized by having
tubercles around the outer margin of the shell, has not been reported in the
literature since its original description. Kilburn & Rippey (1982: 62) considered it
as an ‘interesting form of C. fuscodentata’. There are several conchological
characters separating C. fuscodentata and C. coronata. The presence of tubercles
and the slightly irregular outline of C. coronata most clearly distinguish it from
C. fuscodentata. The columellar teeth of C. fuscodentata are dark brown and the
majority cover most of the width of the columella. In C. coronata the teeth are
white or light brown and normally only the anteriormost and posteriormost teeth
extend beyond the aperture on to the columella. The form of the radular teeth
also clearly differentiates the two. Cypraea coronata has accessory denticles on the
outer edges of the rachidian and inner lateral teeth, which are absent in C. fusco-
dentata. These differences in conchology, internal morphology and appearance of
the living animal (Fig. 1) distinguish C. coronata as a distinct species.
Cypraea gloriosa (Shikama, 1971) was originally thought to have been
collected from the South China Sea. Burgess (1977) and Kilburn & Rippey (1982)
have pointed out that it is likely that it was collected off South Africa and consider
it synonymous with previously described South African species. However,
Burgess considered C. gloriosa as a junior synonym of C. fuscodentata while
Kilburn & Rippey regarded it as a junior synonym of C. fuscorubra. The strong
dentition of the columellar teeth extending on to the columella is more similar to
that found in C. fuscodentata. However, the mottled coloration and large
tubercles on the margins of the shell indicate that it should be regarded as a junior
synonym of C. coronata.
The existence of two other taxa has recently been explained as the product of
hybridization of well-defined species (Kilburn & Rippey 1982). Cypraea cohenae
Burgess, 1965, is conchologically intermediate between C. edentula and
C. fuscodentata while C. amphitales Melvill, 1888, is similar to C. capensis and
C. fuscodentata. While the conchological intermediacy of these taxa could
possibly be explained by hybridization there are no internal morphological or
116 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
biological data to support this claim. Detailed observation and examination of
living and preserved specimens are required before definitive conclusions can be
drawn. The fact that shells of C. cohenae are rare and are known only from a very
limited geographical area (Jeffreys Bay) does not preclude that they may be
relatively common and widespread in the sublittoral. Shells of several cypraeids
are rarely found on the beaches of the Cape Peninsula but are fairly commonly
found in the shallow sublittoral. If indeed C. edentula does interbreed with
C. capensis and C. fuscodentata it would certainly reduce the systematic
importance of the radular and prostatic differences between representatives of
these species groups.
HIGHER SYSTEMATICS AND PHYLOGENY OF THE
CYPRAEACEA AND LAMELLARIACEA
The higher systematics of the Cypraeacea and Lamellariacea within the
Mesogastropoda has been the subject of considerable disagreement and
confusion. In some cases even the same author has produced several conflicting
schemes of classification (Schilder 1936, 1966, 1969).
Much of the argument concerning the classification of these two superfami-
lies relates directly to the position of the Triviidae (including Eratoinae).
Conchologically most triviids appear to be closely allied to the Cypraeidae and
Ovulidae and have traditionally been classified with them (Shaw 1909). The
discovery of the fact that the Triviidae and Lamellariidae possess a double-
shelled larva called an echinospira led Schilder (1936) to suggest that the Triviidae
are more closely allied to the Lamellariidae than to the Cypraeidae and Ovulidae.
The observation that an echinospira larva is also present in Capulus ungaricus
(Lebour 1937) further complicated the problem, as the capulids have been
considered to be closely allied to the Calyptraeidae and Trichotropidae. On the
bases of conchological and larval features Fretter & Graham (1962) stated that
the Cypraeacea, Lamellariacea and Calyptracea are all closely allied, and
maintained the placement of the Triviidae in the Lamellariacea. More recently,
Schilder (1966) altered his opinion and suggested that the Triviidae are more
closely related to the Cypraeacea, as did Kay (19605). Speculation with regard to
these mesogastropods has significantly exceeded the collection and careful
analysis of data. In some cases the examination of one or two species has been
employed to characterize an entire family. This has led to erroneous assumptions
about morphological variability and its systematic significance. For example, it
has been assumed since the work of Shaw (1909) that the Triviidae and
Cypraeidae can be separated by the shape of the pedal ganglia. This is shown here
to be incorrect as both configurations have been found in the South African
Cypraeidae. The degree of morphological variability observed in the Cypraeidae
in the present study and previously in the Triviidae (Gosliner & Liltved 1982)
attests to the need for the accumulation of more detailed morphological data.
Another major problem in determining phylogeny is the establishment of the
direction of evolutionary change. Kay (1960b) described differences of opinion as
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE IH
to whether the elongate pedal ganglia found in most Cypraeidae are primitive or
advanced features. None of the arguments put forth as to the ancestral state of the
ganglia consider that more primitive mesogastropods such as Viviparus possess
elongate pedal ganglia, and all ignore the fact that cephalization, or the
concentration of nervous tissue into the cephalic region, is one of the most
widespread evolutionary trends in the animal kingdom.
Consideration of the distribution of characters within other taxa and their
functional significance generally permits one to make a reasonable estimate of the
polarity of most characters. The trend to modify an open ciliated sperm groove to
a closed tubular vas deferens is widespread throughout the Gastropoda (Kay
196065). Ghiselin (1966) described the functional adaptive significance of this
modification in opisthobranchs, while Morton (1955) and Fretter & Graham
(1962) have demonstrated the same trend in pulmonates and neogastropods.
Gosliner (1981) indicated that the most primitive living mesogastropods are
probably littorinaceans and that they possess a sperm groove.
Ghiselin (1966) stated that the most primitive opisthobranchs probably had
an ental receptaculum seminis and an ectal bursa copulatrix. This also appears to
be the ancestral (plesiomorphic) state of the Pulmonata, Mesogastropoda
(Gosliner 1981; Ghiselin & Wilson 1966) and Neogastropoda (Fretter & Graham
1962).
The larval stage of the vast majority of gastropods is a simple veliger. The
presence of an echinospira larva in the Triviidae, Lamellariidae and Capulidae
most likely represents a secondary modification of the veliger to facilitate
flotation in taxa with a prolonged larval life (Fretter & Graham 1962). The
question that remains is whether the presence of an echinospira in the Capulidae
represents an independent acquisition of this larval type or implies phyletic
proximity to the lamellariids and triviids. Adequate morphological information is
not presently available to compare the Capulidae with the other taxa.
The osphradium is the primary chemosensory organ in the majority of
prosobranch gastropods. In most mesogastropods it is a simple linear structure,
but in the Triviidae, Lamellariidae, Naticidae and Neogastropoda it is foliate and
bipectinate. This is usually correlated with the development of the siphon and
increased predatory capabilities. In the Cypraeidae and Ovulidae, which also
possess a siphon, the osphradium is well developed, but is triangular in shape
(except where it is secondarily modified in Cypraea hesitata and C. testudinaria
(Kay 1963)). Both the bipectinate and triangular osphradia of these taxa appear
to be derived (apomorphic) from a simple linear ridge.
The most primitive mesogastropods such as Littorina are generalized grazing
omnivores. Many members of the Cypraeidae appear to adopt this mode of
feeding (Kay 1960b) but others are specialized carnivores (Hayes 1983). The
majority of ovulids are specialized predators on alcyonaceans, except for
Pedicularia, which feeds exclusively on stylasterine hydrozoan corals. The
Triviidae and Lamellariidae feed upon, and lay their eggs within, tunicate
colonies (Fretter & Graham 1962).
118 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
The determination of phylogenetic relationships of taxa may only be based
upon shared derived characters (synapomorphies) (Hennig 1966). A comparison
of the apomorphies present in the Triviidae, Lamellariidae, Ovulidae and
Cypraeidae yields a clear picture of dichotomy between the Cypraeacea and
Lamellariacea (Table 1, Fig. 35). The possession of a closed sperm groove,
echinospira larva and large bipectinate osphradium unite the Triviidae and
Lamellariidae. The morphological synapomorphies shared by the Lamellariidae
and Triviidae are largely independent of their ecological association with
compound tunicates, reducing the possibility that these similarities are due to
parallelism. A triangular osphradium appears to be a uniquely derived character
uniting the Ovulidae and Cypraeidae. The feeding specializations of the Ovulidae
and associated radular modifications distinguish them from the Cypraeidae. The
fused jaws of the Lamellariidae appear to be a modification of the distinct jaws of
the Triviidae. Based on the above apomorphic characteristics placement of the
Triviidae with the Lamellariidae seems to be the more compatible phylogenetic
hypothesis.
TABLE 1
Morphology of the Cypraeacea and Lamellariacea.
Character Triviidae Lamellariidae Ovulidae Cypraeidae
1. vas deferens d—closed d—closed a—open a—open
2. bursa copulatrix d—absent d—absent a/d—present a/d—present
or absent or absent
3. larva d—echinospira d—echinospira a—veliger a—veliger
4. osphradium a—bipectinate a—bipectinate d—triradiate d—triradiate
5. jaws a—separate d—united a—separate a—separate
6. lateral radular a—undivided a—undivided d—serrate a—undivided
teeth
a—ancestral; d—derived
The status of Pedicularia has also been a controversial aspect of the
systematics of the Lamellariacea and Cypraeacea. Schilder (1936) considered the
Pedicularinae as a subfamily of the Ovulidae (as Amphiperatidae) but later
(1966) considered them as a distinct family in the Triviacea. The internal
morphology of Pedicularia is largely unknown, with the exception of the radula.
Schilder’s (1966: 31) transfer of Pedicularia from the Ovulidae to the Triviacea
appears to be largely based on the fact that its placement was altered in
Zoological Record. Subsequent authors have merely followed Schilder’s place-
ment of Pedicularia in the Triviacea.
The fact that Pedicularia possesses a trifid osphradium suggests that it is
allied to the Cypraeacea. It has none of the derived features uniting the
Lamellariacea, although the larval stage remains unknown. The accessory
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE 119
CYPRAEACEA LAMELLARIACEA
Ovulidae Triviidae Lamellariidae
Yo
Fig. 35. Phylogeny of the Cypraeacea and Lamellariacea.
(Numbers refer to characters listed in Table 1.)
prostate described here for Pedicularia has not been previously observed in any
other prosobranch. It may serve as a unique modification separating the
Pediculariidae from the Ovulidae. However, no morphological information is
available on other Pedicularia species and Cyphoma is the only ovulid for which
details of the morphology are known (Ghiselin & Wilson 1966). Until the
morphological variability of these taxa is more completely understood we prefer
to retain Pedicularia in the Ovulidae.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Michelle van der Merwe and Sally Dove of the South African Museum
assisted us with the production of black-and-white photographs. Colin Buxton of
the Port Elizabeth Museum, Barrie Rose, Robert Leslie, Mike Hart and Arie
Jooste aided our work by providing additional material of some species. Barry
Wilson, of the National Museum of Victoria, Australia, Alison Kay of the
University of Hawaii, and Joe Houbrick of the Smithsonian Institution provided
many useful comments and suggestions. To these friends and colleagues we
extend our sincere appreciation.
120 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
REFERENCES
ALLAN, J. 1956. Cowry shells of the world. Melbourne: Georgian House.
Anonymous. 1981. A unique family portrait. Hawaii. Shell News 29 (3): 1.
Azuma, M. & KurRoHARA, K. 1967. A new cowry collected from off Midway Island. Venus 26:
1-4.
BARNARD, K. 1963. Contributions to the knowledge of South African marine Mollusca. Part III.
Gastropoda: Prosobranchiata: Taenioglossa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 47: 1-199.
Broperip, W. 1837. In: Lone, G. The penny cyclopaedia of the Society for the Diffusion of
Useful Knowledge. 8. London: Knight.
Burcess, C. M. 1965. Two new Cypraea. Nautilus 79: 37-40.
BurceEss, C. M. 1970. The living cowries. New York: Barnes & Co.
Burcess, C. M. 1977. The ‘new’ cowries. Notes on more than a score of recently proposed
species. Hawaii. Shell News 25 (12): 1-8.
Burcess, C. M. 1982. A new name for Luponia castanea Higgins, 1868 (Gastropoda:
Cypraeidae). Venus 41: 64-66.
CaTE, C. 1979. A review of the Triviidae (Mollusca: Gastropoda). Mem. San Diego Soc. nat.
Hist. 10: 1-126.
CERNOHORSKY, W. 1965. Genera of living Cypraeidae. Cowry 1: 1-8.
Derry, C. 1981. Treasures from Somalia: Two new forms of Cypraea broderipi. Hawaii. Shell
News 29 (11): 7.
FRETTER, V. & GRAHAM, A. 1962. British prosobranch molluscs. London: Ray Society.
GHISELIN, M. 1966. Reproductive function and the phylogeny of opisthobranch gastropods.
Malacologia 3: 327-378.
GHISELIN, M. & WiLson, B. 1966. On the anatomy, natural history and reproduction of
Cyphoma, a marine prosobranch gastropod. Bull. mar. Sci. 16: 132-141.
GMELIN, J. 1791. Systema naturae per regna tria naturae Editio decima tertia aucta, reformata. 1
(6). Leipzig.
GosLINER, T. 1981. Origins and relationships of primitive members of the Opisthobranchia
(Mollusca: Gastropoda). Biol. J. Linn. Soc. 16: 197-225.
GosLINER, T. & LitTtveD, W. 1982. Comparative morphology of three South African Triviidae
(Gastropoda: Prosobranchia) with the description of a new species. Zool. J. Linn. Soc. 74:
111-132.
Gray, J. 1825. Monograph on the family Cypraeidae, a family of testaceous Mollusca. Zool. J.
London 1: 459-518.
Gray, J. 1828. Monograph on the family Cypraeidae, a family of testaceous Mollusca. Zool. J.
London 3: 567-576.
Gray, J. 1831. The zoological miscellany. London: Gray.
GRIFFITHS, R. 1962. A review of the Cypraeidae genus Notocypraea. Mem. nat. Mus. Victoria
25: 211231.
Hayes, T. 1983. The influence of diet on local distributions of Cypraea. Pacif. Sci. 37: 27-36.
HENNIG, W. 1966. Phylogenetic systematics. Urbana: University of Illinois Press.
Hicains, E. 1868. Description of six new species of shells. Proc. malac. Soc. London 1868:
178-180.
Kay, E. A. 1957a. New concepts of molluscan systematics illustrated by a study of Cypraea
caputserpentis Linn. Proc. Hawaiian Acad. Sci. 1956-1957: 1.
Kay, E. A. 1957b. The genus Cypraea. Nature 180: 1436-1437.
Kay, E. A. 1960a. Generic revision of the Cypraeidae. Proc. malac. Soc. London 33: 278-287.
Kay, E. A. 1960b. The functional morphology of Cypraea caputserpentis Linn. and an
interpretation of the relationships among the Cypraeacea. Int. Rev. ges. Hydrobiol. 45:
175-196.
Kay, E. A. 1961. On Cypraea tigris schilderana Cate. Veliger 4: 36—40.
Kay, E. A. 1963. Anatomical notes on Cypraea aurantium Gmelin and other cowries and an
examination of the subgenus Lyncina Troschel. J. malac. Soc. Australia 7: 46-61.
Kay, E. A. 1981. The classification and distribution of the cowries: some new directions. Bull.
Amer. Malac. Union 1981: 30.
Ki_Burn, R. 1972. A new cowry from deep water off Natal, with notes on allied species. Durban
Mus. Novit. 9: 209-216.
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE 121
KitBpurN, R. 1975. A new species of cowry (Mollusca: Cypraeidae: Cypraea, subgenus
Nesiocypraea) from southern Mogambique. Durban Mus. Novit. 10: 217-220.
Kitpurn, R. & AIKEN, D. 1972. Notes on two endemic South African Cypraea. Veliger 12:
125-126.
KiLBurNn, R. & Rippey, E. 1982. Sea shells of southern Africa. Johannesburg: Macmillan.
Legsour, M. 1937. The eggs and larvae of British prosobranchs with special reference to those
living in the plankton. J. mar. biol. Ass. U.K. 22: 105-166.
LittveD, W. 1983. A new Cypraea from South Africa (Gastropoda: Cypraeidae). Venus 42:
234-240.
MELVILL, J. 1888. A survey of the genus Cypraea (Linn.), its nomenclature, geographical
distribution and distinctive affinities, with descriptions of two new species and several
varieties. Mem. Proc. Manchester Lit. Phil. Soc. (4) 1: 184-252.
Morton, J. 1955. The evolution of the Ellobiidae with a discussion on the origin of the
Pulmonata. Proc. Zool. Soc. London 125: 127-168.
Newcome, W. 1864. Description of a new species of Pedicularia. Proc. Calif. Acad. Nat. Sci. 3:
121-122.
OSTERGAARD, J. 1950. Spawning and development of some Hawaiian marine gastropods. Pacif.
Sei. 4: 75-115.
Rau, A. 1934. Anatomisch-histologische Untersuchungen an Cypraeen. Jena Zschr. Naturw. 69:
361-486.
Riese, K. 1931. Phylogenetische Betrachtungen tiber das Nervensystem von Cypraea moneta auf
Grund seiner Morphologie und Histologie. Jena Zschr. Naturw. 65: 361-486.
RisBeEc, J. 1937. Anatomie des Cypraeidae. Archiv. Mus. Paris 14: 75-104.
RO6pING, P. 1798. Museum Boltemianum, pars secunda continens conchylia. Hamburg.
SCHILDER, F. 1930. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Cypraeacea (Moll. Gast.). Zool. Anz. Leipzig. 87:
109-118.
SCHILDER, F. 1936. Anatomical characters of the Cypraeacea which confirm the conchological
classification. Proc. malac. Soc. London 22: 75-112.
SCHILDER, F. 1966. The higher taxa of cowries and their allies. Veliger 9: 31-35.
SCHILDER, F. 1969. The generic classification of cowries. Veliger 10: 264-273.
SCHILDER, F. & SCHILDER, M. 1929. Eine Ausbeute von Cypraeacea aus Port Alfred. Annin
naturh. Mus. Wien 43: 229-241.
SHAw, H. 1909. Notes on the genera Cypraea and Trivia. Proc. malac. Soc. London 8: 288-313.
SHIKAMA, T. 1971. On a new cowry from South China Sea. Sci. Rep. Yokosuka City Mus. 18:
101-103.
SHIKAMA, T. 1974. On two new allied cowry and cowry shells from South African Sea. Science
Rep. Yokohama natn. Univ. (2) 21: 24-26.
SoweErBy, G. 1832. The conchological illustrations. London: Sowerby.
STEADMAN, W. & Corron, B. 1946. A key to classification of the cowries (Cypraeidae). Rec.
Sth. Aust. Mus. 8: 503-530.
VAYSSIERE, A. 1923. Recherches zoologiques et anatomiques sur les mollusques de la famille des
Cypraeides. 1. Annls Mus. Hist. nat. Marseille 18: 1-120.
VAYSSIERE, A. 1927. Recherches zoologiques et anatomiques sur les mollusques de la famille des
Cypraeides. 2. Annls Mus. Hist. nat. Marseille 21: 133-184.
Wuatmokrg, L. 1981. Divers join hunt for elusive cowry. Hawaii. Shell News 29 (11): 7.
WILson, B. & McComs, J. 1967. The genus Cypraea (subgenus Zoila Jousseaume). Indo-Pacific
Mollusca 1: 457-484.
ABBREVIATIONS
a ampulla dd digestive diverticulum
al albumen gland dg digestive gland
an anus e eye
be bursa copulatrix eg oesophageal gland
bm buccal mass f foot
c cerebral ganglion h heart
ct ctenidium hg hypobranchial gland
122
pe
pl
NOTE
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
intestine
jaw
kidney
mantle
membrane gland
mucous gland
oviduct
oesophagus
osphradium
ovary
penis
pedal ganglion
pleural ganglion
pr
fa
Ts
prostate
radula
receptaculum seminis
siphon
subintestinal ganglion
sperm groove
supraintestinal ganglion
stomach
testis
tentacle
visceral ganglion
female aperture
While this paper was in press Burgess (1985) was published, in which Cypraea lisetae Kilburn,
1975, was synonymized with Pustularia maricola Cate, 1976. The range of C. lisetae is thus
extended to the Philippines and Solomon Islands, so that it can no longer be regarded as endemic
to southern Africa.
References:
Burcess, C. M. 1985. Cowries of the world. Cape Town: Seacomber Publications.
Cate, C. N. 1976. Three new cypraeacean species (Mollusca: Gastropoda). Veliger 18: 383-384.
&
=|
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the International code of zoological nomenclature (particu-
larly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be followed
by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb. nov., syn. nov.,
etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening punctuation
and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s name and year. The
author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a species or subspecies is trans-
ferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of a scientific name must be separated
from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published scientific
names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological order, with all
references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of plates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers.
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby the year is
placed in front. of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other specimens
mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material not regarded
as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number, depository, descrip-
tion of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-—A13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach, Port Eliza-
beth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
e.g. . the Figure depicting C. namacolus ...’: *. . . in C. namacolus (Fig. 10) .
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not ae by
initials or full names
e.g. DuToit but A.L. du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should preferably be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a book or
article, such as
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation to initial
capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively. The generic name should
not be abbreviated at the beginning of a sentence or paragraph.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title; it should be included in the abstract,
counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of Biological Abstracts.
TERRENCE M. GOSLINER
&
WILLIAM R. LILTVED
ASPECTS OF THE MORPHOLOGY OF THE
ENDEMIC SOUTH AFRICAN CYPRAEIDAE
WITH A DISCUSSION OF THE EVOLUTION OF
THE CYPRAEACEA AND LAMELLARIACEA
9 a | 96 PART 5 DECEMBER 1985 ISSN 0303-2515
ANNALS
(OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN
MUSEUM
INSTRUCTIONS TO AUTHORS
1. MATERIAL should be original and not published elsewhere, in whole or in part.
2. LAYOUT should be as follows:
(a) Centred masthead to consist of
Title: informative but concise, without abbreviations and not including the names of new genera or species
Author’s(s’) name(s)
Address(es) of author(s) (institution where work was carried out)
Number of illustrations (figures, enumerated maps and tables, in this order)
(b) Abstract of not more than 200 words, intelligible to the reader without reference to the text
(c) Table of contents giving hierarchy of headings and subheadings
(d) Introduction
(e) Subject-matter of the paper, divided into sections to correspond with those given in table of contents
(f) Summary, if paper is lengthy
(g) Acknowledgements
(h) References
(i) Abbreviations, where these are numerous.
3. MANUSCRIPT, to be submitted in triplicate, should be typewritten and neat, double spaced with
3 cm margins all round. First lines of paragraphs should be indented. Tables and a list of captions for
illustrations should be typed separately, their positions indicated in the text. All pages should be num-
bered consecutively.
Major headings of the paper are centred capitals; first subheadings are shouldered small capitals;
second subheadings are shouldered italics; third subheadings are indented, shouldered italics. Further
subdivisions should be avoided, as also enumeration (never roman numerals) of headings and
abbreviations.
Footnotes should be avoided unless they are short and essential.
Only generic and specific names should be underlined to indicate italics; all other marking up
should be left to editor and publisher.
4. ILLUSTRATIONS should be reducible to a size not exceeding 12 x 18 cm (19 cm including
caption); the reduction or enlargement required should be indicated (and preferably uniform); orig-
inals larger than 35 x 47 cm should not be submitted; photographs should be rectangular in shape and
final size. A metric scale should appear with all illustrations, otherwise magnification or reduction
should be given in the caption; if the latter, then the final reduction or enlargement should be taken
into consideration.
All illustrations, whether line drawings or photographs, should be termed figures (plates are not
printed; half-tones will appear in their proper place in the text) and numbered in a single series. Items
of composite figures should be designated by capital letters; lettering of figures is not set in type and
should be in lower-case letters. If Letraset is used authors are requested to use Helvetica-style letter-
ing, if possible.
The number of the figure should be lightly marked in pencil on the back of each illustration.
5. REFERENCES cited in text and synonymies should all be included in the list at the end of the
paper, using the Harvard System (ibid., idem, loc. cit., op. cit. are not acceptable):
(a) Author’s name and year of publication given in text, e.g.:
‘Smith (1969) describes... .”
‘Smith (1969: 36, fig. 16) describes .. .’
‘As described (Smith 1969a, 1969b; Jones 1971)’
‘As described (Haughton & Broom 1927)...’
‘As described (Haughton et al. 1927)...’
Note: no comma separating name and year
pagination indicated by colon, not p.
names of joint authors connected by ampersand
et al. in text for more than two joint authors, but names of all authors given in list of references.
(b) Full references at the end of the paper, arranged alphabetically by names, chronologically within
each name, with suffixes a, b, etc., to the year for more than one paper by the same author in
that year, e.g. Smith (1969a, 1969b) and not Smith (1969, 1969a).
For books give title in italics, edition, volume number, place of publication, publisher.
For journal article give title of article, title of journal in italics (according to the World list of scientific periodicals. 4th ed.
London: Butterworths, 1963), series in parentheses, volume number, part number in parentheses, pagination (first and
last pages of article).
Examples (note capitalization and punctuation)
BuLLouGu, W. S. 1960. Practical invertebrate anatomy. 2nd ed. London: Macmillan.
FiscHER, P. H. 1948. Données sur la résistance et de la vitalité des mollusques. Journal de conchyliologie 88 (3): 100-140.
FiscHER, P. H., DuvAL, M. & Rarry, A. 1933. Etudes sur les échanges respiratoires des littorines. Archives de zoologie
expérimentale et générale 74 (33): 627-634.
Koun, A. J. 1960a. Ecological notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in the Trincomalee region of Ceylon. Annals and
Magazine of Natural History (13) 2 (17): 309-320.
Koun, A. J. 19606. Spawning behaviour, egg masses and larval development in Conus from the Indian Ocean. Bulletin of
the Bingham Oceanographic Collection, Yale University 17 (4): 1-51.
THIELE, J. 1910. Mollusca. B. Polyplacophora, Gastropoda marina, Bivalvia. In: ScHULTzE, L. Zoologische und anthro-
pologische Ergebnisse einer Forschungsreise im westlichen und zentralen Stid-Afrika ausgeftihrt in den Jahren
1903-1905 4 (15). Denkschriften der medizinisch-naturwissenschaftlichen Gesellschaft zu Jena 16: 269-270.
(continued inside back cover)
) Glen wel
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
Volume 96 Band
December 1985 Desember
Part 5 Deel
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN,
AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA
FROM SOUTH-EAST AFRICA
By
R. V. DINGLE
Cape Town Kaapstad
The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are issued in parts at irregular intervals as material
becomes available
Obtainable from the South African Museum, P.O. Box 61, Cape Town 8000
Die ANNALE VAN DIE SUID-AFRIKAANSE MUSEUM
word uitgegee in dele op ongereelde tye na gelang van die
beskikbaarheid van stof
Verkrygbaar van die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum, Posbus 61, Kaapstad 8000
OUT OF PRINT/UIT DRUK
iL, DIS, SS), SCD, AS, 8, ep.) SS, 5, FD),
GGL, tal), WO), 8, DAD, 7), 100),
TV GED, SJ tot), IED), ICES), WO) oy, SGES) 9G), 28, 36, 2500
Copyright enquiries to the South African Museum
Kopieregnavrae aan die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum
ISBN 0 86813 077 X
Printed in South Africa by In Suid-Afrika gedruk deur
ihe WRusticasbressss btyamletcde Die Rustica-pers, Edms., Bpk.,
Court Road, Wynberg, Cape Courtweg, Wynberg, Kaap
\
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA
FROM SOUTH-EAST AFRICA
By
R. V. DINGLE
Marine Geoscience Unit, Department of Geology,
University of Cape Town
(With 53 figures and 18 tables)
[MS accepted 18 January 1985]
ABSTRACT
Fifty-five species, representing at least twenty genera, are recorded from the Turonian to
Santonian strata of Zululand (Mfolozi Valley—False Bay area and Richards Bay borehole),
offshore Natal (J(c)—1 borehole), Transkei (Umzamba), and Agulhas Bank. Three species are
new: Cytherelloidea mtubaensis, Cythereis mfoloziensis and Unicapella stragulata. Palaeo-
ecological analyses suggest that depositional environments at the three sites in Zululand all
commenced with shallow-water conditions that progressively deepened, but there is evidence of
local shallowing in the False Bay area in Upper Santonian times as a result of increased sediment
supply. A faunal boundary is recognized between southern outcrops (Umzamba) and Zululand
during the Santonian. This is speculated to have been temperature-controlled, and regional
considerations of palaeogeography and biogeography suggest that the major ostracod faunal
dichotomy across the Turonian—Coniacian boundary in south-east Africa was caused by the
influx of warm-water faunas from tropical stocks in the Brazil-Gabon area of the Atlantic. This
was initiated by the breakdown of the Walvis—Rio Grande barrier and establishment of a
clockwise ocean-current circulation pattern in the southern South Atlantic, which injected warm
water into existing north-east flowing currents off the coast of south-east Africa. By comparison
with Tanzanian faunas, the timing of this is dated between Lower Cenomanian and Middle
Turonian (i.e. between 99 and 89 m.y. ago), and probably coincided with the Lower Turonian
transgression recognized in Nigeria (c. 91 m.y.).
An ostracod zonation scheme comprising four zones is proposed for the Coniacian—
Santonian strata of south-east Africa.
CONTENTS
PAGE
MTEKOMMCHIO Memes mre pen ue earns a mcle ater cca aie euy ieee Weche 124
Samplineilocaliiticsyaere erase wale ed ens ee nares « 128
ZminlancrandyRichandssbay seer ese. ane ee 128
Whinizarnib ata mea A ee ee rele rilln ¢ shaleys ace mo Guede welant ae 13H
Outeniqua Basin (Acuilhas Bank)ho5...5.2---5..0-4-5- (33)
(©) Skboreholeyotishonre Natalie ssh. ee eee oan 133
ARC VIOUSIWORKar ees mnscda hth Sats S/he ek cen aud aes reed 133
IPI SHOMBEM ORAM MeL pers onetime Aaiin le sin teethy coseeeSeo ne eo maeey 136
123
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 96 (5), 1985: 123-239, 53 figs, 18 tables.
124 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
PAGE
Systemiatic descrip tiomsis. yyee chs ee ae eee 136
DISCUSSION 4 he cide acd tts se aoe ee ee eae eee 197
Biostratigraphy and palaeoecology ..................... 197
ANANSI Shy
WimZam Bare dei ae wine een Gas a Oe ee eee 210
Boreholed(Q=l ocean ee Aisi
Aguilas Bank, aaoch Grins bes sieahre Woe eee ee 213
Regional: consideravions:...4°5. 4.5 eee DAS
South-castAmica: ts. huw en coe ern eer ee ee eee ANS)
Ostracod.zomation. 62 ve cue an ee ee ee 214
Uimizamb ais sory hey eae, ah leet baa ae ee ee 214
Richards! Bay borchole Bio eee Zi 15)
ZMluland OQutChOPS cc vace aes ees acne Gee Ieee PhS)
J(@)=1 and Agulhas Bank. (V0). 5-2 40e ee 219
Climatic. control. « ba. saes Diech.s eer aoe 220
Recolonization of south-east Africa after the
mid=CretaceOus nilatuss. eee ee eee 227}
Greater Atncaand!Gondwanalandi)-- 40 eee ener 230
Acknowledgements: 5 cckct ee. dirsts sone a Na ee JE335)
Relerences). 4 Re a ee P1815)
INTRODUCTION
In south-east Africa there is a widespread hiatus between sediments of mid-
Cretaceous age, and overlying strata that were deposited during the Upper
Cretaceous transgression (Kennedy & Klinger 1971). Ammonite studies by
Kennedy & Klinger (1975) show that at outcrop in the Zululand—Natal region this
non-sequence spans uppermost Cenomanian IV to lowermost Coniacian I time,
although in north Zululand and offshore Natal, Upper Turonian strata have been
proved in oil-exploration boreholes (Du Toit & Leith 1974; McLachlan &
McMillan 1979). Preliminary studies showed that this important lithostratigraphic
break coincides with a first-order biostratigraphic dichotomy in the ostracod
faunas of south-east Africa, and that there is strong evidence for the event having
regional significance (Dingle 1982). What makes these phenomena of particular
interest is the probability that the faunal change can be related to plate-tectonic
events in the South Atlantic, and specifically, the breaching of the Walvis Ridge—
Rio Grande Rise archipelago as a faunal barrier between the Equatorial (Brazil—
West Africa) and southern Atlantic-south-west Indian ocean provinces. The
purpose of this contribution is twofold: to document the Turonian to Santonian
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA IDS
ostracods of south-east Africa; and to make regional faunal comparisons and
discuss their palaeogeographical implications.
Known outcrops of Coniacian and Santonian sediments in south-east Africa
are limited to the Zululand—Natal coastal plain, northern Transkei (Umzamba),
and the western Agulhas Bank (Fig. 1), although borehole and geophysical
evidence indicate that they occur extensively beneath younger cover on the
continental shelves around southern Africa (Dingle et al. 1983). We have
examined samples from all three areas, including material from borehole J(c)-1
offshore Natal, but only in Zululand are outcrops extensive and referable to all of
the Coniacian and Santonian ammonite stages recognized by Kennedy & Klinger
(1975). No Turonian outcrops have been reported from southern Africa, and
samples of this age were available only from the J(c)—1 borehole. A summary of
the spatial and temporal distribution of the ostracods recovered during this
project is shown in Table 1.
Upper Cretaceous
sediment basin
edge of continent
Agulhas Bank
Coniacian outcrops
FALSE BAY
et
‘RICHARDS BAY
J(c)-1 BOREHOLE
Port Elizabeth
Cape Town
on
s PLS
U7 SOUTENIQUA
oe BASIN
Fig. 1. Turonian to Santonian sample localities in south-east Africa.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
126
y
ueg
3V
Ww |6Hd AWN 4 Ill
puejn[nz ueIuojues ueIoeIuos)
II
| madaoyupa siaagapiuoj ]
sypssyf Siagapuolysnoy
X 1UOJYSNvY Sldaqajuojysnvyy
1ajvau DIdAdUADY
pIvsUuoja S14aqga]14aqq1H)
snuvd1dfo s14aqgajdaqgqiy
SISUI1AYSUDA] S1IadaYyIKD
Sisuaizojoful siasayjD
X sisuaizpsunzn] siasayjKy
Masuyy siasayjay
Snips asayykokyovig
sisuapuvjopuod asaykakyovag
ppunjos aay dokyovig
X DIDpNvIIsUg] adayJADKYIDAG
SISUASDYINSD asayIAIKYIvDAG
pplun} bansaysdoiyduyp
IUD] YIVDIIUL
‘Jo fadaysdooz1yosojapdy
1y9vqsa14s vapioyasayjay
luapsvs vaplojjas4ayiay
Sisuapquipzuin vapiojja.ayjaD
1uojMmaU vaplojjasayI AD
SIsuaDgn]U vapiojja4ayjAD
p-l ‘ds vyjasayida
sez “ds vyjasaysaD
6261 “ds vyjasayiAD
x #UPTUOIN J,
Jaddq
‘BOLI 1SB9-YINOS UI spoodeIsO UeIUOJURS 0} ULIUOINT, Jo UONNqsIp jeneds pue [e1odway
| ATdV
XG
CC
\W6
ANM ATM Ol COD
7
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA
‘yueg seyjnsy = yueg ‘3V
‘equUezWiy) = WY) ‘ajoystog Aeg spleyoRY =6HA ‘AMA IZOJOIN=AW ‘Avg os|eJ =A ‘I]] UeluCJUeS sAOge UOIsUa}xO=* ‘eIUeZUeT =,,
as
plez ‘ds ‘yopuy ¢¢
x ZIEz ‘ds “yopuy p¢
ES DIIUMA1UA DIJ2V10]NqG ES
ZEEz ‘ds aysty 7S
x 6cET ‘ds ays 1S
x Lez “ds vyjasayiXD 0S
x Szez “ds wyjasaysKD 6b
xX sisuakvqgspavyoid
| | sudksoyitg 8p
SG o¢¢ez ‘ds vjnjiddopawg Lp
x 77Ez “ds vywjiddopawg 9p
x L7Ez ‘ds vwjiddopswg Spr
x x Zez1 “ds “sapul pp
x x SzIz “ds ‘epul €p
xs 8L0c ‘ds ‘Jepuy Zp
8017 “ds ‘Jepuy Tp
yOIz ‘ds ‘19puy Op
x €0IZ “ds ‘19puy 6€
x x QS6T “ds ‘Jopuy gE
pL8I ‘ds ‘jopuy LE
i DIvINSDAIS DYJadvIIUyQy O¢
x DIDIINS DuIOpuod CE
Ke 1607 ‘ds gasaysdoojsauD HE
X 1uosdapuv vjyojiddopawg ¢¢
x psaqgo viuaaA ZF
x uosdwuoy) adaysdooskydvivd TE
ONS sisuakngspapyou siaddooyidg 0g
if. --—-
as
~
va
xe x KK
we
*
va
x KK KK
*
ta
ba
*
vs
*,
a
)
~
tals
‘ f
" ote i)
' 7, , ke
i ‘ &
oF
f
,
4
! ins 1K
A s
. rad
y
7
x
u «
4
a
ifn
r
5
ay
ie }
4 aa
i t
; jal
i ns
- a ‘
- \
A 1 Wh
\
¢
’ rd hg
)
2
naj
A
ie
a
de 2
9C1
TABLE 1
Temporal and spatial distribution of Turonian to Santonian ostracods in south-east Africa.
>
Zz
Z
>
Upper Coniacian Santonian Zululand b
Turonian** Ill I II Ill FB MV_ BH9 ce)
1 Cytherella sp. 1929 z
2 Cytherella sp. 2351 x x x a
3 Cytherella sp. 1-4 be be * x S$
4 Cytherelloidea mtubaensis x x S
5 Cytherelloidea newtoni Re x x x x oa
6 Cytherelloidea umzambaensis x—________—___ x Xx * x x x x >
7 Cytherelloidea gardeni x x x x 2
8 Cytherelloidea griesbachi x * x x g
9 Apateloschizocythere? cf. Zz
mclachlani x x z
10 Amphicytherura tumida x x * x x &
11 Brachycythere agulhasensis x x Sy
12 Brachycythere longicaudata be be x x x * x x x x z=
13 Brachycythere rotunda x x
14 Brachycythere pondolandensis x x x x
15 Brachycythere sicarius x x * be x x x
16 Cythereis klingeri xX—_—______—_____x real x xX x
17 Cythereis luzangaziensis x—______________ cf. x x
18 Cythereis mfoloziensis x x
19 Cythereis transkeiensis x x * x Xx x
20 Gibberleberis africanus x x x | x x x x
21 Gibberleberis elongata | x * x
22 Rayneria nealei x x rae. x x X
23 Haughtonileberis haughtoni x x x cL. x x x x
24 Haughtonileberis fissilis | x aol. x x x
25 Haughtonileberis vanhoepeni onlay x
26 Oertliella pennata x——___________x oul os x x x
27 Oertliella sp. 476 ea eae x
Nee ae ee LL SaaS eae
28 Paracypris umzambaensis XK —.. x x x x
29 Paracypris zululandensis x——___________ x x x x x
30 Bythocypris richardsbayensis _ ee gol. x x x
31 Paraphysocythere thompsoni x x x
32 Veenia obesa x x x
33 Bairdoppilata andersoni x x * Xx x x x
34 Cnestocythere? sp. 2091 x x
35 Pondoina sulcata Xx Xx x x
36 Unicapella stragulata a x X x
37 Indet. sp. 1874 x x
38 Indet. sp. 1956 x x
39 Indet. sp. 2103 Xx x
40 Indet. sp. 2104 x x
41 Indet. sp. 2108 x x
42 Indet. sp. 2078 x x
43 Indet. sp. 2125
44 Indet, sp. 1232
45 Bairdoppilata sp. 2327
46 Bairdoppilata sp. 2322
47 Bairdoppilata sp. 2336 x x
48 Bythocypris |
richardsbayensis x x
49 Cytherella sp. 2325
50 Cytherella sp. 2317
51 Krithe sp. 2329 x
$2 Krithe sp. 2332 x
53 Dutoitella mimica x ee
54 Indet. sp. 2312
55 Indet. sp. 2314
**=Tanzania, »=extension above Santonian III; FB=False Bay, MV=Mfolozi Valley, BH9=Richards Bay borehole; Um = Umzamba,
Ag. Bank = Agulhas Bank.
VGOOVULSO NVINOLNVS GNV “NVIOVINOO ‘NVINOWNAL
LU
128 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
SAMPLING LOCALITIES
Zululand and Richards Bay
Coniacian and Santonian sediments crop out in river valleys in a north-south
swathe along the central part of the Zululand coastal plain between Kwa-
Mbonambi in the south (where they are overstepped by Campanian strata), and ~
the Mkuze River in the north. Farther north, along the Pongola River and under
the Makatini Flats, no outcrops have been recorded, but they probably underlie
Neogene sands. South of Hluhluwe River, Coniacian oversteps the Albian—
Cenomanian Mzinene Formation to rest directly on volcanic basement. Kennedy
& Klinger (1975) have collected extensively from these exposures, and we have
retained their locality and bed-number notation. (Quotation is in the form:
locality—bed number/subdivision.) Biostratigraphic subdivision of the two stages
follows that of Kennedy & Klinger (1975), and to facilitate international
correlation of the ostracod time ranges we quote their ammonite zonation
characteristics in Table 2.
South of the Mfolozi valley there are no good natural outcrops, but samples
have been obtained from the Richards Bay borehole (BH9), which spans the
Santonian—Campanian boundary. At this locality Santonian II rests directly on
basement. A similar succession was recorded by Kennedy & Klinger (1975)
in an excavation on the Nyokanemi River at Kwa-Mbonambi. These records
indicate that Coniacian—Santonian I is missing over a basement feature that
Dingle et al. (1983) refer to as the Richards Bay Arch. Farther south (Durban),
Santonian II is missing, and only Santonian III or Campanian strata are present
(Fig. 3).
In Zululand, the Coniacian and Santonian form the lower part of the
St. Lucia Formation. It has a basal conglomerate with igneous pebbles, agates,
bivalve debris and abundant Pterotrigonia shepstoni, but overall consists
predominantly of silts with concretionary siltstones and shelly limestones
(Kennedy & Klinger 1975; Dingle et al. 1983).
Although all the ammonite zones were sampled for ostracods, many of the
samples were barren, presumably because of decalcification. The oldest zone that
contained ostracods was Coniacian III at locality 16 (28°26,70'S 32°11,42’E), a
small quarry on the north side of the Mfolozi River, south of Mtubatuba.
Coniacian IV was sampled at locality 15 (28°26,58’S 32°11,40’E) in another small
quarry 175m west of locality 16, and 45km north-north-east at locality 89
(28°02,27’S 32°21,32’E). The latter consists of hill slopes north of the Hluhluwe
River where it debouches into False Bay. No Lower Santonian ostracod-bearing
samples were available, but good faunus occurred in samples from outcrops
covering the upper part of Santonian II and most of Santonian III. The former are
exposed in cliff sections along the western shore of False Bay at locality 74
(27°54,20'S 32°23,78’E). Santonian III faunas were also obtained from locality 74,
where the higher beds in the cliff dip to the north-east and crop out along the
shore, and at locality 14 (28°28,40’S 32°10,72’E). The latter is near the road
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 129
TABLE 2
Kennedy & Klinger’s (1975) ammonite zonation of Coniacian to Santonian strata in Zululand.
SANTONIAN
Santonian IIT
Hauericeras gardeni is abundant. The remainder of the fauna is relatively scarce and is
made up of: Plesiotexanites stangeri and varieties, Texanites soutoni, Texanites spp., Pseudo-
schloenbachia, ?Eupachydiscus, Hyphantoceras, Reginaites, Submortoniceras, Bevahites and
diplomoceratids.
Santonian II
Plesiotexanites stangeri and varieties are abundant. The remainder of the fauna consists of:
Texanites soutoni, Texanites spp., Hauericeras, Pseudoschloenbachia, ? Eupachydiscus, Hyphan-
toceras and diplomoceratids.
Santonian I
Texanites oliveti, Plesiotexanites stangeri, P. densicosta and P. sparsicosta, Eutexanites,
Paratexanites, Hauericeras gardeni, Pseudoschloenbachia, Pseudophyllites indra, ? Karapadites,
?Eupachydiscus, Gaudryceras, Hyphantoceras and diplomoceratids.
The local base is drawn at the level of the appearance of Texanites s.s. in numbers.
CONIACIAN
Coniacian V
Abundant baculitids ornamented only by growth striae. Also forms resembling Pseudo-
schloenbachia primitiva Collignon. Scaphites, Tetragonites, Protexanites, Texanites and Para-
texanites occur.
Coniacian IV
Baculites gr. capensis are abundant, and compressed, finely ornamented peroniceratids,
Zuluites and robustly ornamented ?Gauthiericeras (e.g. ‘Falsebayites’, ‘Fluminites’, ‘Hluhluweo-
ceras’ and ‘Andersonites’ of Van Hoepen) are locally common. Tetragonites, Protexanites and
Paratexanites also occur.
Coniacian IIT
Placenticeras, coarsely ornamented peroniceratids (Zuluiceras), Protexanites, Miotexanites,
Paratexanites bailyi, Kossmaticeras and ?Praemuniericeras are common.
Coniacian II
Proplacenticeras kaffrarium is abundant. Peroniceras gr. tridorsatum and Forresteria are
common. Other types include: ‘Eedenoceras’ multicostatum, Basseoceras krameri, Kossmati-
ceras sparsicosta, K. sakondryense, Puzosia spp., Pachydesmoceras, Lewesiceras australe,
Yabeiceras spp., Pseudoxybeloceras matsumotoi, Hyphantoceras reussianum, Allocrioceras spp..,
Baculites bailyi, Scaphites meslei and Protexanites.
Contacian I
Proplacenticeras kaffrarium is abundant. Other types include Kossmaticeras theobaldi-
anum, Bostrychoceras indicum, Pachydesmoceras denisonianum and Pachydesmoceras sp.
The local base is drawn at the level of appearance of Kossmaticeras theobaldianum.
TURONIAN
No Turonian rocks known from outcrop in Zululand. They occur at depth in boreholes in
northern Zululand.
130 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
28°
Hluhluwe R.
28°30’
<
KWA- S limit
MBONAMBi < Coniacian
e \ RICHARDS SPU
BH9 BAY
32° 32°30’
Fig. 2. Sampling localities in Zululand, using the notation of
Kennedy & Klinger (1975). See text for co-ordinates and outcrop
details. Geology is after Kennedy & Klinger (1975) and Dingle et al.
(1983) and the key is in Figure 3. BH9 is the Richards Bay borehole.
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 131
Zululand Agulhas
eam J(c)1 Outcrops BH9 Umzamba_ Bank
= |
oS 14 174
6 [+
24 eZ
= i ea
eu]
OTS
=
ea V
a
IV
Sv
eI c
5 510
fe l
= 1
S {
oO
Turonian
Cen. —-
Barr.
basement
Turonian,
Santonian Coniacian Cenomanian-
Barremian
I hiatus GG basement
Fig. 3. Correlation chart for sampled sections (see Figs 1 and 2 for
locations). Roman numerals indicate ammonite zones after Kennedy
& Klinger (1975) (see Table 2 for details). There is some uncertainty
as to the ammonite zones represented in the Agulhas Bank outcrops.
bridge over the Msunduzi River due south of River View in the Mfolozi River
valley near Mtubatuba.
The Richards Bay borehole BH9 is located at the southern end of the
Zululand coastal plain, and 23 cored sections were available for study, covering
the whole sequence from immediately above bedrock (Santonian II) to the
Santonian—Campanian boundary. The borehole succession and details of
sampled horizons are given in Klinger & Kennedy (1977) and Dingle (1980).
Ostracods from BH9 have previously been described by Dingle (1980), and serve
as an important link between the north Zululand assemblages and the southern
assemblages from Umzamba.
Umzamba
The most recent biostratigraphic zonations of this classic locality have been
by Klinger & Kennedy (1977, 1980) using ammonites, and Makrides (1979) using
foraminifera. Klinger & Kennedy (1980) date the lowermost ammonite-bearing
132 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
beds in the Umzamba area (locality C bed 3) as Santonian II (Fig. 4), and place
the Santonian H—III boundary within bed 3 at locality A.The latter is the cliff
section immediately north of the Umzamba River mouth, from which Dingle
(1969) described the ostracods from four horizons, and from which additional
material was collected for the present study (31°05,83’S 30°10,50’E). For a
comprehensive summary of the stratigraphy and correlation of the Umzamba
wn
o Os
D co 2m Y
ce ~ 5 canwo )
6 r= oo 6 oe Se o ¢ Ss —
eee ee ee ne OSS
TE Sse SO .6 © * € o oS 2 choc omon—me
Ce S BHeseaseurnnnPSEogee env G
SNGLSE VE WY § OS oo VRS oecetromemcics
SCEBSBSSOESQZQZDGMe CKHYHYE
rS5 one 2a5S5 nt TS ABI ges
GHaisarqnnao 6 = = =o ep wavomeor weg
bed No. sample No. MONNMONTOADSOK KP HTOH HOH TAA ES
{ | eNO MN KF eX | - Oost = NN MN | OTN OS
9 —9
8 CAMP |
=!
m.
2 SANT Ill
5 =e ;
244
—1* e
3-9,
—3x s
Vales
O
y) SANT II
1 —4x ecoce
—1B
Fig. 4. Measured section at Umzamba Cliff using the bed numbers of Klinger & Kennedy
(1980). Ostracod distributions relate to this notation, in addition to that presented by Dingle
(1969) (right-hand column, with stars, under ‘sample No.’). Ostracod numbers refer to informal
taxa numbers on Table 1.
Formation in adjacent outcrops the reader is referred to Dingle et al. (1983). It is
important to note that at both Umzamba and Richards Bay, Santonian II, which
is locally the oldest representative of the Upper Cretaceous transgression,
consists of shallow-water sediments deposited in relatively high-energy environ-
ments. In contrast, sediments of the same age in north Zululand were probably
deposited under relatively deep-water conditions (see Discussion).
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 133
Outeniqua Basin (Agulhas Bank)
Three Lower Coniacian samples have been dredged from the western
Agulhas Bank during University of Cape Town geological surveys of the sea floor
(Fig. 1), and Klinger et al. (1976, 1980) have described their ammonite and
bivalve faunas (Table 3). One sample (TBD 510) contained ostracods, which
were described by Dingle (1971b), who quoted a date of Lower—Middle
Senonian, based on the presence of the planktonic foraminifera Globotruncana
sp. ex gr. G. marginata, identified by Dr H. P. Luterbacher (University of
Tubingen). The ostracods are re-illustrated and their taxonomy is revised.
TABLE 3
Ammonites and bivalves in Lower Coniacian samples from the Agulhas Bank (data from
Klinger et al. 1976, 1980).
ED 510: 35°11,70'S 20°30,00'E
Proplacenticeras kaffrarium (Etheridge, 1904)
Scaphites (Otoscaphites?) sp.
TBD 4492: 35°10,00’S 20°53,00’E
Yabeiceras manasoaense Collignon, 1965
TBD 4510: 35°2,50’S 20°39,50’E
Inoceramus (I.) ernsti Heinz, 1928
I. frechi Flegel, 1905
J(c)—1 borehole, offshore Natal
Twenty-five sediment samples (of which 12 contained ostracods) were
available from the lower part of the J(c)—1 borehole on the continental shelf off
Natal at 29°27,69’S 31°35,66’E in 72m of water. The borehole penetrated about
2000m of Tertiary and Cretaceous strata on the upper part of the Tugela Cone
before entering Palaeozoic quartzites, and the section between 2297m and
1927 m (370m) is considered Upper Cenomanian to Santonian in age (Table 4).
The Turonian section (2 197-2 127m, 70m) in this borehole is the only one of its
age from which material is available in southern Africa. Ostracod faunas from the
Campanian to Oligocene sections have previously been described by Dingle
(1976, 1981).
PREVIOUS WORK
Chapman’s (1904) pioneer work on South African ostracod faunas was
undertaken on Santonian material from Umzamba, and was followed by a further
publication on a fauna from the same strata in 1923. Unfortunately, all the type
material relating to these two studies was destroyed in 1953 (see Dingle 1969 for
details). This fact, combined with poor illustrations and ambiguous descriptions
in the publications, as well as lack of precise locality details, makes comparative
studies with the taxa he identified extremely difficult, and in most cases
impossible. Dingle (1969) redescribed the faunas from Santonian II and III strata
at the main Umzamba cliff section (Klinger & Kennedy’s (1980) locality A), and
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
134
SJUDUISCIJT DJCUIWIIOJOPUT SNOTIVA 0} SIoyoI ‘ds ‘yapuyT ‘soyAydoreys = ‘oleyd ‘sustid snwosav0uy = ‘out
"SYIOM IJOYIS YIM UONL[SIIOD 10} UMOYS 399} ul syjdop jeUIsIIO =
‘oyaAd = ‘1kg
‘yuouisely = ‘3e1q
7K
"(€861) ‘7 Ja s[suIq pure “(6261) URTADIN 2 URTYOR TOW ‘(pL6T) UOT 2 UOL nq Joye ydeisnens = ,
jUdUIOseg dIOZONRIeg
‘OUT
CLEC
VIET
‘JOpuy
‘ds
6ZEZ -TEET sisuakDgspavyou
‘ds ayjuy
SCEC [ENS
‘ds pyjasayjay ‘Jo suddooyjag
OVS Le EOC
OOSZ, 98C¢
OVE SVEGC
NG, CHEE
O8€L 6hC7C
xs Ore MEE
as OOSZ- “SCC, USD Ml!
x 09GZ SANG
0COE MOG
ee teteill G
ALE SLI an],
ss O90L CST?
OcOL Orl~@
0869 8717
OV69 SILZ@ us
0069 e012
0789 607d
08L9 L907@
OVL9 §=S07
00L9 crOc~
0999 007d
OEY) all
08S9 90072
a a 00S9 ~=«L86T
O8€9 Sré6l UES
pon |} “Bey LZEC CET «EET y wi
pyjanoinqg ‘ds vyojiddopawg
«x4idoq .28V
SpOd®11SC
‘gJoysI0g [ —(9)f OY} WIJ spooesysO URTUOJURS 0} URTURUIOUaD JaddqQ
bp ATaV
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 135
during the course of the present study two additional Santonian II and three
Santonian III ostracod-bearing samples were collected. In particular, the upper
part of the Santonian III was sampled. The only other descriptions of Santonian
ostracods were by Dingle (1980) on the Santonian II and III faunas from the
Richards Bay borehole (BH9). There have been no previous published studies on
South African Coniacian ostracods, nor on Santonian material from the outcrops
in north Zululand.
No Turonian strata are known to crop out in south-east Africa, but details of
ostracod populations of this age from Tanzania (Bate & Bayliss 1969) (Table 5),
Gabon (Grosdidier 1979), and Brazil and Gabon (Kr6mmelbein 1964, 1972) form
important sources of information for understanding the development of post-mid-
Cretaceous ostracod faunas in south-east Africa. Three ostracod-bearing samples
of Turonian age were available from the J(c)—1 borehole for the present study.
TABLE 5
Taxa recorded by Bate (in Bate & Bayliss 1969) from Tanzania.
A. Sample BM75, Upper Turonian (Luzangazi Stream, north of Wami River).
Ostracoda Planktonic foraminifera
Cytherura moorei Globotruncana helvetica Bolli
Cytherura luzangaziensis Globotruncana linneiana (d’Orbigny)
Isocythereis sp., 10782 Globotruncana linneiana coronata (Bolli)
Curfsina turonicat Globotruncana spp.
Akrogmocythere wamiensis Clavihedbergella sp.
Brachycythere aff. sapucariensis*t Hedbergella delrioensis (Carsey)
Cythereis luzangaziensist Hedbergella sp.
Cythereis sp. C, 10793 Heterohelix sp.
Paracypris wamiensis Praeglobotruncana sp.
Sphaeroleberis africana
Cytherella afroturonica
Cytherelloidea turonica
* = dominant taxon + = illustrated herein
B. Albian—Cenomanian
Albian Cenomanian
Ovocytheridea mackinlayi Cythereis lindiensis
Cytherelloidea sp. A Cytherella nalukundiensis
Cythereis sp. A Cythereis sp. B
Cytheropteron africanum Cytherelloidea cenomanica
Cytherella postcontracta Majungaella pyriformis
Majungaella pyriformis Cythereis africanus
Cythereis africanus
Genus A
Macrocypris acuticaudata
136 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
A total of 66 fossiliferous samples were available for study (53 from onshore,
12 from the J(c)-1 borehole, and one from the Agulhas Bank), from which
55 species of ostracods have been identified. Microfossils were extracted by
washing and sieving, and were photographed with Cambridge S180 and S200 SEMs
at the University of Cape Town. Specimens were mounted on double-sided Sello-
tape or water-soluble glue, and were coated with a gold—palladium mixture. Types
and illustrated material are deposited in the South African Museum, Cape Town.
LIST OF GENERA
The genera of Ostracoda discussed in this work are given below:
PAGE
Cytherella Jones, 1849". Un hoe coe ee ee 113) j)
Cytherelloidea Alexander, 1929" 02 ans + ee ee 139
Bairdoppilata Coryell, Sample & Jennings, 1935................ 144
Bythocypris Brady; 1880. cc od Je ee wee. do ee 147
Paracypris Sats, 1866.0. oe ee ee 147
Pondoina Dingle, 1969"). 0 . a s e 149
Amphicytherura Butler é& Jones, 1957 4.04... 5- 0 ee eee Sl
Apateloschizecythere Bate, 1972 . 0... k5 0.22 ee) ee ISL
Cnestocyihere Triebel, 1950 oon cs oancew ks one et 52 153
Brachycythere Alexander, 1933 ......... te halts dal 9 A) ee ISS
Paraphysocyihere Wingle, 969"... . 2. 4.4 os os eee 164
Veenia Butler. & Jones, V957 Gai nds nk oe ee 165
Krithe Brady, Crosskey & Robertson, 1874 .................... 167
Unicapella Dingle, 1980. one ne no bk oe eee 169
Dutottella Dingle, 198iee.. 2 wn. po ae eee ee 173
Cythereis Jones, V849 in, ies be alee ae ee 173
Haughtonileberis Dingle, 1969"... 3. eee 180
Oertliella Pokorny, 1964. . oo. ek ne ates oo oe ee 186
Rayneria' Neale; 97S eee es 188
Gibberleberis Dingle, A969... jee a ee 190
Indeterminate taxa. i..)5< 062 ae ole oe iLO?
SYSTEMATIC DESCRIPTIONS
The classification used here is based mostly on the Ostracod Treatise (Moore
1961), with various additions necessitated by recent work. Numeric taxonomic
categories refer to unique SEM photographic negative numbers in the author’s
collection.
Abbreviations: ACA = anterior cardinal area; AM = anterior margin;
ATE = anterior terminal element; CA = cardinal area; DM = dorsal margin;
LV = left valve; MA = marginal area; ME = median element; MPC = marginal
pore canal; MS = muscle scars; NPC = normal pore canal; PCA = posterior
cardinal area; PM = posterior margin; PTE = posterior terminal element;
RV = right valve; SCT = subcentral tubercle; VM = ventral margin.
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA i7/
Subclass OSTRACODA Latreille, 1806
Order PODOCOPIDA Miller, 1894
Suborder PLATYCOPINA Sars, 1866
Family Cytherellidae Sars, 1866
Genus Cytherella Jones, 1849
Cytherella sp. 1929
Fig. 5A
Remarks
This elongate species with prominent NPC is closest to Cytherella morpho-
type 3 that Dingle (1980) recorded from the Richards Bay borehole. There is a
slight difference in their respective AM outlines, but the two may be conspecific.
Age and distribution
Coniacian IV, St. Lucia Formation, locality 15—1 to 15-5, Mtubatuba.
Cytherella sp. 2351
Fig. 5B
Remarks
An inflated species close to Cytherella morphotype 4 recorded by Dingle
(1980) from the Santonian—Campanian II of the Richards Bay borehole.
Age and distribution
This species occurs consistently, though in small numbers, throughout the
Santonian II-III section at locality 74, False Bay.
Cytherella sp. 2325
Fig. 5C
Remarks
A single broken carapace that has a vertically expanded, laterally com-
pressed anterior area, an arched DM, and a convex VM.
Age and distribution
Coniacian, J(c)—1 borehole, 2115 m (6940 ft).
138 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
238UM
*B
Fig. 5. A. Cytherella sp. 1929, SAM-—PC6485, LV, locality 15-5, Mtubatuba, Coniacian IV.
B. Cytherella sp. 2351, SAM-PC6486, RV, locality 74-9, False Bay, Santonian III.
C. Cytherella sp. 2325, SAM-—PC6487, LV, J(c)-1 borehole, 2 115 m, Coniacian. D. Cytherella
sp. 2317, SAM-—PC6488, LV, J(c)-1 borehole, 2 042 m, Santonian. E. Cytherelloidea
mtubaensis sp. nov., SAM—PC6489, holotype, RV, locality 15-1, Mtubatuba, Coniacian IV,
SEM 1954. Scale bars: A, D-E = 100p, B = 200u, C = 300.
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 139
Cytherella sp. 2317
Fig. 5D
Remarks
A single carapace of an ovate species that is similar in outline to Cytherella
morphotype 2 recorded by Dingle (1980) from the Santonian—Campanian II of
the Richards Bay borehole.
Age and distribution
Santonian, J(c)—1 borehole, 2042 m (6700 ft).
Cytherella sp. 1-4 Dingle, 1980
Cytherella spp. 1, 2, 3, & 4. Dingle, 1980: 5-7, fig. 2A—F.
Cytherella sp. Dingle, 1981: 15-17, fig. SA-F.
Remarks
Dingle (1980) recognized four morphotypes of Cytherella that he originally
placed in separate categories, but subsequently gathered into one taxonomic unit
because it was not possible to consistently discriminate the various valve outlines
(Dingle 1981). See Dingle (1980) for representative illustrations.
Age and distribution
Examples of the four morphotypes occur sporadically throughout the
Santonian II-III section of the Richards Bay borehole, but only appear in
significant numbers in the Campanian. They range upwards into the Maastrich-
tian III, and two specimens of Cytherella (spp. 1929 and 2351) recorded from the
Coniacian and Santonian II-III of Zululand outcrops during the present study
may be conspecific. Better-quality material and larger populations need to be
studied before further progress can be made in resolving the taxonomy of the
Upper Cretaceous Cytherella species in Zululand.
Genus Cytherelloidea Alexander, 1929
This genus is the only one that is well represented above and below the mid-
Cretaceous (Turonian—Coniacian) non-sequence in southern Africa, although
none of its species range across the hiatus: seven species Berriasian to
Cenomanian; seven species Coniacian to Maastrichtian. Of the seven post-
Cenomanian species, three appear in the Coniacian (C. mtubaensis, C. newtoni,
and C. umzambaensis); two in the Santonian (C. gardeni and C. griesbachi); and
two in the Campanian (C. contorta and C. mfoloziensis) (Fig. 6).Three species
(C. mtubaensis, C. newtoni, and C. gardeni) are restricted to Coniacian—
Santonian strata, and only one has a relatively long range (C. umzambaensis —
Coniacian IV to Campanian IV). Cytherelloidea is, therefore, a potentially useful
genus for biostratigraphic work in the south-east African Coniacian to Maastrich-
tian sediments.
140 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
CONIACIAN | SANTONIAN CAMPANIAN MAASTRICHT.
mtubaensis
newtoni
umzambaensis
gardeni
griesbachi
contorta
mfoloziensis
Fig. 6. Ranges of Cytherelloidea species in Upper Cretaceous strata of south-east Africa.
Cytherelloidea mtubaensis sp. nov.
Fig. SE, 7A
Derivation of name
The name mtubaensis is derived from the type locality name Mtubatuba,
Zululand.
Holotype
SAM-—PC6489, RV, locality 15-1, Mtubatuba, Coniacian IV.
Diagnosis
Species with a continuous anterior, ventral, and posteroventral ridge; short
elliptical ventromedian and dorsomedian to posterodorsal elevations.
Descriptions
External features. Broadly rounded AM and PM, straight to slightly convex
DM, and a weakly concave VM. Surface elevations consist of a continuous, but
relatively weak ridge that runs from the anterodorsal area via the VM to about
mid-height on the PM. There is a prominent, short pseudo-elliptical ventro-
median elevation and an irregular, continuous series of elevations and ridges in
the dorsomedian to posterodorsal region. The most prominent part of the latter is
at its posterior end. Surface otherwise apparently smooth.
No internal views seen.
Remarks
Only C. griesbachi Dingle, 1980 (Santonian III to Campanian III) has a
surface rib pattern that is likely to be confused with that of C. mtubaensis (Fig. 7),
because both have prominent short ventromedian elevations. However, the
former has no ribs or elevations that run parallel to the PM, and has a ridge that is
continuous around the DM and AM.
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 141
—=>
Fig. 7. Sketches of Cytherelloidea species, with positive features shaded.
A. C. mtubaensis sp. nov., SAM—PC6489, holotype, RV, locality 15-1,
Mtubatuba, ConiacianIV. B.C. griesbachi, holotype, SAM-—K5575, RV,
BH9 Richards Bay, 88,39 m, Campanian II. C. C. umzambaensis,
SAM-PC6492, RV, locality 15-7, Mtubatuba, Coniacian IV, SEM 1953.
D. C. umzambaensis, SAM—PC6491, RV, Umzamba bed 1, Santonian II,
SEM 710. E. C. newtoni, SAM-—PC6490, LV, locality 15-5, Mtubatuba,
Coniacian IV, SEM 1919. Scale bars = 300 wu.
Dimensions (mm)
length height
PC6489 0,68 0,36
Age and distribution
Cytherelloidea mtubaensis is known only from the Coniacian IV at locality
15-1 at Mtubatuba, Zululand.
142 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Cytherelloidea newtoni Dingle, 1980
Figs 7E, 8A-B
Cytherelloidea newtoni Dingle, 1980: 8-10, figs 3C, 4C.
Remarks
Small numbers of this distinctive species have been recorded from outcrops
at Mtubatuba and False Bay, which show no significant morphological differences
from the type material of the Richards Bay borehole.
Age and distribution
Cytherelloidea newtoni ranges Coniacian ITV (Mtubatuba) to Santonian III
(BH9 and False Bay). In the Richards Bay borehole it occurred in sediments
deposited in environments that are thought to have ranged from shallow water,
high energy, restricted circulation, through shallow water (<100m), low energy,
restricted circulation, to shallow, low-energy, open water (<100m) (Dingle
1980). Cytherelloidea newtoni, although relatively rare, is probably a good
stratigraphic indicator for Zululand Coniacian to Santonian strata.
Cytherelloidea umzambaensis Dingle, 1969
Figs 7C—D, 8C-—D
Cytherella williamsoniana (non Jones, 1849) Chapman, 1904: 236.
Cytherelloidea umzambaensis Dingle, 1969: 351-353, fig. 3; 1980: 7, figs 3A, 4A—B; 1981: 18,
figs 7A, 9C.
Remarks
This species is one of the distinctive elements of the Upper Cretaceous
ostracod faunas of south-east Africa, and displays a high degree of morphological
stability throughout its range. The median longitudinal ridge does show some
variability in elevation along the section anterior of the MS depression.
Age and distribution
Cytherelloidea umzambaensis ranges Coniacian IV (Mtubatuba) to Cam-
panian IV (Nibela Peninsula) at outcrop in Zululand, Santonian II to Campanian
II in BH9, and Santonian II to Campanian I at Umzamba (type locality). Its
distribution in the Richards Bay borehole suggests that it preferred quiet,
moderate-depth (100-300m) environments, but was tolerant of both shallow
(<100m), high-energy and deep (>500m), low-energy situations.
Cytherelloidea gardeni Dingle, 1971
Fig. 8E—F
non Cytherelloidea delicata Dingle, 1969: 353-354, fig. 4.
Cytherelloidea gardeni Dingle, 1971a: 353.
Cytherelloidea cf. C. gardeni Dingle, 1980: 7.
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 143
Fig. 8. Genus Cytherelloidea. A. C. newtoni, SAM-—KS5574, holotype, RV, BH9 Richards Bay,
120,22 m, Santonian III, SEM 720. B. C. newtoni, SAM-—PC6490, LV, locality 15-5,
Mtubatuba, Coniacian IV, SEM 1919. C. C. umzambaensis, SAM—PC6491, RV, Umzamba bed
1, Santonian II, SEM 710. D.C. umzambaensis, SAM-—PC6492, RV, locality 15-7, Mtubatuba,
Coniacian IV, SEM 1953. E. C. gardeni, SAM—PC6493, LV, Umzamba bed 3, Santonian III,
SEM 714. F. C. gardeni, SAM—PC6494, RV, Umzamba bed 3, Santonian III, SEM 717.
Scale bars = 100 wp.
144 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Remarks
No additional specimens of this distinctive species have been found in the
Zululand outcrops. SEM photographs of Santonian II topotypic material from
Umzamba are included here to supplement the inadequate original illustrations
by Dingle (1969). The longitudinal rib pattern in the posterior part of the valve is
very similar to that of C. griesbachi, but the two species have a different valve
outline (C. gardeni is distinctly elongate), and C. gardeni is overall delicately
reticulate.
Age and distribution
Cytherelloidea gardeni ranges Santonian II to Santonian III in the Umzamba
cliff section, and one specimen was recorded in the lower part of Santonian III in
the Richards Bay borehole (BH9).
Cytherelloidea griesbachi Dingle, 1980
Fig. 7B
Cytherelloidea griesbachi Dingle, 1980: 10-11, figs 3B, 4D.
Remarks
A rare species whose rib pattern has similarities with that of C. mtubaensis.
Age and distribution
Cytherelloidea griesbachi ranges uppermost Santonian III to Campanian II in
the Richards Bay BH9 borehole. One specimen was recorded by Dingle (1980)
from Santonian III at Umzamba.
Suborder PoDOcoPINA Sars, 1866
Superfamily BAIRDIACEA Sars, 1888
Family Bairdiidae Sars, 1888
Genus Bairdoppilata Coryell, Sample & Jennings, 1935
Bairdoppilata andersoni Dingle, 1980
Fig. 9A-C
Bairdoppilata andersoni Dingle, 1980: 12-14, fig. SA—F; 1981: 25-29, figs 11A—D, 13A-B.
Remarks
Specimens from Santonian Zululand outcrops have a prominent posterior
beak, but can be accommodated within the intraspecific morphological variations
encountered from other areas.
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 145
268UN
*B
Fig. 9. Genus Bairdoppilata. A. B. andersoni, SAM—PC6495, LV, locality 74-15, Mtubatuba,
Santonian III, SEM 2352. B. B. andersoni, SAM—PC6496, RV, BH9 Richards Bay, 139,8 m,
Santonian III, SEM 2344. C. B. andersoni, SAM—PC6497, RV, Umzamba bed 5, Santonian III,
SEM 2076. D. Bairdoppilata sp. 2322, SAM—PC6498, LV, J(c)—1 borehole, 1 981 m, Santonian.
E. Bairdoppilata sp. 2327, SAM-—PC6499, LV, J(c)—1 borehole, 2 152 m, Turonian, SEM 2328.
F. Bairdoppilata sp. 2336, SAM—PC6500, LV, J(c)—1 borehole, 2 213 m, Upper Cenomanian,
SEM 2335. Scale bars: A = 500 ph, B = 200n, C-D = 100yu, E-F = 3300p.
146 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Age and distribution
Bairdoppilata andersoni is one of the temporally and spatially most
widespread ostracod taxa in south-east Africa, but is numerically rare in the
Santonian strata of Richards Bay, Zululand, and Umzamba. It is known to range
Santonian II—Campanian II in BH9, Santonian I1]J—Campanian I at Umzamba,
Santonian IJ]J—Maastrichtian II (Zululand), and occurs in Maastrichtian III on the
Agulhas Bank.
Bairdoppilata sp. 2322
Fig. 9D
Remarks
One badly worn carapace that is probably conspecific with B. cf. africana,
which was illustrated by Dingle (1981, fig. 12F). Bairdoppilata cf. africana was
recorded from Campanian—Maastrichtian sections of the J(c)—1 borehole.
Age and distribution
Santonian, J(c)—1 borehole, 1981 m (6500 ft).
Bairdoppilata sp. 2327
Fig. 9E
Remarks
A broken valve whose affinities to other members of the genus in the J(c)—1
borehole are not clear.
Age and distribution
Turonian, J(c)—1 borehole, 2 152m (7060 ft).
Bairdoppilata sp. 2336
Fig. 9F
Remarks
Two punctate carapaces of a species that is more elongate than Bairdoppilata
sp. 2322 and B. cf. africana.
Age and distribution
Upper Cenomanian-Santonian, J(c)—-1 borehole, 2213m and 1981m
(7260 ft and 6500 ft).
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 147
Genus Bythocypris Brady, 1880
Bythocypris richardsbayensis Dingle, 1980
Fig. 1OA—B
Bythocypris richardsbayensis Dingle, 1980: 14-16, fig. 6bA—E; 1981: 31, fig. 14A—C.
Remarks
This species is sparsely distributed throughout the Coniacian—Santonian
strata of south-east Africa, but the oldest recorded specimens show no significant
morphological differences from the type specimens (Campanian), or younger
material. Bythocypris richardsbayensis only becomes abundant in the deeper-
water, post-Santonian sediments.
Age and distribution
Coniacian IV—Maastrichtian II (Zululand outcrops), Maastrichtian III
(Agulhas Bank), Santonian II—Campanian II (Richards Bay borehole). So far, no
specimens have been recorded from Umzamba, presumably because of the
shallow-water environments that prevailed there.
Bythocypris cf. richardsbayensis
Fig. 10C—D
Remarks
Two carapaces (one crushed) of a species with a similar lateral outline to
B. richardsbayensis.
Age and distribution
Upper Cenomanian-Santonian, J(c)—1 borehole, 2213m and 2030m
(7260 ft and 6660 ft).
Superfamily CYPRIDACEA Baird, 1845
Family Paracyprididae Sars, 1923
Genus Paracypris Sars, 1866
Paracypris zululandensis Dingle, 1980
Eres 10k
Paracypris zululandensis Dingle, 1980: 17-19, figs 7D-—G, 9B; 1981: 35, fig. 16D.
Remarks
Paracypris zululandensis occurs consistently, but in small numbers, in the
Coniacian and Lower Santonian strata of the Mfolozi and False Bay areas of
Zululand. Dingle (1980) recorded a similar distribution in the Santonian of BH9,
but noted that the species becomes relatively more abundant in the deeper-water
Campanian section of the borehole.
148 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 10. A. Bythocypris richardsbayensis, SAM-—PC6501, RV, locality 15-5, Mtubatuba,
Coniacian IV, SEM 2133. B. Bythocypris richardsbayensis, SAM-—PC6502, LV, BH9 Richards
Bay, 142,0 m, Santonian III, SEM 2345. C. Bythocypris cf. richardsbayensis, SAM—PC6503,
RV, J(c)-1 borehole, 2 030m, Santonian—Coniacian, SEM 2324. D. Bythocypris cf.
richardsbayensis, SAM-—PC6504, RV, J(c)—-1 borehole, 2213 m, Upper Cenomanian,
SEM 2337. E. Paracypris umzambaensis, SAM-—PC6506, RV, locality 74-11/2, False Bay,
Santonian II-III, SEM 2354. F. Paracypris zululandensis, SAM—PC6505, RV, locality 74—11/2,
False Bay, Santonian II-III, SEM 2348. Scale bars: A, C, D = 100, B, F = 200p, E = 500 pu.
ae a mae
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 149
Age and distribution
Coniacian IV to ?Maastrichtian I at outcrop in Zululand (Mfolozi and False
Bay), Santonian II to Campanian II in the Richards Bay borehole, and
Maastrichtian III, Agulhas Bank. Not found at Umzamba.
Paracypris umzambaensis Dingle, 1969
Fig. 10E
Macrocypris simplex (non Chapman, 1898) Chapman, 1904: 233, pl. 29 (fig. 22).
Paracypris? umzambaensis Dingle, 1969: 354-356, fig. 5.
Paracypris umzambaensis Dingle, 1980: 17, figs 7A—C, 9A; 1981: 34-35, fig. 16A-C.
Remarks
Paracypris umzambaensis occurs sporadically in the False Bay area, but
becomes more abundant farther south, where it is consistently present in small
numbers throughout the Richards Bay borehole, and at Umzamba. At the latter
locality, it occurs to the exclusion of its close relative P. zululandensis. Dingle
(1981) suggested that P. umzambaensis was more tolerant of deep-water
conditions than P. zululandensis.
Age and distribution
Santonian III to Maastrichtian II at outcrop in Zululand (False Bay),
Santonian II to Campanian II in BH9, Santonian II-III at Umzamba, and late
Campanian—early Maastrichtian at Igoda (near East London).
Superfamily CYTHERACEA Baird, 1850
Family Cytherideidae Sars, 1925
Genus Pondoina Dingle, 1969
Two species of this genus have been recognized in southern Africa: P. sulcata
(Santonian) and P. igodaensis (late Campanian—early Maastrichtian), whilst
Krémmelbein (1972) recorded ?Pondoina sp. from the Turonian Sibang
Formation of Gabon, and the ?Coniacian Macau Formation of north-east Brazil.
This suggests a Turonian to late Campanian—early Maastrichtian range for the
genus. No species referable to the genus was recorded from the Turonian to
Maastrichtian of Tanzania by Bate & Bayliss (1969). A link might have been
expected in view of the close similarity in some other species between south-east
Africa and Tanzania.
Pondoina sulcata Dingle, 1969
Fig. 11A—F
Pondoina sulcata Dingle, 1969: 356-358, fig. 6; 1980: 20, fig. 9C.
Remarks
SEM photographs of topotypic specimens are included here to supplement
the original description. In particular, attention is drawn to the strongly
150 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
SOON QUIEN
=
Fig. 11. Pondoina sulcata, Umzamba, Santonian III. A. SAM—PC6507, LV, bed 3, SEM 570.
B. SAM-—PC6508, RV, bed 3, SEM 572. C. SAM-—PC6509, internal LV, bed 3, SEM 561.
D. SAM-PC6510, internal RV, bed 3, SEM 554. E. SAM—PC6509, muscle scars, LV, bed 3,
SEM 569. F. SAM-—PC6511, bed 7, SEM 2086.
Scale bars: A-D, F = 100p, E = 30p.
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 151
antimerodont hinge, difference in lateral outline between LV and RV, and the
MS (which has a distinctive ‘clover-leaf’ arrangement of the dorsal two elements
of the adductors, and the divided antennal scar).
Age and distribution
Pondoina sulcata ranges Santonian II to Santonian III in its type section at
Umzamba, and occurs in small numbers in the lower part of Santonian III in the
Richards Bay borehole.
Family Schizocytheridae Mandelstam, 1960
Genus Amphicytherura Butler & Jones, 1957
Amphicytherura tumida Dingle, 1969
Fig. 12A-E
Amphicytherura (Amphicytherura) tumida Dingle, 1969: 368-370, fig. 13; 1980: 20-21,
fig. 1OA—F; 1981: 49-50, figs 23C, 25A.
Remarks
This species has not been found at outcrop in Zululand, although it is
relatively common in BH9 and at Umzamba, where it can be used as a zone fossil
at the top of Santonian III. Some specimens from Santonian III at Umzamba
have a slightly extended AM outline compared to the topotypic material in
Santonian II.
Age and distribution
Santonian II—Campanian I at Umzamba and Richards Bay borehole.
Genus Apateloschizocythere Bate, 1972
Apateloschizocythere? cf. mclachlani Dingle, 1981
lay, WA
?Amphicytherura sp. Dingle, 1971b: 404—405, fig. 7.
Remarks
The five small and poorly preserved specimens recorded by Dingle (19715)
have been photographed with SEM. Although generic assignment is still
uncertain, they are very similar to a species described by Dingle (1981: 54—57,
fig. 26A—-B) from the Campanian III of Zululand. The genus has also been
recorded from the Maastrichtian II of the Agulhas Bank (Apateloschizocythere
laminata (Dingle, 1971b)).
Age and distribution
Lower Coniacian, sample TBD 510, Alphard Formation, Agulhas Bank.
SZ ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 12. A-E. Amphicytherura tumida. A. SAM-PC6512, LV, Umzamba bed 3,
Santonian III, SEM 295. B. SAM-PC6513, RV, Umzamba bed 3, Santonian III, SEM 298.
C. SAM-K5594, RV, BH9 Richards Bay, 125,0 m, Santonian III, SEM 317. D. SAM-PC6514,
RV, Umzamba bed 3, Santonian III, SEM 2059. E. SAM-PC6515, carapace, dorsal view,
Umzamba bed 3, Santonian III, SEM 299.
F. Apateloschizocythere? cf. mclachlani SAM-PC6516, RV, TBD 510, Agulhas Bank,
Alphard Formation, Lower Coniacian, SEM 1882.
Scale bars = 100 wu.
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 153
Genus Cnestocythere Triebel, 1950
Cnestocythere? sp. 2091
Fig. 13A—B
?Cnestocythere sp. Dingle, 1969: 370-371, fig. 14.
Remarks
This specimen was illustrated by Dingle (1969), but SEM photographs
show the hinge to be damaged, so that it may not originally have been merodont.
This casts further doubt upon its generic placement. No further specimens
of this species have been recovered. An SAM serial number (PC6517)
has been allocated to the original specimen, which supersedes UCT number
MG-1-2-10.
Age and distribution
Santonian III, Umzamba.
Fig. 13. Cnestocythere? sp. 2091, SAM—PC6517, Umzamba bed 3, Santonian III.
A. External RV, SEM 2091. B. Internal RV, SEM 2155.
Scale bars = 100 p.
Family Brachycytheridae Puri, 1954
Genus Brachycythere Alexander, 1933
Brachycythere is one of the key genera for an understanding of the routes and
timing of ostracod population movements from the Equatorial Atlantic into the
South Gondwana province after the mid-Cretaceous hiatus. In southern Africa,
five species have been recognized: two appear in the Coniacian (B. longicaudata
and B. agulhasensis); and three appear in the Santonian (B._ sicarius,
B. pondolandensis, and B. rotunda).
154 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fourteen species of Brachycythere have so far been recorded from Africa,
and a further seven from nearby areas in the Middle East. Their ranges have been
plotted in Table 6, outlines of holotypes and topotypes are illustrated in
Figure 14, and their length/height scattergrams are shown in Figure 15. The
earliest records are in Cenomanian strata: B. cf. sapucariensis (Tunisia— Bismuth
et al. 1981); B. gr. sapucariensis (Gabon—Grosdidier 1979); B. sapucariensis by
Schaller (1969, reported in Reyment 1980a) from north-east Brazil; and B. aff.
ekpo (Morocco—Oertli 1963). Brachycythere sapucariensis and closely related
forms have been widely reported from north-east Brazil and various localities in
equatorial, west and north Africa, as far east as Tunisia, and range into the
Coniacian. As will be discussed below, it is closely related to the main southern
African species (B. longicaudata). The only other widely reported species is
B. angulata from Egypt (Turonian), Nigeria (Coniacian), Senegal and Lebanon
(Coniacian—Santonian), Cameroon (Santonian), and Israel (Santonian to Maas-
trichtian).
For the present investigation, it is important to note that the genus
Brachycythere was well represented in the Equatorial Atlantic and North Africa
(probably five species) by Cenomanian—early Turonian times, but that no species
of the genus occur in southern Africa or any other South Gondwana locality
before the local mid-Cretaceous non-sequence. This hiatus locally ranges in age
from late Cenomanian to late Turonian or early Coniacian.
Brachycythere longicaudata (Chapman, 1904)
Figs 16A—D, 17A—D
Cytheridea longicaudata Chapman, 1904: 234-235, pl. 39 (fig. 21). Howe & Laurencich, 1958:
DY).
Cythere ?drupracea (non Jones, 1884) Chapman, 1904: 234.
Brachycythere longicaudata (Chapman) Dingle, 1969: 358-361, fig. 7; 1980: 25—26, figs 12ZA—C,
13A-D; 1981: 71-72, fig. 34B-C.
Brachycythere aff. sapucariensis Krommelbein, 1964, Bate, 1969, in Bate & Bayliss: 137-138,
164, pl. 7 (fig. 1) (partim (BMNH 10790)).
Remarks
Specimens collected from Coniacian outcrops in Zululand plot within the
overall species field on a length/height scattergram, but overlap the subfields of
Santonian and Campanian—Maastrichtian material (Fig. 15). This distribution
illustrates one aspect of the considerable intraspecific morphological variation
that is apparent within the species B. longicaudata: generally Santonian
specimens are larger and more elongate, whereas the Campanian—Maastrichtian
individuals are smaller and somewhat squatter. The new Coniacian samples
suggest that the earliest representatives were similar in character to the
Campanian varieties and that environmental conditions during Santonian times
were favoured by larger and more elongate varieties. Although individuals within
the overall Coniacian to Maastrichtian populations could be assigned to separate
155
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA
‘ODD010J
W
‘eluezuey = Z], ‘eIstuNy,, = J, ‘eolyy yIN0S = VS ‘jedoueS = § ‘IIOSIN = N
‘ourgey] = 7] “oes, = Sp “eIpuy = Uy ‘uLIyT =
‘(€Q6T) UlaIssIUOHZ ‘(p961) PO UOp URA ‘Jo Sapnyjoul Odya asaysAoKyooig
961) NV Sopnpoul YypnvII8BU0] aday AIK YODAG
‘(€Q61) UloIssIUOH ‘(ZL6T) WRI IS 2 ONOWRG
[ “uogey =
(6
H WdAsq = q ‘UooIOUIeD = D ‘JIzelg = gq ‘vuos[y = V
‘SUONRIADIQGY
‘I861 (7) Ja yINUIsIg UI = ,.
cn +
‘(po6l) PlOM Usp UA ‘(EOHT) NOSIJOISOdy ‘(QOBT) JUDWIADY ‘(6961 ‘IS6T) JJOXOIH :Aq poquosop se ‘{‘"jye sopnpoul vyyjnsup “1d asayiAoKyovIG ‘7
Il UO
“TISery
Ij}A AT Ill I
Ij tl I
‘uojUuRS
IA ANE METI
uvlorluog
yi fat
uviuedues) ‘INL
1 W
W935 Ay[eo0'7T
096] ‘jUoUIADY
096] “UsUIADY
096] ‘WUoUkoYy
9961 “epMOH
IL61 “eyNny
€Q6] ‘Ulo}SsIUOH]
€L6] ‘1OIpIpso1g
6961 ‘9[suIG
6961 ‘9[suId
O861 ‘9IsuUIq
€L6] ‘1OIpIpso1g
€L61 ‘1OIpIpsorgH
€L6] “1OIpIpso1pH
€L61 ‘1OIpIpso1H
€L61 ‘1OIpIpso1H
096] ‘juoUIAdY
GI Lol ‘suid
Joded sry J,
«1861
“OIRIAT “1S 2 YINUISIg
IS6L ‘JJOYID
(9961) Hose
(€961) 1490
P96] “UlOQ[OWUIWIOLy
DOUIIIJOY
‘svoie SUIPUNOLINS pue BOLITY JO eIRIYS SNODDRIDID Ul adayModyooAG snuds dy) JO UOTNGLYSIp jesodurs |,
9 ATAV |,
(0961) 1USUIADY
‘(€Z61) OPIAINON ‘(9OZ6]) UloqjowUory ‘(1861) 72 12 YINUISIg “(6L6T) JOIpIpsoryD :Aq poquiosop se ‘ye “Jo sapnpoul s2suaipondys “18 adaysAIKYIVIG “|
‘SOION
yopur ‘ds
1unso
DIDULAD
DIDULAD) “13
SISUIAN]IDINY
SISUADAIYSAIAG
§ del
ppunjo
sisuapuvjopuod
SNIADIIS
Ol fal
6 fal
Ol Axl
be Hel
87 OUI
odya
sisuaspyjnsv
DIVPNVIIBUO]
muownp
pI_INSUD “18
puiiof{ppa]
odya ‘ye
sisualdpondps *138
so1oods
=
>
sa
iZ2)
=
=
Z
<
S
me
ea
<
>
eo)
22)
ca
ae
B
fo
eo)
nN
<
g
156
137)
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA
‘1 QOE = Ieq aTeOS
‘undo “g = § ‘bDWUD ‘g = yY ‘(2TeOS 01 JOU)
SISUAANHDINY “{q = O “SA UI a4aysdodyovig = q ‘vpunjos ‘g = GC ‘sisuapuvjopuod ‘g =N ‘snuvois ‘g = W ‘OLL UI a4aysdodyovig = J
‘Of UI saysdodyooig = YI ‘OLA Ul alayidokyovag = ¢ “peH YI adaysKokyooig = | ‘87D YI ataysdokyovug = Ye ‘odya‘g =D
‘sisuaspyjnsy -g = { ‘vJvpnvs1suo] ‘g = J ‘mownp‘g = q ‘njvjnSuv -g = DQ ‘vusofopal ‘g = q ‘sisuatavandys ‘g = Vv
‘diysioyjne pue sosuei 1oj 9g ajqey, 90S ‘seole Ve
yusoe[pe pue eoLIZY JO snOsdeIAI_ 9}¥] puke s[pprut dy) WOT] sordods adayidodyovoig JO susutoods od} Jo sourpno saneieduioy “py “817
OOS
Chae ee
BN per aieenoeentic en Se vewtitnet al Ate i es os! SS onal RE ee == - =
————
R
Fig. 14. Comparative outlines of type specimens of Brachycythere species from the middle and late Cretaceous of Africa and adjacent
areas. See Table 6 for ranges and authorship.
A = B. sapucariensis, B = B. ledaforma, C = B. angulata, D = B. dumoni, E = B. longicaudata, F = B. agulhasensis,
G = B. ekpo, H = Brachycythere IR C28, I = Brachycythere IR H34, J = Brachycythere IR E10, K = Brachycythere IR J9,
L = Brachycythere IRJ10, M = B. sicarius, N = B. pondolandensis, O = B. rotunda, P = BrachycythereIRES, Q = B. kulatturensis
(not to scale), R = B. armata, S = B. oguni.
Scale bar = 300y.
9ST
WNASAW NVOIddVY HLNOS JHL JO STVNNV
VdOOVULSO NVINOLNVS GNV “NVIOVINOD ‘NVINOYNAL
sl
158 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
0,7
all holotypes
\
Sapucariensis
0,3
0,7 0,9 1,1
length
Fig. 15. Length/height scattergram (in mm) of specimens of Brachycythere. Solid line and circles
= type specimens from the middle and late Cretaceous of Africa and adjacent areas; dashed line
and triangles = specimens of B. sapucariensis reported in the literature; maltese cross =
specimens reported as B. aff. sapucariensis by Bate & Bayliss (1969).
Key to species: 1= B.ekpo, 2= 8B. rotunda, 3 = BrachycythereIRE10, 4 = Brachycythere
IR C28, 5 = B. angulata, 6 = Brachycythere IR J10, 7 = B. sapucariensis, 8 = B. armata,
9 = B. kulatturensis, 10 = Brachycythere IR J9, 11 = B. oguni, 12 = B. dumoni, 13 = Brachy-
cythere IR ES, 14 = B. ledaformis (as reported by Masoli (1966)), 15 = B. agulhasensis,
16 = Brachycythere IR H34, 17 = B. pondolandensis, 18 = B. sicarius, 19 = B. longicaudata.
morphotypes on the grounds of lateral outline, such subdividsion has been found
impractical because the bulk of the populations would then fall into intermediate
categories. In terms of lateral outline (regardless of valve size) this poses
problems in discriminating B. longicaudata from certain other species, notably
B. sapucariensis.
On a length/height scattergram of holotypic (and neotypic) specimens of
Brachycythere from Africa and adjacent areas, the types of B. longicaudata and
B. sapucariensis are widely separated, and in lateral outline are clearly
differentiated (Fig. 17). This distinction is also seen in other points of
morphological difference: curvature of AM, shape of VM, shape and spinosity of
posteroventral area. The two types are Santonian and Coniacian age, respec-
tively. However, several other workers have reported Kr6mmelbein’s Brazilian
species from localities in west and north Africa, and if representatives of these
materials are compared in shape (but not size) to the general population of
B. longicaudata, the distinctions become blurred. On a length/height scattergram
the B. sapucariensis-related specimens plot to the left of the B. longicaudata
populations and in comparison with other Brachycythere type specimens their
longicaudata
1,3
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 159
Fig. 16. A-—D. Brachycythere longicaudata. A. SAM-—PC6518, neotype, RV, Umzamba bed 1,
Santonian II, SEM 2089. B. BMNH Io790, RV, Wami River area, Luzangazi Stream, Tanzania,
Upper Turonian, SP7/848. C. SAM-—PC6519, LV, locality 16-1, Mtubatuba, Coniacian III,
SEM 1939. D. SAM-PC6520, LV, locality 15-5, Mtubatuba, Coniacian IV, SEM 1922.
E-F. Brachycythere agulhasensis, TBD 510, Agulhas Bank, Alphard Formation, Lower
Coniacian. E. SAM-—PC6522, holotype, LV, SEM 1806. F. SAM-—PC6542, internal LV,
SEM 1807. Scale bars: A-C = 300u, D-F = 100yp.
160 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
—_
Cae
C
E
D i
ee
> Co
Fig. 17. Outline of Brachycythere species, LV. A-D. B. longicaudata.
A. SAM-—PC6520, locality 15-5, Mtubatuba, Coniacian IV, SEM 1922.
B. SAM-PC6519, locality 16-1, Mtubatuba, Coniacian III, SEM 1939.
C. SAM-K5604, BH9 Richards Bay, 92,27 m, Campanian I, SEM 549.
D. SAM-PC6521, Umzamba bed 3, Santonian III, SEM 534.
E. B. sapucariensis, SMF Xe2990, holotype, Aracaju, Brazil, Coniacian.
Arrowed locations show significant differences in lateral outline
between B. longicaudata and B. sapucariensis.
field includes the holotypes of B. angulata Grekoff, B. armata Reyment,
B. kulatturensis Guha, and B. dumoni Bismuth & St. Marc, as well as several of
the morphotypes recorded by Grosdidier (1979) from Iran. At this stage, with the
exception of the topotypic material illustrated by Krémmelbein (1964), no
consistent subdivision can be made between many members of the two
populations other than one based on overall size.
Bate (in Bate & Bayliss 1969) recorded B. aff. sapucariensis from the Upper
Turonian of Tanzania. In the subsequent discussion to this paper, Bate (p. 164)
compares his specimen more closely with B. longicaudata. An SEM photograph
of the more elongate specimen recorded by Bate (BMNH 10790) (Fig. 16B)
confirms this closeness, and I regard this as the earliest record of Chapman’s
species.
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 161
Age and distribution
The uncertainty engendered by the apparent wide intraspecific morphologi-
cal variations within B. sapucariensis and B. longicaudata make temporal and
spatial ranges difficult to assign. The type specimens come from the Coniacian
Sapucari Formation, eastern Brazil, and Santonian I] at Umzamba, respectively.
It should be noted that Kr6mmelbein (1964) originally considered the Brazilian
material to be Lower Turonian in age, but has since revised his estimate to
Coniacian (?Lower) (Kr6mmelbein 1976: 543-544).
Taken at face value, the reported distribution of B. sapucariensis is Lower
Cenomanian to ?Lower Coniacian, with the earliest records from Gabon and
Morocco. Brachycythere longicaudata has its earliest record in the Upper
Turonian of Tanzania, and in southern Africa is known to range Coniacian III
(locality 16—1, Mtubatuba) to Maastrichtian II (Nibela) in Zululand, and farther
south an incomplete range of Santonian II to Campanian I is recorded at
Umzamba. It occurs in the late Campanian—early Maastrichtian at Igoda. The
species has not been recorded from the Agulhas Bank (although no Santonian or
Campanian faunas have yet been described from this area).
Brachycythere agulhasensis Dingle, 1971
. Figs 16E-F, 18A
Brachycythere agulhasensis Dingle, 1971b: 399-400, fig. 3.
Remarks
No further specimens of this species have been encountered. SEM
photographs of the holotype are included here, and some of the points on which
B. agulhasensis differs from B. longicaudata are emphasized: it has a shorter, but
more massive hinge with a particularly deep, rounded ATE, a coarsely crenulate
ME, and a relatively short, high PTE; a coarse surface reticulation, and a
relatively low length/height ratio (1,61 cf. mean 2,02 for all specimens of
B. longicaudata plotted on Figure 15). The holotype, originally designated
MG-—2-1-—25, has been transferred to the South African Museum under the
number SAM—PC6522.
Age and distribution
Brachycythere agulhasensis is known only from the Lower Coniacian
Alphard Formation of the Agulhas Bank (sample TBD 510).
Brachycythere sicarius Dingle, 1980
Fig. 18B
Brachycythere sicarius Dingle, 1980: 27-29, figs 13F, 14A—F; 1981: 72-73, fig. 35A.
162 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 18. Brachycythere. A. B. agulhasensis, SAM—PC6522, holotype, MS, LV, TBD 510,
Agulhas Bank, Alphard Formation, Lower Coniacian, SEM 1809. B. B.. sicarius,
SAM-—PC6523, RV, Umzamba bed 3, Santonian III, SEM 2058. C. B. pondolandensis,
SAM-—PC6524, holotype, LV, Umzamba bed 1, Santonian II, SEM 2112. D. B. pondo-
landensis, SAM—PC6525, RV, Umzamba bed 1, Santonian II, SEM 2115. E. B. rotunda,
SAM-—PC6526, holotype, LV, Umzamba bed 1, Santonian II, SEM 2092. F. B. rotunda,
SAM-PC6527, RV, Umzamba bed 1B, Santonian II, SEM 2049.
Scale bars: A = 30m, B—C = 300pu, D-F = 100wu.
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 163
Remarks
Morphological similarities suggest that B. sicarius evolved from B. longi-
caudata in early Santonian times. It shows a similar range of intraspecific
variations to its progenitor, in addition to which the earliest populations suggest
that, as in the case of B. longicaudata, they lie at the elongate end of the length/
height scattergram.
Age and distribution
Santonian II (Richards Bay BH9 borehole) to Maastrichtian I (outcrops) in
Zululand, and Santonian II] at Umzamba.
Brachycythere pondolandensis Dingle, 1969
Figs 18C—D, 19
Brachycythere pondolandensis Dingle, 1969: 361-362, fig. 8.
Remarks
The holotype and one paratype are re-illustrated here with SEM photo-
graphs, which emphasize the fine ribbing and foveolate-like ornamentation of the
anterior and posterior regions of this distinctive, but rare, species. The MS
pattern is unusual in having a subdivided top scar in the adductor set (Fig. 19).
New numbers have been allocated to the re-illustrated specimens following their
transfer to the South African Museum: holotype (MG—1-1-6) = SAM-—PC6524;
paratype (MG-—1-1-8) = SAM-—PC6525.
——
&
yb
Figs 19: Muscle scars of Brachycythere pondolandensis,
SAM-PC6581, LV, Umzamba bed 3, Santonian III, SEM 529.
Scale bar = 30 wn.
Age and distribution
Brachycythere pondolandensis has a restricted range in time and space: it
occurs in Santonian II and III strata only at Umzamba and Richards Bay BH9
borehole. No specimens were recovered from the Santonian locality 74 (False
Bay), but as noted previously (Dingle 1980), the species appears to be particu-
larly susceptible to decalcification and is often poorly preserved in otherwise
164 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
well-preserved faunas. Potentially, B. pondolandensis is a good Santonian zone
fossil for south-east Africa south of 29°S.
Brachycythere rotunda Dingle, 1969
Fig. 18E-F
Brachycythere rotunda Dingle, 1969: 362-363, fig. 9.
Remarks
SEM stereopairs of the holotype show it to have a shallow longitudinal
median depression in the vicinity of mid-length, a faint, coarse, widely-spaced
reticulate ornamentation in a posteromedian position, a deep circular ocular
depression flanked posteriorly by a lateral cheek, and a marked, almost alate
upswing of the VM at its posterior extremity. A relatively well-preserved
specimen from the lowest Santonian beds at Umzamba is also assigned to the
species. It has a coarse reticulate ornament in the posterior area, and a median
longitudinal depression. In Figure 15, B. rotunda plots to the left-hand side of the
length/height scattergram, where it is well displaced from the B. longicaudata
field, and lies closest to the types of B. ekpo and Brachycythere sp. IR E10. The
holotype, originally designated MG—1-2-2, has been transferred to the South
African Museum under the number SAM—PC6526.
Age and distribution
Brachycythere rotunda is rare and is known only from the Santonian II at
Umzamba.
Family Collisarborisidae Neale, 1975
Genus Paraphysocythere Dingle, 1969
Paraphysocythere thompsoni Dingle, 1969
Fig. 20A—C
Paraphysocythere thompsoni Dingle, 1969: 365-366, fig. 11.
Remarks
SEM photographs of topotypic material are included here to supplement the
original descriptions. In particular, attention is drawn to the delicate rib pattern in
the anterior area and the overall fine intercostal reticulation.
Age and distribution
Although additional material has been collected since Dingle’s (1969)
original records, neither the spatial nor temporal range of this species has been
extended. It is known only from the Santonian II to III of Umzamba. This
distribution suggests that it may be a good zone fossil for Santonian strata in
south-east Africa south of about 31°S.
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 165
Fig. 20. Paraphysocythere thompsoni, Umzamba bed 3, Santonian III. A. SAM—PC6528, LV,
SEM 479. B-C. SAM-PC6529, LV. B. Internal view, SEM 480. C. MS, SEM 482.
Scale bars: A-B = 100 yp, C = 30un.
Family Progonocytheridae Sylvester-Bradley, 1948
Subfamily Protocytherinae Lubimova, 1955
Genus Veenia Butler & Jones, 1957
Veenia obesa Dingle, 1969
Fig. 21A—F
Veenia obesa Dingle, 1969: 366-368, fig. 12.
Remarks
Despite extensive collecting, no specimens of this distinctive species have
been recorded in Zululand at outcrop or in the Richards Bay BH9 borehole.
Some of the type material used by Dingle (1969), as well as additional specimens
collected from Umzamba during the present study are illustrated here. SEM
photographs show that the ATE in RV is somewhat more pointed than originally
166 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 21. Veenia obesa. A. SAM-PC6530, holotype, LV, Umzamba bed 1, Santonian II,
SEM 2095. B. SAM-PC6531, RV, Umzamba bed 1, Santonian II, SEM 2100. C. SAM—PC6532,
internal view, RV, Umzamba bed 1, Santonian II, SEM 2097. D. SAM-—PC6533, LV, Umzamba
bed 5, Santonian III, SEM 2070. E. SAM—PC6534, carapace, dorsal view, Umzamba bed 5,
Santonian III, SEM 2071. F. SAM—PC6535, LV, Umzamba bed 1B, Santonian II, SEM 2051.
Scale bars = 100 p.
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 167
illustrated, but that the reference to a ‘crenulate groove’ as the LV ME is
unproven and may be the result of poor preservation. Although the MS pattern
still cannot be properly observed, the anterior scar is definitely hook-shaped. The
oldest specimen recovered, from the lowest beds exposed at the base of the
Umzamba cliff section, has a concavity at the posterior end of the VM, but this
may be caused by slight crushing of the specimen. New catalogue numbers have
been allocated to the type material following transfer to the South African
Museum: holotype MG—1-—2-6 = SAM-PC6530; paratype MG—1-—2-8 = SAM-
PC6531; MG—1-2-7 = SAM-PC6532.
Age and distribution
Veenia obesa is confined to Santonian II to III strata at Umzamba, where it
reaches 15 per cent of the total ostracod population at the base of the Santonian
III zone. It is absent from the highest ostracod-bearing sample collected in
Santonian III.
Family Cytherideidae Sars, 1925
Genus Krithe Brady, Crosskey & Robertson, 1874
This genus, which is indicative of relatively deep-water environments, is
relatively abundant in the Campanian [V—Maastrichtian II of Zululand, and has
been recorded in the Maastrichtian of the J(c)—1 borehole. The present study
records the earliest appearance of the genus in southern Africa (Upper
Cenomanian).
Krithe sp. 2329
Fig. 22A-B
Remarks
No internal views were available for this species (2 carapaces), but it differs
from K. nibelaensis, which is the important Campanian—Maastrichtian Zululand
species, by its larger overall size, and lower length/height ratio: Krithe sp. 2329 =
1,74; K. nibelaensis = 2,07.
Age and distribution
Uppermost Cenomanian (2 201 m, 7 720 ft) to Turonian (2 152 m, 7 076 ft),
J(c)—1 borehole.
Krithe sp. 2332
Fics 22€
Remarks
One crushed carapace of an elongate species. Its valve outline serves to
distinguish it from Krithe sp. 2329 and K. nibelaensis, but its relationship to Krithe
sp. A from the Maastrichtian of the J(c)—1 borehole (Dingle 1981), which is also
relatively elongate, is not known.
168 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Fig. 22. Krithe, J(c)-1 borehole. A. Krithe sp. 2329, SAM-—PC6536, RV, 2 152 m, Turonian,
SEM 2330. B. Krithe sp. 2329, SAM-—PC6537, LV, 2 201 m, Upper Cenomanian, SEM 2333.
C. Krithe sp. 2332, SAM-—PC6538, RV, 2 176 m, Turonian, SEM 2331.
Scale bars: A-B = 100p, C = 300p.
Age and distribution
Turonian, 2 176 m (7 140 ft), J(c)—1 borehole.
Family Trachyleberididae Sylvester-Bradley, 1948
Subfamily Unicapellinae Dingle, 1981
Seven genera have been recognized in this subfamily, which was at its most
diverse in the late Cretaceous. All range into the Maastrichtian, and five occur in
Campanian strata (Fig. 23). Unicapella is the first to appear (Coniacian), but
Herrigocythere, Dutoitella, Paleoabyssocythere, and Atlanticythere all have their
first records more or less simultaneously (Campanian) in widely scattered
locations (?California, southern Africa, south Atlantic). Benson’s (1977) and
Dingle’s (1981) work suggests that the Southern Hemisphere genera had adapted
to relatively deep-water environments during the Cretaceous, and that some
persisted into the Tertiary as typical deep-water, cosmopolitan taxa. Similar
|
HERRIGOCY THERE Ce)
Oe
PALEOABYSSOCYTHERE =)
ATLANTICYTHERE @)-2=-
Cre
APHRIKANECY THERE © o 8 i)
Liz je
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 169
Con San Cam Maas __ Pal Eoc . Olig
é SA
UNICAPELLA See ©) ) eee SS os anew
DUTOITELLA OG
SAO
KEFIELLA eo
OSs
Fig. 23. Ranges of genera of the subfamily Unicapellinae. Key to localities: SA = south-east
Africa, T = Tanzania, E = Europe, C = California, SAO = South Atlantic Ocean,
TU = Tunisia. References cited in the text.
conclusions were reached by Donze et al. (1982) on the Tunisian forms, where
Kefiella and Aphrikanecythere inhabited oxygen-depleted waters (4-5 ml/f) at
400-500 m depths on the upper continental slope.
Genus Unicapella Dingle, 1980
Three species of this genus are known from southern Africa, only one of
which occurs in Coniacian—Santonian strata (Table 7): U. stragulata
(Coniacian—Santonian); U. sacsi (Campanian—Maastrichtian); and U. reticulata
(Campanian).
Unicapella stragulata sp. nov.
Fig. 24A—F
Derivation of name
Latin stragulum (carpet, rug)—fanciful reference to the carpet-like texture
of surface ornamentation.
Mio
170 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 7
Distribution of Unicapella and Dutoitella in south-east Africa.
Coniacian Santonian Campanian Maastrichtian
Unicapella
stragulata
reticulata
SACS
Dutoitella
mimica
dutoiti
Holotype
SAM-—PC6539, RV, locality 15-7, Mtubatuba, Coniacian IV.
Paratypes
SAM-—PC6540, RV, locality 74-13, False Bay, Santonian III.
SAM-PC6541, LV, locality 74—9, False Bay, Santonian ?II.
Diagnosis
Species with short, elliptical ventrolateral ridge, ornamented overall with
coarse primary, and fine secondary reticulation.
Description
External features. Elongate nodose appearance. AM broadly rounded with
numerous coarse spines, PM bluntly acuminate, asymmetrically so in LV. DM
straight, but obscured by lateral surface elevations, VM straight, but obscured
about mid-length by slight ventral overhang of lateral surface, and in RV there is
a distinct concavity in the anteroventral position. There is a prominent, broad
anterior hinge ear in LV. Surface ornamentation dominated by smooth, dome-
like SCT. Large complex bullae occur in posteroventral and posterodorsal
positions. DM has a line of four high, rounded, perforate tubercles, and VM has a
wide, short, rounded and curved ventrolateral ridge that incorporates three
indistinct tubercles. Further tubercles occur in posterior and median areas. There
is a small indented lip on the anteroventral end of the nodous AM rim. Intercostal
and internodose areas ornamented with a coarse but indistinct network of narrow
ribs, forming a primary reticulation. There is a secondary fine reticulation that
imparts a textured appearance that fancifully resembles a carpet. Large and small
punctate nodes act as foci for the primary reticulation.
Internal features. No satisfactory interior views.
Remarks
Unicapella stragulata is very close to U. sacsi, and differentiation is based on
subtle differences in disposition of surface nodes and primary reticulation
patterns in the anterior area. These can be summarized (Fig. 25):
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA FAL
*
Fig. 24. Unicapella stragulata sp. nov. A-—C. SAM-—PC6539, holotype, RV, locality 15-7,
Mtubatuba, ConiacianITV. A.SEM 1948. B. Detail of posterior area, SEM 1951. C. Detail of
anterior area, SEM 1950. D. SAM-—PC6540, RV, locality 74-13, False Bay, Santonian III,
SEM 1868. E-F. SAM-—PC6541, LV, locality 74-9, False Bay, Santonian II. E. SEM 1789.
F. Detail of area posterior to SCT, SEM 1791. Scale bars: A-B, D-F = 100, C = 30m.
172 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
i] ~—rN A
an ©
°
Fig. 25. Comparison of outline of holotypes of Unicapella.
Significant differences are arrowed. A. U. stragulata sp. nov.,
SAM-PC6539, RV, locality 15-7, Mtubatuba, Coniacian IV,
SEM 1948. B. U. sacsi SAM-K5610, BH9 Richards Bay,
88,39 m, Campanian II, SEM 343.
Scale bars = 300 pn.
(i) Ventrolateral area: in U. stragulata the ornamentation consists of a large
bulla and a smooth ridge, whereas in U. sacsi there is an additional large
node between the bulla and ridge.
(ii) Posterodorsal area: in U. stragulata there is a short angled rib in the RV,
which is lacking in U. sacsi, whereas in U. sacsi in both valves there are two
small prominent punctate nodes immediately posterior of the posterodorsal
bulla.
(iii) Ornamentation of the anterior area: in U. sacsi there is a broad band of
noticeably fine foveolate ornamentation bounded by the AM rim and a
narrow primary rib line. This band is lacking in U. stragulata, which has a
subtly different primary reticulation pattern, but no noticeable fining in the
anteriormost secondary reticulation.
The closeness of the two species strongly suggests that U. sacsi developed
directly from U. stragulata by a slight reorganization of its ornamentation during
late Santonian—early Campanian time.
Dimensions (mm)
length height
PC6539 Ot 0,36
PC6540 0,70 0,38
PC6541 0,74 0,41
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 17s
Age and distribution
Unicapella stragulata is known to range Coniacian IV (Mtubatuba) to
Santonian III (False Bay) in Zululand.
Genus Dutoitella Dingle, 1981
Dutoitella mimica Dingle, 1981
Fig. 26A-B
Genus C sp. Bate, 1969, in Bate & Bayliss: 143, pl. 7 (fig. 15).
Trachyleberis schizospinosa Dingle, 1971b: 406-408, fig. 10 (partim).
Dutoitella mimica Dingle, 1981: 88-91, figs 37F, 41A—-F, 42A—B, 43B, 44B.
Remarks
One worn carapace has been recovered from the J(c)—1 borehole below the
levels recorded by Dingle (1981). There is no significant morphological difference
between the J(c)—1 specimens and those from the Agulhas Bank. The levels at
which this species occur in J(c)—1 are thought to represent intermediate water
depths (?100-—200 m).
Fig. 26. Dutoitella mimica, J(c)—-1 borehole. A. SAM-—PC6543, LV, 2 030 m, Santonian,
SEM 2316. B. SAM-—K5752, LV, 1 811 m, Maastrichtian, SEM 1287.
Scale bars: A = 300yu, B = 100 yp.
Age and distribution
Santonian—Maastrichtian, J(c)-1 borehole: levels 2 030 m (Santonian),
1 871m (Campanian), 1 811m (Maastrichtian); Maastrichtian III (sample
TBD 818, Agulhas Bank), and Maastrichtian (Tanzania, as Genus C sp. Bate,
1969).
Subfamily Trachyleberidinae Sylvester-Bradley, 1948
Genus Cythereis Jones, 1849
Altogether five species of this genus have been recorded from east and
south-east Africa in Turonian to Maastrichtian strata (Table 8).
174 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 8
Distribution of Cythereis in south-east Africa.
@accise Coniacian Santonian Campanian
P IW WIiv Vil WW WW |} 1 See
Locality
Umzamba transkeiensis
BH9 transkeiensis
klingeri
Zululand transkeiensis
klingeri
mfoloziensis
cf. Juzangaziensis
Cythereis klingeri Dingle, 1980
Figs 27A-F, 28A—B, 30C-—D, 31A-E
Cythereis klingeri Dingle, 1980: 34-38, figs 18B—F, 19A—F; 1981: 108-109, fig. 52A.
Remarks
Dingle (1980) noted that there is considerable intraspecific morphological
variation in this species in samples from the Richards Bay BH9 borehole
(Santonian II to Campanian II). In general terms this gives rise to two main
morphotypes: FP (with flared dorsal ridges and pointed PM, especially in LV),
and SQ (with subdued dorsal ridges and a more quadrate PM in LV). The
holotype of the species belongs to the FP morphotype, and although this variety is
more abundant in the Campanian and younger sediments, both types do occur in
the oldest sediments in the Richards Bay BH9 borehole (Santonian II). The
oldest record of C. klingeri is in the Coniacian IV, where the species is relatively
abundant. Here the specimens are morphologically intermediate between the
main FP and SQ morphs, but tend to have more characters typical of the former.
This distribution leads to two conclusions: firstly that the two morphs are not
sexual dimorphs, and secondly that the FP morph, although more abundant in the
younger strata in BH9, was not a later development.
Cythereis klingeri is closely related to C. luzangaziensis from the Upper
Turonian of Tanzania (Bate & Bayliss 1969) (Figs 28D, 31G—H), but differs
principally in the shape of the ventrolateral ridge. In C. /uzangaziensis, this ridge
loops round at its posterior termination to form a narrow but prominent rib on the
ventral surface that runs anteriorly, but is not contiguous with the AM rim. This
ventral surface rib does not occur in C. klingeri. A phylogenetic relationship
between the two species seems very probable, with speciation into C. klingeri
taking place in Coniacian I-III time.
Age and distribution
Cythereis klingeri occurs in Santonian II to Campanian III strata in BH9
borehole, and in Coniacian IV (locality 15-9 to 15-15, Mtubatuba) and
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 175
Fig. 27. Cythereis klingeri. A. SAM-—K5617, LV, BH9 Richards Bay, 82,03 m, Campanian II,
FP variety, SEM 158. B. SAM-K5616, holotype, RV, BH9 Richards Bay, 82,03 m,
Campanian II, FP variety, SEM 165. C. SAM-K5622, LV, BH9 Richards Bay, 157,0 m,
Santonian IT, SQ variety, SEM 200. D. SAM-—PC6544, RV, BH9 Richards Bay, 151,1 m,
Santonian II, SQ variety, SEM 195. E. SAM-PC6545, LV, locality 15-5, Mtubatuba,
Coniacian IV, FP variety, SEM 2035. F. SAM-—PC6546, RV, locality 15-5, Mtubatuba,
Coniacian IV, SQ variety, SEM 2036.
Scale bars: A-E = 100p, F = 300 wu.
176 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
meaner
wi
Fig. 28. Cythereis. A-B. C. klingeri, SAM-K5620, RV, BH9, Richards Bay, 157,0 m,
Santonian II. A. ATE, SEM 207. B. PTE, SEM 208. C. C. cf. luzangaziensis, SAM-PC6547,
LV, locality 15-5, Mtubatuba, Coniacian IV, SEM 1936. D. C. luzangaziensis,
BMNH 10792, holotype, RV, Wami River area, Luzangazi Stream, Tanzania, Turonian,
SP7/846. E-F. C. mfoloziensis sp. nov., SAM-—PC6548, holotype, LV, locality 16-1,
Mtubatuba, Coniacian II. E. SEM 1941. F. Internal view, SEM 2159.
Scale bars: A-B = 30, C = 100m, D-F = 300.
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 177
Campanian II to Maastrichtian II (Mfolozi and Nibela areas) at outcrop in
Zululand. It does not occur in Santonian—Campanian strata at Umzamba. Dingle
(1981) concluded that it is an environmentally tolerant species, but that it
probably preferred relatively shallow (<100 m) water.
Cythereis cf. luzangaziensis Bate, 1969
Figs 28C, 311
Cythereis luzangaziensis Bate, 1969 in Bate & Bayliss: 134, pl. 6 (fig. 10).
Remarks
One specimen showing the characteristic ventrolateral ridge loop has been
found in the present study. It differs from the Tanzanian material by having a
marked depression (almost a break) between the median longitudinal ridge and
the SCT. There is a relatively good population of C. klingeri in the sample so I am
confident that this specimen is not a morphotype of this species, because there are
several distinct differences: shape of anteriormost lobe on the DM ridge, shape of
SCT, ventrolateral rib pattern, markedly coarser reticulate ornament and
strongly elevated muri and ridges in C. cf. luzangaziensis. Figures 28D and
31G-—H show type specimens of C. /uzangaziensis for comparison.
Age and distribution
Known only from Coniacian IV (locality 15-13, Mtubatuba) in Zululand.
Cythereis mfoloziensis sp. nov.
Figs 28E—F, 31F
Derivation of name
Locality of type—Mfolozi River valley, Zululand.
Holotype
SAM-PC6548, LV, locality 16-1, Mtubatuba area, Coniacian III.
Diagnosis
Species of Cythereis with a complex tubercle lying in an anteroventral
position relative to the SCT.
Description
External features. Elongate subquadrate in outline. AM symmetrically
rounded, PM triangular with apex just below mid-height. DM and VM straight.
Lateral surface carries three prominent longitudinal ridges. Dorsal ridge obscures
DM and is flared with a prominent peak at its anterior end. Median ridge is short,
descends slightly anteriorly, terminates at about mid-length and is linked to the
dorsal ridge by a low saddle. Ventral ridge is straight, terminates posteriorly in a
178 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
right-angled bend towards the VM and anteriorly hooks upward to join the
complex tubercle. SCT is prominent, rounded and is linked by a short rib to the
complex tubercle that lies anteroventrally to it. The latter is formed by a knot of
reticulating muri. There is a strong spinose AM rim. Surface overall is coarsely
reticulate. The eye tubercle is almost turreted at the prominent ACA.
Internal views. Internal features are poorly preserved. MS not seen, and MA
broken. ATE in LV has a prominent process at its anterior end, which indicates a
closer relationship to C. klingeri than to C. transkeiensis, although overall the
ATE of C. mfoloziensis is less massive than in C. klingeri.
Remarks
Cythereis mfoloziensis is closest to C. klingeri, from which it differs on the
following points: its median ridge does not connect to the SCT, it possesses a
tubercle adjacent to the SCT, and has a more prominent posterior termination to
the ventrolateral ridge. The distinctive morphology of C. mfoloziensis justifies the
erection of the species on one specimen only.
Dimensions (mm)
length height
PC6548 1,05 OLS
Age and distribution
Known only from the Coniacian III (locality 16, Mtubatuba) of Zululand.
Cythereis transkeiensis Dingle, 1969
Figs 29A-F, 30A-B
?Cythereis ornatissima Reuss, 1846, var. reticulata [non| Jones & Hinde, 1890, Chapman 1904:
234.
Cythereis transkeiensis Dingle, 1969: 377-378, fig. 18; 1980: 34, fig. 18A; 1981: 109, fig. 52B—C.
Remarks
Closely allied to C. klingeri, C. transkeiensis can be distinguished by its
massive lateral longitudinal ridges and hinge structure. The holotype is illustrated
here (Fig. 30), showing that the hinges of the two species differ as follows: ATE
RV in C. klingeri resembles a right-hand fist, with external ‘thumb’, and in
C. transkeiensis is a left-hand fist; anterior part of ME RV is an enclosed hollow
in C. transkeiensis, but has no posterior wall in C. klingeri; ATE LV in C. klingeri
has a posterior projection on the anterior wall, while this is lacking in C. trans-
keiensis. Bate’s Cythereis sp. C (in Bate & Bayliss 1969, pl. 7 (fig. 4)) is similar in
outline and ornamentation to C. transkeiensis.
Age and distribution
Cythereis transkeiensis ranges Santonian II to Campanian I at Umzamba. It is
known from Santonian II in Richards Bay BH9 borehole, Santonian III at
outcrop in Zululand (locality 14, Msunduzi River), and late Campanian—early
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 179
Fig. 29. Cythereis transkeiensis, Umzamba. A. SAM-—PC6549, holotype, RV, bed 1, San-
tonian II, SEM 2121. B. SAM-—PC6550, LV, bed 3, Santonian III, SEM 145. C. SAM-—PC6551,
RV, internal view, bed 3, Santonian III, SEM 147. D. SAM-—PC6552, LV, internal view, bed 3,
Santonian III, SEM 152. E. SAM-PC6551, RV, ATE, bed 3, Santonian III, SEM 149.
F. SAM-—PC6552, LV, ATE, bed 3, Santonian III, SEM 154.
Scale bars: A = 300u, B—D = 100y, E-F = 30.
180 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
RV
transkeiensis
klingeri
Fig. 30. Comparison of anterior terminal hinge elements of
Cythereis transkeiensis and C. klingeri. A. SAM-—PC6551,
Umzamba bed 3, Santonian III. B. SAM—PC6552, Umzamba
bed 3, Santonian II]. C. SAM-—K5620, BH9 Richards Bay,
157,0 m, Santonian II. D. SAM—K5619, BH9 Richards Bay,
157,0 m, Santonian II.
Maastrichtian at Igoda. This is a total range of Santonian II to late Campanian—
early Maastrichtian. Cythereis transkeiensis is rare north of Umzamba, and clearly is
a southern analogue of C. klingeri, which itself is effectively restricted to Zululand.
Genus Haughtonileberis Dingle, 1969
Grosdidier (1979) provisionally assigned five species to Haughtonileberis
from borehole material in Gabon. These are the earliest records of the genus,
with ‘Haughtonileberis’ GA C11 (Upper Albian—Upper Cenomanian), followed
by three Upper Cenomanian appearances.
The earliest representative in south-east Africa is H. haughtoni (Coniacian)
(also recorded by Bate & Bayliss (1969) from the Upper Turonian of Tanzania),
which ranges into the Lower Campanian. Two other species (H. fissilis and
H. vanhoepeni) are known from the Santonian of south-east Africa.
These records suggest a generic range of Upper Albian to Lower Oligocene
(Table 9), with the initial development of the genus in the Equatorial Atlantic
(i.e. north of the Walvis Ridge), and rapid migration into the south-west Indian
Ocean area by Turonian—Coniacian times.
Haughtonileberis haughtoni Dingle, 1969
Fig. 32A—F
Haughtonileberis haughtoni Dingle, 1969: 372-373, fig. 15; 1980: 39, fig. 21LA—E.
Curfsina turonica Bate, 1969, in Bate & Bayliss: 139, pl. 6 (figs 15, 19) (partim (BMNH 1I0783)).
Remarks
Coniacian specimens from south-east Africa are of the squat variety noted by
Dingle (1969, 1980) in the topotypic populations, but they possess the sharper,
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 181
Fig. 31. Comparison of lateral outlines of various species of Cythereis.
A-E. C. klingeri. A. SAM-PC6546, RV, Coniacian IV.
B. SAM-PC6545, LV, Coniacian IV. C. SAM-K5616, RV, Cam-
panian II. D. SAM-—K5617, LV, Campanian II. E. SAM-K5622,
Santonian II. F. C. mfoloziensis sp. nov., SAM-—PC6548, Coniacian III.
G-H. C. luzangaziensis, BMNH 10792, holotype, carapace, Turonian.
G. RV. H. LV. I. C. cf. luzangaziensis, SAM-—PC6547, LV,
Coniacian IV. Scale bars = 300 py.
ASojoydiow seyius ‘(¢€/6]) JOIpIpsoIg = ¢
(7861) ‘79 12 ezuog = ,
(9L61) a18uIq = ,,
(1861) Fsulq = ,
(€8LO] HNW) 221U041n] vuisfinD Jo adkyered duo (696[) ssAeg 2 Weg = §
(6L61) JoIpIpso1g = |
et ie $81 Ul vuyuound:?
NVUl
89190
VISINOL
, SNIDIPDA
SSS ,s1suan]aqiu
>= ae luadaoyuva
eee SUssif
S| Saas: ,S1dagaj1uojysnvy
vorudv HLNOS
§sidagajluojysnvy
VINVZNVL
18d VO
+Sld VO
+0€V VO
Lojojnsuvid
+110 VD
NO@vd
“seoie jusoe[pe pue eBdLIJYV Ul SaqgajiuojysnvyY Jo UoNNQIIIsIq
6 ATaV LL
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
182
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 183
Fig. 32. Haughtonileberis haughtoni. A-B. SAM-—PC6553, holotype, RV, Umzamba bed 1,
Santonian II. A. SEM 2117. B. Detail of anterior area, SEM 2119. C. SAM-PC6554, RV,
locality 15-5, Mtubatuba, Coniacian IV, SEM 1945. D. SAM-PC6556, LV, locality 14-3,
Mtubatuba, Santonian III, SEM 1780. E. BMNH I0783, RV, described by Bate (in Bate &
Bayliss 1969) as paratype of Curfsina turonica, Wami River area, Luzangazi Stream, Tanzania,
Turonian, SP7/854. F. SAM-—PC6555, RV, locality 89, Hluhluwe River, Coniacian IV,
SEM 1943. Scale bars: A, D-F = 100u,B= 30pm. ~
184 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
narrow posteromedian ridge of the Zululand Campanian faunas. Bate (in Bate &
Bayliss 1969) illustrated a specimen, which I consider is H. haughtoni, as a
paratype for his new species Curfsina turonica from the Upper Turonian of
Tanzania. The holotype (pl. 6 (figs 13, 18, BMNH 10784)) differs significantly
from BMNH I[0783 in the following points: shape of the ventrolateral ridge, shape
of median lateral ridge and SCT, shape of PCA, and shape of PM outline.
Of the five species tentatively assigned to Haughtonileberis by Grosdidier
(1979) from Gabon, Haughtonileberis? GA F15 (Upper Cenomanian—Lower
Turonian) is closest to the type species. The main difference is a more prominent
upswing in the posterior part of the ventrolateral rib. Otherwise, the general
outline, ornamentation, and in particular the shape of the median ridge and
adjoined elongate SCT are very similar. The holotype, originally designated
MG-1-1-12, has been transferred to the South African Museum under the
number SAM-—PC6553.
Age and distribution
Upper Turonian of the Luzangazi stream, north of the Wami River,
Tanzania; Coniacian IV (locality 15, Mtubatuba) to Campanian I (locality 74,
False Bay) at outcrop in Zululand; Santonian II. to Campanian I in the Richards
Bay BH9 borehole; and Santonian II to Campanian I at Umzamba cliff. This is
the longest-ranging species of the genus so far recognized: Upper Turonian to
Campanian I. Dingle (1981) concluded that the species was environmentally
tolerant (<100 m to 200 m water depths) but that it preferred shallow-water
(<100 m), low-energy environments with restricted access to the open ocean.
Haughtonileberis fissilis Dingle, 1969
Fig. 33A—D
Haughtonileberis fissilis Dingle, 1969: 374-375, fig. 16; 1980: 39, fig. 22A—B; 1981: 95, fig. 48F.
Remarks
This species is rare in outcrops in Zululand, where the Santonian specimens
belong to the squatter morphotype recognized by Dingle (1980). No significant
morphological differences are noted in specimens at the extremes of the species’s
temporal range. Of the species assigned to Haughtonileberis by Grosdidier
(1979), ‘Haughtonileberis’ GA A30 is closest to H. fissilis, having a distinctly split
anterior end to the median lateral rib. It differs in having a short oblique dorsal
ridge that runs anteriorly from the PCA position. Type material of H. fissilis has
been transferred to the South African Museum and the new numbers are:
MG-1-1-16 = SAM-PC6557, MG-1-1-17 = SAM-PC6559, and MG—1-1-18
= SAM-PC6558.
Age and distribution
Haughtonileberis fissilis ranges Santonian III (Msunduzi River) to Maastrich-
tian I (Mfolozi River) at outcrops in Zululand, Santonian II to Campanian II in
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 185
Fig. 33. A—D. Haughtonileberis fissilis. A-C. Umzamba bed 1, Santonian II. A. SAM-—PC6557,
holotype, LV, SEM 2126. B. SAM-—PC6558, RV, SEM 2129. .C. SAM-—PC65S9, internal, RV,
SEM 254. D. SAM-PC6560, LV, locality 14-1, Mtubatuba, ?Santonian III, SEM 1866.
F. Haughtonileberis vanhoepeni, SAM-—K5632, holotype, RV, BH9, Richards Bay, Campanian I,
SEM 32. Scale bars = 100 wp.
186 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
the Richards Bay BH9 borehole, and Santonian II to Campanian I at Umzamba.
Its total time range in Zululand is Santonian II to Maastrichtian I.
Haughtonileberis vanhoepeni Dingle, 1980
Fig. 33E
Haughtonileberis vanhoepeni Dingle, 1980: 42—44, figs 22H, 23A—F; 1981: 95, fig. 46A.
Remarks
No additional specimens of this species were recovered from Coniacian and
Santonian outcrops in Zululand during the present study. None of the species
assigned to Haughtonileberis by Grosdidier (1979) are close to H. vanhoepeni.
Age and distribution
Known only from the Santonian III to Campanian II of the Richards Bay
BH9 borehole, and Campanian IJ to Campanian IV outcrops in Zululand. This
gives a total range of Santonian III to Campanian IV, but the Santonian record is
restricted to one sample at the very top of Santonian III in BH9. The appearance
of H. vanhoepeni therefore can be taken as an effective marker for the
Santonian—Campanian boundary.
Genus Oertliella Pokorny, 1964
This genus first appears in the Coniacian of Zululand, but is relatively rare
until the Campanian, where four species are present (Table 10).
TABLE 10
Distribution of Oertliella in south-east Africa.
Coniacian Santonian Campanian Maastrichtian
|
pennata
elongata
sp. 476
africana
Oertliella pennata Dingle, 1980
Fig. 34A-E
Acanthocythereis? aff. A. horridula (Bosquet, 1854), Dingle, 1969: 378-380, fig. 19.
Oertliella pennata Dingle, 1980: 46-49, fig. 2A—E; 1981: 98, fig. 48A.
Remarks
With the exception of the Coniacian specimens from locality 15—5, which
have more massive spines, those from horizons at outcrop in Zululand are
identical to the topotypes from the Richards Bay BH9 borehole.
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 187
Fig. 34. Oertliella. A-E. O. pennata. A. SAM-PC6561, RV, locality 15-5, Mtubatuba,
Coniacian IV, SEM 1928. B. SAM-—PC6562, LV, locality 15-7, Mtubatuba, Coniacian IV,
SEM (2135. C. SAM-PC6563, RV, Umzamba bed 7, Santonian III, SEM 2079.
D. SAM-PC6564, LV, Umzamba bed 3, Santonian III, SEM 2111. (This is the specimen
recorded as ?Acanthocythereis aff. A. horridula by Dingle (1969) (MG-—1-2-9)).
E. SAM-K5644, holotype, LV, BH9 Richards Bay, 115,9m, Santonian III, SEM 471.
F. Oertliella sp. 476, SAM—K5647, LV, BH9 Richards Bay, 115,9 m, Santonian III, SEM 476.
Scale bars = 100 py.
188 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Age and distribution
Coniacian IV to Santonian II (localities 15-5, 15-7, 74-10 and 74-15) at
outcrop in Zululand, Santonian III to Campanian II in Richards Bay borehole,
and Santonian III to Campanian I at Umzamba.
Oertliella sp. 476
Fig. 34F
Oertliella sp. A Dingle, 1980: 50, fig. 26F.
Remarks
No additional specimens of this species have been recovered during the
present study.
Age and distribution
Uppermost Santonian III to Campanian II, Richards Bay BH9 borehole.
Genus Rayneria Neale, 1975
Rayneria nealei Dingle, 1980
Fig. 35A-F
Cythereis ?quadrilatera (Roemer) Chapman, 1923: 5, pl. 1 (5).
Rayneria nealei Dingle, 1980: 55-57, figs 28E-F, 29A-—F, 30G; 1981: 108, fig. 51F.
Remarks
During the present study several specimens of this species were recorded
from Santonian and Coniacian horizons at Umzamba and in Zululand. Compared
to type material from the Richards Bay BH9 borehole, which is of Santonian III
and Campanian I age, the older populations show several subtle morphological
variations. In particular, the valves in lateral outline have a less angular
appearance, with the ventromedian ridge being more subdued, while ornamenta-
tion in the anterior part of the valve has a distinctly foveolate aspect compared to
the more coarsely reticulate ornamentation of the type material. However, one
characteristic feature of ornamentation, which both populations display well, is
the possession of fine secondary muri within many large individual fossae, which
resemble spiders’ webs.
Age and distribution
Known from Coniacian IV (Mtubatuba) outcrops in Zululand, Santonian II
to lowermost Campanian I in the Richards Bay BH9 borehole, and Santonian HI
at Umzamba. This gives a total range of Coniacian IV to Campanian I in
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 189
Fig. 35. Rayneria nealei. A. SAM-K5652, holotype, RV, BH9, Richards Bay, 139,8 m,
Santonian III, SEM 413. B. SAM-—PC6567, LV, detail central area, lateral view, Umzamba
bed 7, Santonian III, SEM 2083. C-D. SAM-—PC6565, LV, Umzamba bed 5, Santonian III.
C. SEM 2063. D. Detail anterior area, SEM 2064. E. SAM-—PC6566, LV, locality 15-5,
Mtubatuba, Coniacian IV, SEM 2042. F. SAM—PC6567, LV, Umzamba bed 7, Santonian III,
SEM 2081. Scale bars: A, C, E-F = 100, B = 10u, D = 30n.
190 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
south-east Africa. Dingle (1981) concluded that R. nealei’s preferred habitat was
water <100 m deep, where environmental conditions ranged from high to low
energy.
Genus Gibberleberis Dingle, 1969
Three species of this genus have been recorded, all from the Zululand—
Umzamba area of south-east Africa. Two of these (G. africanus and G. elongata)
occur in Santonian strata, and the former ranges down into the Coniacian.
Although never abundant, the genus is a characteristic element of the
Coniacian—Santonian faunas of south-east Africa. Bate (in Bate & Bayliss 1969)
recorded a closely allied, monospecific genus from the Upper Turonian of
Tanzania: Akrogmocythere wamiensis. The author has examined the type
specimens in the British Museum (Natural History), and noted that the two
genera can be distinguished by the lack of a dorsal margin concavity or neck
behind the ACA in Akrogmocythere, which also has a distinctly down-turned
ATE in the LV hinge. In view of the temporal distribution of the two genera, it is
possible that Gibberleberis evolved from Akrogmocythere in the later Turonian or
early Coniacian.
Gibberleberis africanus Dingle, 1969
Fig. 36A—C
Gibberleberis africanus Dingle, 1969: 376-377, fig. 17; 1980: 57, figs 30A—D, 31A.
Remarks
Intraspecific morphological variation within G. africanus primarily takes the
form of differences in the strength and coarseness of the surface rib pattern. The
type populations from Umzamba exhibit distinctly coarser reticulation and
stronger muri and main rib patterns than those from Zululand, where material
from Richards Bay BH9 borehole and outcrops has a more delicate ornamenta-
tion. In addition, the Coniacian examples are somewhat plumper and squatter
than younger forms, although I have no hesitation in assigning them to the same
species.
Age and distribution
Although never abundant, G. africanus is ubiquitous in the Coniacian to
Santonian strata of the Zululand-Umzamba area. It ranges Santonian II to
Santonian III at Umzamba and the Richards Bay BH9 borehole, and Conia-
cian IV (locality 15, Mtubatuba) to Santonian III (locality 74, False Bay) at
outcrop in Zululand. It is a useful marker for Coniacian—Santonian strata in
south-east Africa.
Data from the Richards Bay BH9 borehole suggest that G. africanus
preferred shallow (<100 m), low-energy, open-water conditions (Dingle 1980).
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 191
Fig. 36. A-C. Gibberleberis africanus. A. SAM—PC6568, LV, Umzamba bed 1, Santonian II,
SEM 377. B. SAM-K5658, BH9, Richards Bay, 118,22 m, Santonian III, SEM 395.
C. SAM-PC6569, LV, locality 15-7, Coniacian IV, SEM 1947.
D. Gibberleberis elongata, SAM—K5660, holotype, BH9 Richards Bay, 124,0 m, Santonian III,
SEM 390. Scale bars = 100 pw.
Gibberleberis elongata Dingle, 1980
Fig. 36D
Gibberleberis elongata Dingle, 1980: 57-59, figs 30E—F, 31A; 1981: 111, figs 52D, 53A.
Remarks
This is a relatively rare species, which has not been encountered in
Zululand Coniacian—Santonian strata at outcrop.
Age and distribution
Ranges Santonian III to Campanian II in Richards Bay BH9 borehole, and
Campanian II at outcrop in Zululand (Nibela Peninsula). It has not been
recorded from equivalent strata at Umzamba.
192 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Indeterminate taxa
Indet. sp. 1874
Fig. 37A
Remarks
One poorly preserved carapace of a sub-rectangular, trachyleberid-like
species. It has an overall reticulate ornamentation, a nodose dorsal longitudinal
ridge, a short ventromedian longitudinal rib, and a large posteroventral spine.
Age and distribution
Santonian III, St. Lucia Formation, locality 74-10, False Bay.
Indet. sp. 1956
Fig. 37B
Remarks
One poorly preserved carapace of a trachyleberid-like species. The carapace
narrows posteriorly, and is dominated in the posterior half by three short
longitudinal ridges. There is a weak SCT, and an AM ridge. No details of fine
surface ornamentation can be seen.
Age and distribution
Coniacian IV, St. Lucia Formation, locality 15—1, Mtubatuba.
Indet. sp. 2078
Figs 3/7
Remarks
One broken valve, probably belonging to Cytherella. The outline resembles
most closely that of Cytherella sp. 2 recorded by Dingle (1980) from the Santonian
to Campanian of the Richards Bay borehole.
Age and distribution
Santonian III, bed 5, Umzamba.
Indet. sp. 2103
Fig. 37D
Indeterminate species A Dingle, 1969: 380-381, fig. 20a—c (MG—1-2-1).
Remarks
No additional specimens of this species have been recorded since its original
description. SEM photographs emphasize the pseudo-alate ventrolateral ridge.
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 193
Fig. 37. Indeterminate taxa. A. Indet. sp. 1874, SAM-—PC6570, LV, locality 74-10, False Bay,
Santonian III. _ _B. Indet. sp. 1956, SAM-—PC6571, locality 15-1, Mtubatuba, Coniacian IV.
C. Indet. sp. 2078, SAM—PC6572, RV, Umzamba bed 5, Santonian III. D. Indet. sp. 2103,
SAM-—PC6573, RV, Umzamba bed 1, Santonian IJ. E-F. Indet. sp. 2104, Umzamba bed 1,
Santonian II. E. SAM—PC6574, LV, SEM 2104. F. SAM-—PC6575, RV, SEM 2106.
Scale bars = 100 wp.
194 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Age and distribution
Santonian II, bed 1, Umzamba.
Indet. sp. 2104
Fig. 37E—F
Indeterminate species B Dingle, 1969: 381, fig. 20d—g (MG—1-2-3a, b).
Remarks
Two worn valves, which show considerable resemblance to Veenia obesa.
There are, however, significant points of difference: Indet. sp. 2104 lacks a
distinctive SCT, and a median lateral ridge, and the CA in both valves are less
prominent than in V. obesa. There is a superficial resemblance, mostly in valve
outline, to Akrogmocythere wamiensis from the Turonian of Tanzania (Bate &
Bayliss 1969) but Indet. sp. 2104 lacks the prominent DM ridge.
Age and distribution
Santonian II, bed 1, Umzamba.
Indet. sp. 2108
Fig. 38A
Indeterminate species C Dingle, 1969: 381, fig. 20i-h (MG—1-2-4).
Remarks
A relatively well-preserved carapace of an elongate, delicately reticulate
species.
Age and distribution
Santonian II, bed 1, Umzamba.
Indet. sp. 2125
Fig. 38B
Remarks
Poorly preserved carapace and single valve of trachyleberid-like species.
Both specimens encrusted with matrix, but prominent features observed are:
SCT, posteriorly rising nodose ventrolateral ridge, prominent ACA.
Age and distribution
Santonian III, locality 74-12, False Bay.
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 195
Fig. 38. Indeterminate taxa. A. Indet. sp. 2108, SAM-—PC6576, LV, Umzamba bed 1,
Santonian II. B. Indet. sp. 2125, SAM—PC6577, LV, locality 74-12, False Bay, Santonian III.
C. Indet. sp. 2132, SAM-—PC6578, RV, locality 15-1, Mtubatuba, Coniacian IV.
D. Indet. sp. 2314, SAM-—PC6579, LV, J(c)-1 borehole, 2 213 m, Upper Cenomanian,
SEM 2313. E. Indet. sp. 2312, SAM—PC6580, J(c)—1 borehole, 2 213 m, Upper Cenomanian,
SEM 2311. Scale bars: A-D = 100p, E = 300 wu.
196 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Indetaispe 2152
Fig. 38C
Remarks
Poorly preserved valve of trachyleberid-like species. Specimen encrusted
with matrix, but prominent features observed are: tapering posterior outline, and
three short longitudinal ridges in posterior half of valve.
Age and distribution
Coniacian IV, locality 15-1, Mtubatuba.
Indet=spa2 32
Fig. 38E
Remarks
Fragmented valve of reticulate trachyleberid-like species. Probably possesses
a prominent eyespot and conjunctive spines. Superficially similar to some species
of Oertliella. No closely related species known from Zululand, or J(c)-1
borehole.
Age and distribution
Upper Cenomanian, J(c)—1 borehole, 2 213 m (7 260 ft).
Indet. sp. 2314
Fig. 38D
Remarks
Worn carapace of reticulate cytheracean. In overall shape and ornamenta-
tion, this species resembles several members of the genus Rocaleberis, which
occurs in the Upper Cretaceous (Maastrichtian) of Argentina (e.g. Bertels 1976).
Prominent features include: a SCT, three longitudinal ribs, rounded PM and AM,
and prominent ACA. No related ostracod species are known from the Cretaceous
of southern Africa and the closest correlative may be the record of Henry-
howella sp. from the Lower Eocene—Upper Oligocene of the J(c)—1 borehole,
1 216-345 m (3 990-1 130 ft) by Dingle (1976). In this regard, the possibility of
downhole contamination from younger strata cannot be ruled out.
Age and distribution
Upper Cenomanian, J(c)—1 borehole, 2 213 m (7 260 ft).
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 197
DISCUSSION
Fifty-five species of Ostracoda, belonging to at least 20 genera, have been
identified from the Turonian, Coniacian, and Santonian strata of south-east
Africa, and their temporal and spatial distributions are shown in Tables 1, 11, and
12. In this section, I will first discuss biostratigraphic and palaeoecological aspects
of the assemblages from each of the four main areas studied (Zululand, offshore
Natal, east coast, and Agulhas Bank), then consider regional correlations, and
finally note some implications of ostracod distributions in a Gondwanide setting.
BIOSTRATIGRAPHY AND PALAEOECOLOGY
Zululand
At outcrop in southern Zululand, Kennedy & Klinger (1975) recognized a
Coniacian I to Santonian III succession, which is separated from the underlying
Cretaceous strata by an uppermost Cenomanian—Turonian non-sequence. The
Turonian reported in subcrop by McLachlan & McMillan (1979) occurs farther
north. Unfortunately, not all the samples that were collected through the outcrop
succession were fossiliferous, but the composite sequence that it has been possible
to construct, using material from the Mfolozi Valley, False Bay area, and BH9 at
Richards Bay, covers most of Coniacian II to Santonian III time. The main
deficiency is lack of data across the Coniacian—Santonian boundary.
Table 11 shows the distribution of ostracods in Zululand, and compares the
assemblages from outcrops (Coniacian III to Santonian III) and Richards Bay
BH9 (Santonian II to III). Table 12 shows the total time ranges for taxa at both
BH9 and outcrop. A total of 34 species in at least 14 genera have been identified
from Zululand, with 24 species (12 genera), and 24 species (13 genera) from
outcrop and BH9, respectively (Table 11). Fourteen species are common to the
two regions (42% similarity, although the latter figure rises to 58% if the
Santonian species only are considered).
Palaeoenvironmental analyses have previously been carried out on the
Santonian section of the Richards Bay borehole BH9 (Dingle 1980), and the
techniques applied in that study have been employed here. In addition, because
of the continuous record, and good preservation of the material from this
borehole, the results will serve as a standard for comparison. This earlier work
need only be summarized here and the results reviewed in the light of new data.
Because of the relatively small numbers of specimens recovered from some
of the samples collected at outcrop, and the discontinuous nature of these
outcrops, any palaeoenvironmental predictions made from the ostracod popula-
tions must be regarded as tentative. The only sections that give a continuous
enough record to be of use are those in the Mfolozi Valley (localities 15 and 16),
and at False Bay (locality 74), where Coniacian III-IV and Santonian I-III,
respectively, are exposed (Figs 2, 3). The ostracod populations of these two areas
198 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
TABLE 11
Distribution of Coniacian to Santonian ostracods in Zululand.
Coniacian Santonian
Ill IV Il Ill
(16) (89, 15) (74) (74, 14)
Species
Cythereis mfoloziensis
Brachycythere longicaudata
Cytherella sp. 1929
Cytherelloidea mtubaensis
Indet. sp. 1956
Indet. sp. 2132
Cythereis cf. luzangaziensis
Rayneria nealei
Cytherelloidea newtoni
Haughtonileberis haughtoni
Paracypris zululandensis
Gibberleberis africanus
Cythereis klingeri
Bythocypris richardsbayensis
Cytherelloidea umzambaensis
Oertliella pennata
Unicapella stragulata
Indet. sp. 2125
Cytherella sp. 2351
Paracypris umzambaensis
Haughtonileberis fissilis
Indet. sp. 1874
Cythereis transkeiensis
Bairdoppilata andersoni
Brachycythere sicarius
Cytherella sp. 1-4
Brachycythere pondolandensis
Pondoina sulcata
Amphicytherura tumida
Cytherelloidea gardeni
Gibberleberis elongata
Oertliella sp. 476
Cytherelloidea griesbachi
Haughtonileberis vanhoepeni
x
x
x
».4
x
x
x
X
X
X
X
X
xX
xX
x
xX
Species extant:
. : i
( ) numbers in parentheses are localities
* = range extends above Campanian I
33 Con.—Sant. species
14 genera
42 % similarity
14 spp. common
BH9
Santonian
II Ill
Xx Xx X—*
x X——X
x x |
Xx X——X
Xx X——xX—*
Xx x |
x X——x—*
x X ——x—*
X X—— X—*
X—— X—*
x Be:
xX X —— X—*
_—
x X——x—*
Ke X—— X—*
x X——X—*
x x
Xx
x Xx
xX
X
X—— X—*
X——X—*
X——xX
16 23 |) 17(EEG
Camp.
forms)
24
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 199
TABLE 12
Comparison of ranges of ostracods in Zululand (outcrops & BH9) and Umzamba.
Santonian Camp. Species Sant. Camp.
II Il II III
Cythereis mfoloziensis*
Brachycythere longicaudata
Cytherella sp. 1929
Cytherelloidea mtubaensis*
Indet. sp. 1956
Indetaspy 21382
Cythereis cf. luzangaziensis*
Cytherelloidea newtoni*
Gibberleberis africanus
Haughtonileberis haughtoni
Rayneria nealei
Paracypris zululandensis*
Cythereis klingeri*
Bythocypris richardsbayensis*
Cytherelloidea umzambaensis
Oertliella pennata
Unicapella stragulata*
Indetaspai2s
Cytherella sp. 2350
Brachycythere pondolandensis
Cytherella sp. 1—4*
Paracypris umzambaensis
Haughtonileberis fissilis
Bairdoppilata andersoni
Brachycythere sicarius
Indet. sp. 1874
Cythereis transkeiensis
Pondoina sulcata
Cytherelloidea gardeni
Gibberleberis elongata*
Amphicytherura tumida
Oertliella sp. 476*
Cytherelloidea griesbachi*
Haughtonileberis vanhoepeni*
Brachycythere rotunda**
IndetaspaZl03s=
Indet. sp. 2104**
Indet. sp. 2108**
Veenia obesa**
Paraphysocythere thompsoni*
Cnestocythere? sp. 2091**
Indet. sp. 2078**
Species extant:
2 16 19 2] 17 42 Con. -Sant. species
36 % similarity
a a
*
*
~~ KK mK KO OOOO
Mr OOOO
X
x
x
xX
X
X
xX
x
xX
xX
Xx
X
Xx
x
Xx
xX
X
xX
MS KO KO OOOO
*
confined to Zululand— 13
** confined to Umzamba—8
Richards Bay & Umzamba: 32 spp, 15 common, 47 % similarity
200 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
are detailed in Table 13. Plotting these data on a Cytheracea—Cytherellidae—
Bairdiacea+Cypridacea triangular diagram (CCBC plot; see Dingle 1980, 1981
for discussion) (Figs 39, 40) reveals several trends that are potentially significant
as palaeoecological indicators.
The five Coniacian samples are cytheracean-dominant and cluster towards
the top of the diagram close to the fields considered by Dingle (1980) in his study
of the Richards Bay borehole BH9 as shallow-water (<100 m), high- and low-
energy environments (assemblages 1 and 3) (Fig. 39). The composition of the
Coniacian ostracod populations (Table 14) is very similar to that of the Santonian
of Richards Bay (Dingle 1980), and similar environments of deposition are
inferred. Factors significant in making this comparison are: (1) dominance of
Brachycythere longicaudata, Cythereis klingeri, and Haughtonileberis haughtoni,
(ii) dominance of the cytherellid component by species of Cytherelloidea;
(111) absence of Bairdoppilata in the Bairdiacea+ Cypridacea component, which is
composed of Bythocypris and Paracypris. At Richards Bay, the lower-energy
environment (assemblage 3) is characterized by the dominance of Cythereis
klingeri, so it may be possible to differentiate high- and low-energy assemblages
within the Coniacian populations on the grounds of variations in the cytheracean
element (Fig. 41).
In contrast, the Santonian II and III ostracod populations from the False Bay
area plot in areas on the CCBC diagram that are considered predictive of
relatively deep water (see Dingle 1981, fig. 75). There appear to be two distinct
fields in the assemblages, one of which contains the Santonian II and lower
Santonian III populations, and the other with the upper Santonian II populations
(Fig. 39). The former lies in a region of the CCBC diagram for which there is no
previous documentation, but which borders on field 7 that contained Maastrich-
tian assemblages that were considered predictive of deep water (>500 m) (Dingle
1981). Spread of the data points within the Santonian II-III field (Fig. 39) may
not be significant because some of the samples contain few specimens. Its
ostracod population is dominated by bairdiacean/cypridacean forms and, al-
though Bairdoppilata is present, it is Bythocypris richardsbayensis that is the main
element. In this respect, the Santonian II-III assemblages differ significantly
from those of the Maastrichtian assemblage that was used to define field 7.
Further important differences are the lack of blind cytheraceans, and typical
deep-water markers such as Krithe. Furthermore, the presence of various
cytheracean elements that are dominant in shallow-water assemblages (e.g.
Brachycythere longicaudata, Cythereis klingeri, and Haughtonileberis haughtont)
suggests that the Santonian II-III field represents deposition in water significantly
shallower than field 7. However, because of the overall subordination of
cytheracean types, it is considered somewhat deeper than fields to the north of the
‘Bythocypris’ line. Overall, the characteristics of this field seem closer to those
of 4a (which has a predictive water depth of 100—200 m) than 7, and is referred
to as 4c; a predictive intermediate water depth of 300m is tentatively
assigned to it.
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA
el
raat
Gy
SI
OS
OS
OS
vl
LC
ve
LC
el
LV
ell
eC
I€
ST
OV
Gl
Se
ts
99
99
vL
Ill
{LS)
BY)
Ee
SE
ueluojues
OOT
OOT
vl
LS
IL
vl
vl
~m
ueIoeIuOD
ajdures iad saajea ‘ON
eooepuiddAy 2 eoovipiieg
aepiforoyyAD
voovloyyAa
(sueow julod ¢) ejep poyjoouls
sisuapuvjnjnz siadkovivg
1u0s4apuv vjvjiddopslwg
sisuapquivzuin siidkovivg
sisuakvgspavyoid Siadkooying
VaOVCINdAD 2 VAOVICUIVE
sIsuavquivpzuNn vapiojjadayIAD
‘dds vyjasayity
1U0JMaU vaplojja4ayjAD
sisuapqnjut vapiojjasayay
AVGITIAYTHLAO
pjojnsvas vjjadvoiuyQ
ppuuad v]]21)1490
MasUuyy SiadayjaD
1aj]vauU DIdQUADY
snuvo1dfv s14agaj4aqgqiy
SISUAIZDSUDZN] “JO SiadayiAD
DIVPNVIIBUO] alayIAIAYODAG
1UO]YS8NDvY SidaqgapuUojysnvy
sisuaizojoful siadayIAD
VdOVUAHLAO
UOISIAIPQNS
‘ou pog
‘ou Ayyeoo07T
‘uonejndod je10} Jo sasejuso1ed se passoidxa ‘sdoiojno puejninz wo spooe.1so Jo UONNGIySIG
Cl ATAV],
202 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Cytheracea
Coniacian
lh & IV
Santonian III
Santonian
Bairdiacea & Cyt herellid :
Cypridacea
Fig. 39. Cytheracea—Cytherellidae—Bairdiacea+Cypridacea triangular diagram (CCBC plot) of the va
populations (solid circles) from the Coniacian to Santonian strata of Zululand. Fields 1, 2, 3, 4a, 4b, Sa, 5b, 6 anc
have previously been defined by Dingle (1980, 1981). See text for explanation.
The younger Santonian III populations from locality 74 (Table 14) scatter
across the CCBC diagram in the vicinity of field 4a (Fig. 39). Comparison with the
original ostracod assemblages (Campanian I of BH9) used to establish this field
(see Dingle 1981, table 6) shows that the only significant difference is the
dominance of Bythocypris richardsbayensis in the bairdiacean component of the
False Bay samples in contrast to Bairdoppilata andersoni, which plays an
analagous role in the Richards Bay samples. I have no hesitation in assigning the
upper Santonian III populations to this assemblage field and predicting a
depositional environment of 100-200 m. Only the position of the sample on the
right-hand side of the field is in doubt. It may indicate a temporary water depth
shallowing to c. 100 m, but because the ‘event’ is predicted by one sample its
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 203
SANTONIAN
Hl
CONIACIAN
100
Cytheracea
ey
‘c , Bairdiacea &
a ‘<——__ Cypridacea
é = ete Cytheracea
2
Cytherellidae
Cytherellidae
10/1 10/2 11/1 11/2 bed no.
14
locality
Fig. 40. Temporal trend of major groups (as percentage of total ostracod population) in
Zululand outcrops. Data are three-point running means.
significance is difficult to assess, other than to suggest that a somewhat shallower
water environment may be located in this field.
Palaeoecological and predicted sedimentary environments for the Santonian
section of the Richards Bay BH9 borehole have been fully discussed in Dingle
(1980). These data have been incorporated in various figures referred to below.
Dingle et al. (1983) have discussed some of the palaeoenvironmental aspects
of Upper Cretaceous sedimentation in Zululand, and have stressed the onlapping
nature of the Upper Cretaceous transgression that was first recognized by
Kennedy & Klinger (1971). The BH9 borehole site lies to the south of the Eteza
Fault on the crest of a basement feature referred to as the Richards Bay Arch.
Differential vertical movements were recognized between this area and the basin
farther north under the Zululand coastal plain. The data acquired during the
present study allow modifications to be made to the model presented by Dingle et
al. (1983).
Figure 42 shows a tentative temporal and spatial correlation of depositional
environments along a transect between the False Bay—Nibela Peninsula area, the
Mfolozi Valley, and BH9 (100 km in length). The diachronous nature of the
post-Turonian transgression is well illustrated, with Coniacian I, Coniacian II,
204
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
bY
W()0c —O0T
ve = Aysioard
SI = satoeds ‘oN
juosoid vyopjidopswg
SISUIDQUIDZUN Daployjas4ayjAD
DIDINSDAS DjJadvoIUuy)
pouuad vjjayj4a—
MasUuyy SlasaysAD
1uOoSdapuv vIoIddopawg|g
1UO0JMaU vaplojjadayJAD
‘ds pyjasayita
1UOJYSnvY SidagajIUojJYysnvyy
sisuakvgspavyoid siadkooyag
DIVPNVIIBUO] AdaYIAIAYIDAG
[I] uetuojues 1oddy
oY
WQOCE
67 = AVSIOAIG
ZI = sowods ‘on
uvsorioyyAd UIeU
SI DIVPNVIIBUO] adayIAIAYIDAG
oepr[aroyyAD
Ul DyjJa4ayJAD JO DOURUIWIOG
pypjiddopswg ON
1UOJMaU vaplojja1ayIAD
pypuuad v01j21}119—0
SNUDIIA{D $119Ga]49Gq1
1UOJY8NDY SidaqapluojYysnvyy
sisuapquipzuin Ssiddovivg
MasUuyyy SladayjAD
sisuakvgspAévyid S1AdKIOYIAT
‘ds nyjasayyaa
DIDPNVIIBUO] ALBYJAIAYIVDAG
sisuapupjnjnz siddkovivg
III ‘UeS Jomo 7 I] “URS
MS = Ayssroarq
LI = satoads ‘oN
oeprjorayiAD
Ul vaployjasayjAD JO soueUTWIOG
pipjiddopswg ON
SISUaDquUivZUN vaplojjasayjAD
sisuavqnju vapiojjasayjAD
pjouuad vpa1149E0
SNUDIIA{D $149G9]4AGQGIH
sisuaizojoful siasayjcZD
‘ds pyjasayity
sisuakpgspapyoi siuddroyag
1a]DaU DIAJUKDY
1UOJYSNDY Sldaqgajuo]Yysnvyy
1ld8Uuyy SIasdYyJAD
DIDPNVIIBUO] adayIMIAYIDAG
AI-II] uefseruo’)
“weIseIp DEO
uO spjoly JuayeAINbyA
yidop 13j1e A
XDOTOOAOAV 1Vd
soinjeoyj IoyIO
(o]dures [ ‘%¢<)
JIOUI|
(o[dues [< ‘%¢<)
Aleq}I9],
(aJdures T< ‘%0T<)
Alepuosas
(a]duies [< ‘%07<)
jUeUIWIOG
‘(Aeg osjeq pue AayeA IZojoyy) pueynynZ wos sasde[quiasse pooesso uvIUOJURS pu ULIORIUOD Jo sonsiiajovIeyD
pl Alav L$
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 205
water
depth
m. fields
300 %
SS
4c i a
Se *
/
200 ] x
\ / \
Mf ~
4a Mm / ae
i Nie ee
100 7 *
/
lS pana a
HW IV
i) 1A) WOy2 thyAl 11/2 12 13 14 15
I il
Coniacian Santonian
Fig. 41. Summary of predicted temporal water-depth variations at Zululand outcrops
based on the CCBC plot in Figure 39. Coniacian localities are in the Mfolozi Valley;
Santonian locality (74) is at False Bay. Bed numbers are shown on horizontal axis.
Age decreases to the right.
and Santonian II basal sediments at the three localities, respectively, although
fossiliferous samples were available only from the first two sites. Despite their age
differences, both have very similar ostracod faunas that are characterized by
robust cytheraceans Brachycythere longicaudata, Haughtonileberis haughtoni,
and Cythereis klingeri. At BH9, where there is a continuous cored section, the
Santonian II to Campanian II sequence appears to show an uninterrupted
progression from shallow- (<100m), through medium- (100-200 m), to
deep-(>300 m) water sedimentary environments. Farther north, in the Mfolozi
Valley, I have no data to establish the Coniacian V to Santonian I palaeoenviron-
ments, but suspect that it also represents a progression from shallow (Coniacian
III-IV), through medium (Campanian II to III), to deep (Campanian IV) water
conditions. This correlation suggests that similar sedimentary conditions to those
that prevailed during the uppermost Santonian III to mid-Campanian II medium
water-depth environments in BH9 were established over the Mfolozi Valley area
for the whole of the Coniacian V or Santonian I to lowermost Campanian IV time
span.
Information from the False Bay Nibela Peninsula area is less complete. It is
reasonable to assume that the earliest sedimentary environment (Coniacian I)
was also shallow water, high energy, so that similar ostracod populations to those
found at the two southerly sites can be anticipated here. However, I cannot
substantiate this assumption. Higher in the sequence, conditions cannot be
predicted, and the available data are not easy to assess because only short pre-
upper Campanian sections contained ostracod faunas. In particular, the upper
Santonian II-III section commences with a relatively deep-water (300 m)
ostracod assemblage that is immediately overlain by medium (100-200 m) water-
depth assemblages assigned to field 4a on the CCBC diagram. The simplest
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
206
‘(zoded sit ‘1961 ‘O86T
g[8urq) siojd JgOO UO spjay ore suUINIOS Jo apis Yo] 1B s1oquinu |[eUIS ‘(YJIOU) vor vfoqiN—Aeg os[eJ ey) 01 (YINOs) (6A{q) 2ToNSI0q
keg spreyory oy} wor pueyninZ Jo ees uURNYoIseep] 0} URIORIUOD oY) UT sUONeLIeA Y}dop-1ojeM JeNeds pure je1oduay, ‘zp “SLz
aS VIAL,
(@)
e)
z
}uawased | ‘NOS A
9 S}UBWIpes >
ueiseiuoj—aid 2
MmMo|jeyus
O)
>
=
aj}e1apow “‘NVS a
<
>
z
H1d3qd
io)
>
=
‘WW >
z
>
2
=
>
>
7)
:
“SVVIN re)
=
=
>
2
ejaqin /Keg asye4 AaljeA !Z0/0jW 6H
Water Depth m
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 207
correlation (Fig. 42) is that this represents a deep-water episode that may not
have penetrated as far south as the Mfolozi area, although critical data around the
Coniacian—Santonian boundary are lacking. Deep-water environments were
definitely established in the Nibela area by late Campanian times, and, with some
fluctuation, persisted until the rapid shallowing that commenced in Maastrich-
tian II. The diachronous nature of these major sedimentary environmental
changes is well illustrated in Figure 42: the shallow—medium boundary ranges
from north to south (?late Coniacian to ?early Santonian to latest Santonian) and
the medium—deep water boundary ranges south to north (mid-Campanian II to
lower Campanian IV to ?Campanian IV).
Considering these data in terms of water-depth curves (Fig. 43) suggests that
the sedimentary environments shown on Figure 42 cannot be explained simply in
terms of eustacy. Dingle et al. (1983) have predicted differential vertical
movements between the Richards Bay Arch and the region lying to the north, and
in particular, that during Campanian I-II times, the crest of the arch (i.e. BH9
site) subsided more rapidly than the basin to the north (water depths at this time
were greatest over the arch). The new data also suggest that once the Mfolozi area
had subsided to an approximate water depth of 100—200 m (by Coniacian IV), it
remained at this depth until early Campanian time. This presumably resulted
from one, or a combination, of the following: eustatic still-stand and no sediment
accumulation, sediment accumulation at the same rate as a sea-level rise, crustal
subsidence and sediment accumulation compensating for either a eustatic sea-
level rise or still-stand. Because there is no evidence for either abnormally thick
sediments, or temporally extensive condensed sequences, I favour a slow
sediment-accumulation rate coupled with a slow eustatic sea-level rise. This raises
a further ambiguity in the False Bay area, where relatively deep-water conditions
were followed by shallowing that coincided with the inundation of the Richards
Bay Arch. The attainment of deep-water conditions at the northernmost site,
600
False Bay deep
200
shallow
Coniacian Santonian Campanian Maastrichtian
Fig. 43. Water-depth fluctuations during the Upper Cretaceous transgression at three Zululand
localities. Based on the CCBC plot (Fig. 39) and Dingle (1980, 1981).
intermediate
208 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
which experienced the transgression earliest, is not difficult to envisage if a faster
rate of crustal subsidence compared to the Mfolozi area obtained here, but the
Santonian III shallowing suggests either crustal uplift of 100-200 m, rapid
sedimentation outstripping the rising sea level effectively elevating the sea floor,
or a combination of slight crustal uplift and a moderate increase in the sediment-
accumulation rate. Since a period of slow sea-level rise (in the Mfolozi Valley)
during Santonian to early Campanian time has already been postulated, the
option of an increase in the sedimentation rate perhaps coupled with a decrease in
crustal subsidence seems most attractive. As noted earlier, the non-coincidence of
the more regularly curved portions of the graphs during early Campanian time
strongly suggest that differential crustal movements and sediment accumulation
rates must be anticipated over the whole of this region.
In Zululand 34 species have been recognized from Coniacian—Santonian
strata, with 17 each from Coniacian and Santonian outcrops, and 24 from the San-
tonian of BH9. Because of their good state of preservation and completeness of
the record, the ranges obtained from BH9 are probably more reliable. Tables 11
and 12 show the ranges of the ostracod species by stages, following the ammonite
zonation scheme of Kennedy & Klinger (1975), while Table 15 shows species that
are confined to each stage, and Table 16 lists the order of appearance of
important Upper Cretaceous species.
It is clear from these data that despite the relative sparseness of many of the
assemblages, which in some cases at least was occasioned by poor preservation,
the Coniacian ostracod populations contained most of the main elements that
characterized later Upper Cretaceous faunas. This indicates that these long-
ranging taxa aggressively colonized the continental margins of south-east Africa
as soon as local circumstances allowed, following the initiation of the Upper
Cretaceous transgression. Table 16, for instance, shows that 14 per cent of the
Maastrichtian taxa appeared in the Coniacian, and that this figure grows rapidly
to 36 per cent for the Santonian. Prominent in this list are species that form
significant components of the overall post-Coniacian populations: Brachycythere
longicaudata, Cythereis klingeri, Haughtonileberis haughtoni, and Bythocypris
richardsbayensis. Only four additional long-ranging species joined the list during
Santonian time. It can be established, therefore, that the underlying character of
the Upper Cretaceous faunas was established rapidly after the Cenomanian—
Turonian hiatus, and was not acquired over a long period of time.
Only three species (20%) are confined to the Zululand Coniacian strata
(Table 15), two of which are closely related. One (Cythereis cf. luzangaziensis) is
likened to a species from the Turonian of Tanzania, and the other (Cythereis
mfoloziensis) may be ancestral to the long-ranging Cythereis klingeri. None of
these three short-range species have been found to occur abundantly, and at this
state of knowledge it is not possible to identify taxa that indicate unequivocally a
Coniacian, in contradistinction to a Santonian, age. Reliance has to be placed on
the fact that certain other taxa, typical of the younger strata, do not occur.
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA
TABLE 15
Age ranges of Coniacian and Santonian ostracods in south-east Africa.
Zululand
Cythereis mfoloziensis
Cytherelloidea mtubaens
Restricted to Coniacian
1S
Cythereis cf. luzangaziensis
Zululand
Cythereis transkeiensis
Agulhas Bank
Apateloschizocythere? cf. mclachlani
Brachycythere agulhasensis
Restricted to Santonian
Brachycythere pondolandensis
Pondeina sulcata
Cytherelloidea gardeni
Gibberleberis elongata
Coniacian
Brachycythere longicaudata
Cythereis klingeri
Bythocypris richardsbayensis
Cytherella sp. 1-4
Paracypris zululandensis
Rayneria nealei
Haughtonileberis haughtoni
Oertliella pennata
Cytherelloidea umzambaensis
Zululand species extant in:
Maastrichtian
Campanian
Santonian
Umzamba
Brachycythere pondolandensis
Pondoina sulcata
Cytherelloidea gardeni
Brachycythere rotunda
Paracypris umzambaensis
Veenia obesa
Gibberleberis africanus
Paraphysocythere thompsoni
Brachycythere sicarius
Cnestocythere? sp. 2091
Rayneria nealei
Indet. sp. 2103
Indet. sp. 2104
Indet. sp. 2108
Indet. sp. 2078
TABLE 16
Rates of appearance of Zululand ostracod species.
Long-range species appearing in:
(— Maas.)
(— Maas.)
(— Maas.)
(— Maas.)
(— ?Maas.)
(—Camp.)
(— Camp.)
(— Camp.)
(— Camp.)
(upper limits shown in parentheses)
Santonian
Cythereis transkeiensis
Brachycythere sicarius
Haughtonileberis fissilis
Bairdoppilata andersoni
Percentage appearing in:
Coniacian Santonian
5/37 = 14% 9/37 = 24%
9/40 = 23% 20/40 = 50%
12/33 = 36%
(— ?Maas.)
(— Maas.)
(— Maas.)
(— Maas.)
209
210 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Twenty-six species have been recorded from the Santonian of Zululand, 24
of which occur at BH9, and only 17 farther north. Seventeen of these range into
the Campanian, where they constitute 50 per cent of the fauna of that stage. In
contrast to the Contacian, there are two relatively well-represented species that
are confined to this stage in Zululand, and which are potentially useful stage
indices (Table 15): Brachycythere pondolandensis and Pondoina sulcata, although
both have been recorded so far only from BH9. It is possible that their
distribution is climatically controlled because they are more abundant farther
south at Umzamba, and this aspect will be discussed later in a regional context.
Similarly, there are several other species that are typical of Santonian III strata at
BH9 (though not confined to them) that do not occur, or are poorly represented
farther north: viz. Amphicytherura tumida, Cytherelloidea griesbachi, Gibber-
leberis elongata and Haughtonileberis vanhoepent.
Considering the Coniacian—Santonian fauna of Zululand as a whole, several
species appear to be characteristic of the combined stages (Table 12):
Cytherelloidea newtoni, Gibberleberis africanus, and Unicapella stragulata. The
last-named is the earliest-known representative of the subfamily Unicapellinae.
Umzamba
Twenty-three species of ostracods have been recorded from the Santonian
strata at Umzamba, eight of which (35%) are restricted to the area (Table 12).
Cytheracea
60%
10% 20% 30%
Bairdiacea & Cytherellidae
Cypridacea
Fig. 44. CCBC plot of Santonian II and III ostracod populations with more than
20 specimens from Umzamba. The data points are joined in ascending order.
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA Dalat
This high percentage of endemism gives the Umzamba faunas a distinctive
compostion. Because the younger sediments at the Umzamba outcrops are partly
decalcified, data on the extension of ostracod ranges into Campanian strata are
probably incomplete, but what information there is suggests that several species
are confined to the Santonian. This assemblage is considered to be a marker for
the ‘southern’ (Umzamba) Santonian ostracod faunas: Brachycythere pondo-
landensis, Pondoina sulcata, Cytherelloidea gardeni, Veenia obesa, and
Paraphysocythere thompsoni. The last two species are known only from the
Umzamba area and, because they occur relatively abundantly, are particularly
useful elements.
Figure 44 shows the ostracod populations (with >20 specimens) from
Umzamba plotted on a CCBC diagram. All the samples plot within the shallow-
water (<100 m) field and there may be a subdivision between the Santonian II
and III populations: the former lie to the left side of the diagram within the field
of assemblage 2 from BH9 (Dingle 1980), while the latter lie within the areas
overlapped by assemblages 1 and 3 and those from the Zululand outcrops. These
data indicate that the Santonian assemblages at Umzamba were deposited in
shallow water, with Santonian II possibly having restricted circulation that
modified to more open environments higher up the sequence. They also show that
the depositional environments at Umzamba during Santonian II and III were
similar to those that obtained in Santonian II and HI at Richards Bay, and
Coniacian III and IV in the Mfolozi Valley.
Borehole J(c)-1
Table 4 shows the distribution of ostracods in the lower part of the J(c)-1
borehole. Two aspects are immediately apparent: the overall sparsity of the fauna
(42 valves from 25 available samples, only 12 of which contained ostracods), and
the relative lack of cytheracean specimens (12 valves, 29% of total fauna). In
addition, many of the carapaces are fragmented, and only 50 per cent of the
fossiliferous samples contain more than one carapace. These limitations make any
palaeoecological assessment speculative.
The foliowing associations may be significant:
1 981-2 042 m (Santonian)—relatively diverse zone with Bairdoppilata,
Bythocypris, Dutoitella, and Cytherella.
2 054-2 103 m (Santonian—Coniacian)—barren of ostracods, abundant Jnocer-
amus prisms and pyrite crystals.
2 115-2 140 m (Coniacian—Turonian)—sparse fauna of Cytherella and indeter-
minate smooth forms.
2 152-2 201 m (Turonian—uppermost Cenomanian)—zone with Krithe and
Bairdoppilata, and indeterminate forms.
2 213-2 237 m (Upper Cenomanian)—zone with cytheraceans, Bairdoppilata,
Bythocypris, and two indeterminate smooth forms.
2 249-2 297 m (Upper Cenomanian to base of borehole)—zone barren of
ostracods except for one pyritic cast of possible Cytherella.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ZZ,
‘(sajdues Sulseaq-poses}so
d]BdIPUI SIOQUINU Pog) SUT] dy} 9AOge pajou sUOZIIOY poyoid YIM ‘soso UI sJOYUMOP YIdap soj}eoIpUT SIxe [eJUOZOP{ *9}vIpsuioyul
oie SeUNv] 104]0 pur ‘191eM daap AJTIANLIOI B]OUNP SUOZIIOY SULIVIQ-aYsILy “19]eM (ouTTesoddAy *a°1) MOT[eYs 1O/PUk SIXOUP 9]LOIPUI O}
udye} oie sauoz UdIIeg “a;0Ye10q [-(9)¢ 2y) Jo Wed 19MO] ay} UT YIdop Jo}eM pue UONISOdap Jo s}uaWMUOIIAUS sANEINIIdg “Cp “S14
ueiluBewouag ‘fA
uasieq
6p LE Gc EL
vo!
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
ueiuoiny
|
|
uevioeiuoZ ueIUO}JUeS ueiuedwes
]
l
WwQ0EC 00¢¢ l 00L¢ 0002 0061
|
(42)
88 9L cS Ob 82 ,Sb £0 64 29 vS Zp OF 8 90 18 Sv Ae
d1xoue 410/pue
moj|eus
uasieq
a}eIPawiajul
|
|
|
|
———— SS
daap
| euney auyyi4y
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA DNB)
The presence of planktonic foraminifera throughout the sequence indicates
that the Tugela delta top was connected to the open ocean, but the alternations of
barren sequences and the intermittent presence of freshwater charophytes, and a
zone with Krithe suggests that water depths fluctuated in the manner shown in
Figure 45. The two barren sections (2 054-2 103 m and 2 249-2 297 m) are
separated by a zone containing Krithe, above and below which lie zones
containing sparse faunas. The barren sequences may indicate very shallow water
(with strong hyposaline characters) and/or periods of anoxic bottom conditions,
while the zone with Krithe probably indicates moderately deep water (?200 m,
see Dingle 1981). This succession may reflect a period of progressively deepening
water from Upper Cenomanian to a peak in early—mid-Turonian times, followed
by a shallowing and/or decrease in oxygen content of bottom waters, that
culminated in the Coniacian barren episode. The Santonian sequences suggest
intermediate water depths that possibly shallowed at the end of the period and
remained so into the early Campanian (see Dingle 1981, fig. 73). The paradox in
this interpretation is that the predicted maximum water depths on the Tugela
delta top occur during the Turonian, when evidence from Zululand indicates a
withdrawal of the sea and the formation of a major mid-Cretaceous non-
sequence. If this interpretation is valid, then the implication is that subsidence on
the Tugela delta top was greater than any regional sea-level fall.
Agulhas Bank
Although the Coniacian samples dredged from the Agulhas Bank contained
a variety of mollusca, their ostracod faunas were sparse: two species only in
sample TBD 510 (Apateloschizocythere? cf. mclachlani and Brachycythere agulhas-
ensis). The former species is close to A. mclachlani from the Campanian III
of Zululand, but B. agulhasensis is distinct from the Brachycythere faunas farther
north. The paucity of the Agulhas Bank fauna prevents any meaningful
biostratigraphic comparisons. From their study of the Inoceramus shells, Klinger
et al. (1980) concluded that the Coniacian depositional environment at site
TBD 4510 lay on the inner shelf, with low sedimentation rates and moderately
strong bottom currents. This site was only 20 km from site TBD 510, so similar
conditions may have obtained during the deposition of the ostracod valves,
although we have no additional data to substantiate this possibility.
REGIONAL CONSIDERATIONS
SOUTH-EAST AFRICA
The Coniacian to Santonian ostracod faunas of south-east Africa are of great
interest because they document the history of recolonization after the wide-
spread mid-Cretaceous (late Cenomanian-—late Turonian) hiatus. The significant
dichotomy in the ostracod faunas across this event was recognized by Dingle
(1982), but at that time no taxonomic studies had been made on the Coniacian
faunas. In this section various aspects of regional biostratigraphy and palaeo-
214 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
ecology will be discussed, primarily comparing and contrasting the Umzamba and
Zululand regions.
Ostracod zonation
Sufficient data are now available to attempt a preliminary zonation of the
Santonian strata of south-east Africa using their ostracod faunas (Fig. 46).
Because of regional contrasts in the overall ostracod populations (discussed
below), three schemes are needed to effect correlation across the whole
Umzamba to False Bay region. The schemes will be defined, then discussed.
Umzamba
Veenia obesa Zone—restricted to early Santonian II. Definition: period
marked by the presence of Veenia obesa, and ending with the first appearance of
Brachycythere pondolandensis with Gibberleberis africanus. Remarks: carries a
relatively limited fauna that is dominated by Brachycythere longicaudata,
Haughtonileberis haughtoni, and Pondoina sulcata, with rare Brachycythere
rotunda.
Gibberleberis africanus—Brachycythere pondolandensis Zone—range mid-
Santonian II to mid-Santonian III. Definition: period marked by the presence of
Gibberleberis africanus together with Brachycythere pondolandensis. Remarks:
can be divided into two subzones. The upper limit is not well controlled between
two widely spaced sampling horizons.
Cytherelloidea gardeni Subzone—range mid-Santonian II to early San-
tonian III. Definition: period marked by the presence of Gibberleberis africanus
with Brachycythere pondolandensis and Cytherelloidea gardeni. Remarks:
lowermost part of this subzone coincides with the appearance of several
important species: Cytherelloidea umzambaensis, Cythereis transkeiensis, Para-
physocythere thompsoni, and Haughtonileberis fissilis. Towards the top, Oertliella
pennata and Brachycythere sicarius first appear.
Un-named Subzone—restricted to mid-Santonian III. Definition: period
marked by the presence of Gibberleberis africanus with Brachycythere pondo-
landensis above the last appearance of Cytherelloidea gardeni. Remarks: during
this period, Veenia obesa and Paraphysocythere thompsoni reach the top of their
range, while the local first appearances of Rayneria nealei and Bairdoppilata
andersoni are recorded.
Amphicytherura tumida Zone—range late Santonian II to Campanian (upper
limit not known). Definition: period marked by the presence of Amphicytherura
tumida above the last appearance of the Gibberleberis africanus—Brachycythere
pondolandensis combination. Remarks: no species are known to make their
appearance in this zone, but the last appearances of Pondoina sulcata and
Rayneria nealei occur near the top.
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA ONS
Richards Bay borehole BH9
Cytherelloidea newtoni Zone—restricted to early Santonian II. Definition:
period marked by the presence of Cytherelloidea newtoni, and ending with the
appearance of the Gibberleberis africanus—Brachycythere pondolandensis combi-
nation. Remarks: carries a restricted fauna of Brachycythere longicaudata,
Paracypris spp., and rare Cythereis transkeiensis. At the top of the zone
Cytherella sp. and Rayneria nealei make their local appearance.
Gibberleberis africanus—Brachycythere pondolandensis Zone—range mid-
Santonian II to mid-Santonian II. Definition: period marked by the presence of
Gibberleberis africanus together with Brachycythere pondolandensis. Remarks:
carries a diverse fauna, with first appearances of several important species in the
lower part. Characterized by the presence of Brachycythere longicaudata,
Rayneria nealei, and Cythereis klingeri. The local range of Pondoina sulcata
coincides with the lower part of this zone.
Amphicytherura tumida Zone—range mid- to late Santonian II. Definition:
period marked by the presence of Amphicytherura tumida between the last
appearance of Gibberleberis africanus with Brachycythere longicaudata and the
first appearance of Haughtonileberis vanhoepent. Remarks: no species are known
to make their appearance in this zone, but it includes the upper local ranges of
Cytherelloidea newtoni and Gibberleberis africanus.
Haughtonileberis vanhoepeni Zone—range late Santonian III. Definition:
period that begins with the appearance of Haughtonileberis vanhoepeni and ends
with the first appearance of Amphicytherura zululandensis. Remarks: the upper
boundary of this zone probably coincides with the Santonian HI—Campanian I
boundary. This short zone has no short-range species, but is marked by the
appearance of Gibberleberis elongata and Oertliella sp. 476.
Zululand outcrops
Because of the relative sparseness of the faunas and the relatively few
outcrops involved in this study, it has not been possible to devise a satisfactory
zonal scheme for this area, either internally, or for correlation with regions to the
south. As a preliminary measure, almost the whole Coniacian [V—Santonian III
sequence has been placed in one zone, which can be subdivided as more data
become available.
Gibberleberis africanus—Unicapella stragulata Zone— range mid-Coniacian IV
to late Santonian III. Definition: period marked by the presence of Gibberleberis
africanus together with Unicapella stragulata. Remarks: only the presence of
Unicapella stragulata distinguishes this zone from rocks of similar ages farther
south, while the remainder of the fauna, with Brachycythere longicaudata,
Haughtonileberis haughtoni and Cythereis klingeri, has a similar content to that in
the BH9 borehole.
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
216
— — = : = —————_———— ee ES = —_— = = = __________. — - —
juoyyBney “YH
sisueequiezun “4
SisualaySUes} “D
sisuepurjninz y
1u0}MauU “9
eyepnesibuoy “g
au0z
sisuapurynin
‘Vv
H. vanhoe-
cnewone] LT
8102 ‘ds yapul
luoSjapue -g
lajeau “y
a4ayyAD0}sauD Zz
sniaeois -g
eyeuued "CO
luosdwou} gq
tuapaeb “9
SIISSIY “H
8012 ds japu|
vOLZ ds }apu|
€0L2 ‘ds yapuy
sisuapuejopuod 'g
SISudlaysues} ‘3D
sisuaequiezuin *5
snuediaje ‘5
Umzamba
eyepnedibuol ‘g
1uo,4ybney “H
Bpiwiny vy
e}edjns gq
sisuaequezwn y
esaqo A
epunjo4 -g
‘7 °S paweu-un '7°S luapseb “5
‘7 epiuin} "vy ‘7 Sisuapuejopuodg /snueoiye “95
Coe LL eo 2
| ‘dues II] “yues I} “jues
2A
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA
‘qUOZqNS = "7Z7'S ‘oUOZ = 7
‘SOUOZ JITUOWWL 0} DJAT}LI[OI Sojdues BULIedg-podes}sO JO UONISOd 9}edIpUI
Ayyeooy] yors Jo do} ay} 3e soul] [eUOZIOY UO SYOLL ‘S}WI] 9UOZ SUIUSpP UT posn asoy} o1e saduRI sotdads
pjoq pue ‘solepunog JeUuoZ d}edIpUI SOUT] [RONADA pjog ‘seoie Avg osje4 pue Ad[eA IZO[OJPY Oy} Ul sdo19jno
puelnynz oy) pue ‘(Aeg spieyory) 6HA ‘equiezuig je uoNeUOZ poorNso posodold jo siseg “Op ‘SI4
| ‘dues Wh "yUeS yues Al ‘U0.) I] “Uo
sisualaysues} ‘9d
luosjapue'g
Siisst} “H
sisuaequezwn 4
eyeinBeijys ‘py
eB}euued ‘CG
sisuaequwezuwn ‘9
eae sisuaAeqspieyois 'g
t4aBuiyy ‘'D
snueoiye ‘5
sisuapuejninz d
1uo;4y6ney “H
‘ds eyjosayyAD
1u0}Mau ‘Dd
4t—l fajeeuy
vr sisuaizeBuezn, ‘5
r sisuaeqn}w ‘9
eyepnesibuo; ‘g
eka ta eee
Zululand ontcrops
ee ees SE eae eae
paweu-up
|
sisuapuejninz v
luad3s0yUeRA ‘H
tyoeqsasB ‘9
v ‘dso
t B}eBuoja ‘5
ec eed sence
——_ eyeojns
SIIISSI} "H
snueoisye ‘95
2 - es eters coma a } . ae
1A. tumida 7 de
B. rotunda
V. obesa
P umzambaensis
P sulcata
A. tumida
H. haughtoni
B. longicaudata
G. africanus
C. umzambaensis
C. transkeiensis
B. pondolandensis
Indet sp 2103
Indet sp. 2104
Indet sp. 2108
H. fissilis
C. gardeni
P. thompsoni
O. pennata
B. sicarius
?Cnestocythere
R. nealei
8. andersoni
Indet sp, 2078
A.
B. longicaudata
C. newtoni
P. zululandensis
C. transkeiensis
P. umzambaensis
H. haughtoni
R. nealei
Cytherella spp.
oe oe 8-H
B. sicarius
B. pondolandensis /-—_______..|
G. africanus
ecareod Ea aes
B. richardsbayensis |
C. umzambaensis See]
(ess)
ies eel
H. fissils ae
P sulcata oe —______ eee
A. tumida
C. gardeni a ee
O. pennata ares
G. elongata
O.sp.A
C. griesbachi
H. vanhoepeni
A zululandensis
G. africanus / U. stragulata Zone Un-named
C_ mfoloziensis
B. longicaudata
b
aa
aia
C. mtubaensis
C. luzangaziensis
R. nealei
C. newtoni
Cytherella sp.
H, haughtoni
P zululandensis
G. africanus
C. klingeri
B. richardsbayensis
C._umzambaensis
O. pennata
U. stragulata
R umzambaensis
H. fissilis
B.andersoni
C. transkeiensis
Con. Ill Con. IV Sant. Il Sant. Ill Camp. |
ululandensis
|
equiezwip
6H
sdoid}iio puejninz
Fig. 46. Basis of proposed ostracod zonation at Umzamba, BH9 (Richards Bay), and the Zululand
outcrops in the Mfolozi Valley and False Bay areas. Bold vertical lines indicate zonal boundaries, and bold
species ranges are those used in defining zone limits. Ticks on horizontal lines at the top of each locality
indicate position of ostracod-bearing samples relative to ammonite zones.
Z = Zone, S.Z. = Subzone.
917
WNASNW NVOISV HLNOS AHL 4O SIVNNV
VGOOVULSO NVINOLNVS GNV ‘NVIOVINOO ‘NVINOUAL
AVG
218 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Figure 47 summarizes the ostracod zonal scheme for south-east Africa
defined above and set out in Figure 46. The most complete zonation is that for the
Richards Bay area (BH9), where four zones have been recognized in the
Santonian II-III sequence. Although the base of this sequence is unconformable
on Pre-Cambrian granite, so that it is not possible to define the base of the
lowermost zone (Cytherelloidea newtoni Zone), its upper limit is probably
laterally synchronous with that of the Veenia obesa Zone at Umzamba. This is
because at both localities the primary control on the range of the overlying
Gibberleberis africanus—Brachycythere pondolandensis Zone is the vertical
distribution of the latter species and I am confident that the range of this species
in both areas is very similar, particularly its level of appearance (Fig. 46). North
of BH9, in the region of the Zululand outcrops, the Cytherelloidea newtoni Zone
must be time-equivalent with part of the Gibberleberis africanus—Unicapella
Zululand
Umzamba BH -9 outcrops
2% ; i ?
CAMP. | A. zululandensis ? C1
Zone
A. tumida Zone H. vanhoepeni Zone
? 9
A.tumida Zone
SANT. Ill S. Ill
: Un -named
G. africanus/
Subzone
B.
pondolandensis
G. africanus/ G. africanus/
Zone
B. pondolandensis U.stragulata
Zone Zone
C. gardeni
Subzone
SANT. Il ool
C.newtoni Zone
CON. IV C.1V
Fig. 47. Summary of ostracod zonation at Umzamba, BH9 (Richards Bay), and Zululand
outcrops, and correlation with the ammonite zonation of Kennedy & Klinger (1975).
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 219
stragulata Zone, but because Brachycythere pondolandensis has not been
recognized this far north, the equivalence cannot be assessed.
The upper limit of the Gibberleberis africanus—Brachycythere pondolanden-
sis Zone appears to be lower in Santonian HI at BH9 than at Umzamba.
However, because the samples that control the boundary at Umzamba are widely
spaced, this difference may be more apparent than real. In either case, the zone
can be correlated between the two faunas because the species used to define it do
not appear to be climatically controlled. At Richards Bay, the late Santonian III
strata can be placed in a short zone whose upper limit probably coincides with the
Santonian—Coniacian boundary (Haughtonileberis vanhoepeni Zone). This seems
to provide a useful marker between the two stages. Unfortunately, no similar
zone can be recognized at either of the other two localities, because sufficiently
comprehensive ostracod assemblages from local Campanian I strata are not yet
available. At Umzamba I believe that the establishment of two subzones in
Santonian IJ—mid-Santonian III strata will provide additional refinement to age
determinations using ostracods. Although a northward extension of the
lowermost (Cytherelloidea gardeni Subzone) cannot yet be recognized, the one
record of the species at Richards Bay does place the relevant horizon at the upper
boundary of the subzone in terms of height above the ammonite-defined
Santonian II-III boundary.
At present, no satisfactory zonation can be effected for the Coniacian strata
in the Zululand outcrops, although the Coniacian IV outcrops have been included
in the one zone defined for this area. In particular, the potentially useful species
that have been recognized in Coniacian III samples are not yet well enough
known to define their ranges.
J(c)—1 and Agulhas Bank
Borehole J(c)—1 lay on the Tugela delta top (Du Toit & Leith 1974; Dingle
1981), approximately 80 km south-west of the Richards Bay area. Despite this
geographical proximity, there is a striking dissimilarity between the faunas from
the two areas, with no species common. This is particularly so in the
cytheraceans, where no genera are common. The presence of Bythocypris cf.
richardsbayensis suggests that there may have been limited contact between the
delta top and the Zululand area to the north-east, but the appearance of Krithe in
the uppermost Cenomanian and Turonian provides further evidence that the
sedimentary environments of the areas were markedly different (the earliest
record of Krithe in the Richards Bay—Zululand area is in Campanian IV of the
Mfolozi Valley). Dingle (1981) recognized a similar dichotomy between the two
areas in Campanian—Maastrichtian strata, so that the present study indicates that
differences in the ostracod faunas were established at the earliest point in the
sedimentary history of the delta, and were maintained throughout the remainder
of the Cretaceous period.
The two indeterminate cytheraceans (Indet. sp. 2314 and Indet. sp. 2312) in
the uppermost Cenomanian apparently have no close relatives either in Zululand
220 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
or higher up in the J(c)—1 borehole. Indet. sp. 2314 is superficially similar to
Rocaleberis, a genus that is first recorded from the Lower Maastrichtian of
Argentina, and which is believed to have evolved into the widespread Tertiary
taxon Henryhowella (Bertels 1976). Until more specimens of Indet. sp. 2314 are
available, it is not possible to evaluate any potential relationships, but the
palaeogeographic implications for any link of this sort with Argentina would be
considerable. The presence of Dutoitella mimica in the Santonian extends the
lower range of this species, and of the genus in J(c)—1 where it has previously
been recorded from the Campanian (Dingle 1981). This confirms a faunal link
between the outer Tugela delta top and the Agulhas Bank, which Dingle (1981)
detected in Campanian and Maastrichtian strata, and further emphasizes the
isolation of the J(c)—1 faunas from Zululand and Umzamba (Fig. 48).
Climatic control
Figure 48 shows the distribution of 24 species of Santonian ostracods between
Umzamba, Richards Bay (BH9), and outcrops in Zululand. Previous. analyses
(Dingle 1980) have suggested that sedimentary environments at the first two sites
were similar (Shallow water, <100 m) during Santonian II and III times, so in
these cases like is being compared with like. Farther north, where conditions
during this period were probably somewhat deeper (200-300 m), comparisons
are less meaningful.
Of the 32 species recorded from Umzamba and Richards Bay, 15 are
common. Although some of these species are rare and indeterminate, a similarity
factor of only 47 per cent between populations of the same age, deposited under
similar conditions, and which for the most part are well preserved and well
represented, seems significantly low. Table 17 lists the species that are common
and restricted to the two areas. Including species which do occur in the other
area, but which are rare and restricted in range, 26 per cent of the Umzamba and
38 per cent of the Richards Bay faunas can be considered characteristic of their
respective areas. The species that are ubiquitous constitute 43 and 42 per cent of
the Umzamba and Richards Bay faunas, respectively. These two faunas are listed
here as ‘high’- and ‘low’-latitude assemblages (the distance is 2,9 degrees). A
significant provincialism has also been recorded in the ammonite faunas from the
two regions (Klinger & Kennedy 1980).
In assessing the possible causes for this Cretaceous faunal partition, it is
necessary to consider the physical setting of the two areas. They lie 320 km apart
along a relatively straight coast on which the main intervening feature during
early Upper Cretaceous times was the Tugela Delta whose top probably
projected seaward, causing an easterly bulge in the coastline (Dingle 1981, fig. 72;
Dingle et al. 1983, figs 145-146; this paper Fig. 51). Richards Bay lay in the
vicinity of a relatively buoyant basement structure (Richards Bay Arch), which
was inundated by the Upper Cretaceous transgression in Santonian II times. The
modern coastline of Zululand bulges farther eastwards (caused by outbuilding of
Upper Cretaceous and Tertiary sediments), but is essentially similar (Fig. 49).
pha |
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA
6H Ut ‘dds e101 2467
4 »DIDBUO]A S1dAga}AaqGqlyD
,2Ivjnsv.4s pjjadvo1u
sisuapupjnjnz siddkovavg
sIsuadvgspapyoU Siuddr0yIAg
x eYIDGSAlUS vaplopyjasdayIAyD
luadaoyuna Sisagapuojysnn yy
MasUuyy SladayiAD
1u0jMau vaplopjjasayjC yD
poulyuoo
[B30] JO %8e
IoyeM ,WLIeM,
opnyyey] MO]
ANV1N1NZ
[ISSOJ 9u0Z = add] pjog
jo1ju09 yidap-1ajeM ATqeqoid = |
ATUO 6HE = xx
Ajuo sdoisjno purynynz = ,
6Had 1e ‘dds %7Zp ‘equiezuig ye ‘dds %eEp
sisuapquivzuin siddkovivd 1uO]Ysnvy SldagajMojysnvyy
SISUADQUIDZUIN Dap1o]JadayjAD »SISUapuBjopuod asaysdoKyovig
, xOpNuny vansaysoiyduy pIvpNnvIIBUO] adayIAIKYIDAG
piouuad vjja1149—
syissif sldaqapuojysnvyy
yeIpousoyul, ‘snoynbiq~
1aj]vauU DIddUKDY
{iuosdapun vjojiddopawg
d1e1 NG YINOS spud}x9
LI ATSV
SNIADIIS AADYIAIXYIDAG
snuvaidfo s14aqgaj4aqqiy
‘dds [e101 %¢T
1uapavs vaployasayjrD ppunjod adaysdoKyovAg
pIDIINS DUIOPUOg psaqo vIUIaA
SISUAIAYSUDA] S1addYIAD 1uosduoyy asayiKooskydoavd
o1v1 jnq YOU spud}xo pouljuos
[210} JO %9Z
I9}@M .[OOO,
opninel ysty
VEANVZNN
‘UMOYS JOU Sa1oads d}RUILIOJOPUT “S9URIIIO} SRUT[D poysossns puv vyeI}s ULTUOJULS ULOLIJW 1Sed-YINOS UT spooeNso Jo UOTINGIUsIp eneds
yy) ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
U BH9 Z
C. newtoni G. africanus
P. sulcata
O. pennata
H. vanhoepeni
B. sicarius
R. nealei 2
C. umzambaensis
SS
C. griesbachi
B. richardsbaensis
Fig. 48. Temporal distribution of 24 selected species of ostracods between Umzamba (U),
Richards Bay (BH9), and the Zululand outcrops in the Mfolozi Valley and False Bay (Z).
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA IDS
Z U BH9 Z
C. transkeiensis
C. klingeri
A. tumida
is
C. gardeni
P, thompsoni
V. obesa
B. andersoni
U. strangulata
H. fissilis H. haughtoni
B. pondolandensis
224 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Richards
Port Edward
Port St. Johns
Fig. 49. Modern biogeographical zones of the south-east African coast (Brown
& Jarman 1978). Inshore water-temperature data and upwelling characteristics
are from Schumann (pers. comm. 1983).
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA oes
Therefore, there seem to have been no significant physical barriers, beyond those
which exist today, to free migration between the two areas, a presumption that is
strengthened by the fact that over 40 per cent of each fauna is ubiquitous.
Consequently, I surmise that the factors controlling the faunal distribution were
related to water-mass properties, e.g. temperature, salinity, and turbidity.
Biogeographical studies of the modern coastal biota have identified three
marine provinces along the south-east coast: tropical, subtropical, and warm
temperate (Brown & Jarman 1978), with the boundary between the last two lying
in the vicinity of 31°S latitude (about 10 km north of Umzamba, Fig. 49). The
limiting factor between the subtropical and warm-temperate provinces seems to
be the mean minimum water temperatures (see Brown & Jarman 1978), which
south of 31°S range 10-15 °C, and north of 31°S range 18-20 °C (see Fig. 49 for
further details of inshore water temperatures, which were supplied by E. Schu-
mann (National Research Institute of Oceanology, Stellenbosch, pers. comm.
1983)). This suggests that the faunal discontinuity is related to a difference of
6-7 °C in the mean minimum water temperatures. The key factor here is the
occurrence of persistent nearshore upwelling south of Port Edward (just south of
31°S) (E. Schumann, pers. comm. 1983) that modifies the relatively high
temperatures of the south-west flowing Agulhas current (up to 25 °C at 31°S). No
data are available on the distribution of modern Ostracoda, but these boundaries
are clearly defined in the distribution of important taxa such as corals and
molluscs.
Comparisons with the present situation cannot be taken far because elements
of the oceanographic circulation, in which the western-boundary Agulhas Current
is dominant, have not been identified earlier than mid-Tertiary (e.g. Martin
1981), although Hag (1981) has suggested that it was in existence by early
Palaeocene times. A speculative Cretaceous palaeocirculation was discussed by
Gordon (1973, fig. 4), who predicted a north-east or east-north-eastward flowing
current along the south-east coast of Africa in Santonian times, based on the
assumption of a more poleward location of the equivalents of the modern
southern-oceans low-pressure atmospheric cells. Recently, Barron & Washington
(1982) have modelled various atmospheric parameters using a mid-Cretaceous
(100 m.y.) global palaeogeography, and concluded that in fact the reverse
situation is likely to have occurred: low-pressure cells were located over the
oceans adjacent to the southern portions of South America, Africa, and
Madagascar—India. In Figure 50 we have used this distribution to speculate on
wind and ocean currents. Because south-east Africa lay within the westerly wind
belt and a southern-ocean return current can be expected between 55° and 60°S,
an eastward-flowing ocean current is predicted along the northern part of the
mid-Cretaceous southern ocean, with an east-north-east component off the coast
of south-east Africa. This is in fact what Gordon (1973) suggested (for different
reasons), although I do not anticipate a major southerly current into the palaeo-
Mozambique Channel as he did. It is also similar to that produced from
palaeogeographical considerations by Lloyd (1982), and numerically modelled by
ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
226
“MoS S.0$ Ajoyeutxoidde say puryninZ “ured (Sutsi9A01)
JeuoosuoW B YIM ATqissod ‘onuRTY YINOg dy} JO 10}99s UJOYJIOU MORN = ¢€ ‘skYIA], WoI, preMynos SUIMOY
s}Ud1INS YIM ‘AeMevas uvreyes-suey Arerodway = Z “JUoLIMS uINjol & UL SUNINSEI UOIXd]JoI}01 ULDZIO) uIOYINOS. = [|
(7861) uosuIyseA 2 UoIIeg Jo AydeIS0o800RJed pue Bufopow sinssoid s10ydsoune 9y}] UO poseg ‘soul
SNOIIRIJOID-PIU UT SJUSIIN JO}VM BORJINS ULIIO URIPUT JSOM-YINos pure ‘skyIa], ‘oNURTYW YINOS ‘UIOyIN0G ‘~C “SLY
ya e
(sueqw OQOOL 8 066) YbIY R S}uaIND ag0eJINS UeaDQ ~——_”
Ne
(saequi O86) MO| (=) pue}
:S[J29 ainsseid sleydsow jy suiBsew jeyuauiyuoyH = — — — —
oO
06 09 (ol oe 09 06 Ozl OSL
fm po
a
7
7
09
os
Ov
oe
02
OL
0)
4oyenb
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA DT,
Seidova & Yenikeev (1983). Some modification of Barron & Washington’s (1982)
100 m.y. model will be necessary for early Santonian time (say 82 m.y.) but the
essential geographical features were still in existence at this time, so probably no
significant ocean-circulation changes had occurred: a narrow South Atlantic and
Southern Ocean; the close proximity of India and Madagascar to Africa; and
continuity of a South American—Antarctic—Australasian landmass. In Figure 51 a
palaeogeographical sketch of the Umzamba-—Richards Bay area in Santonian
times is shown, with a north-east flowing offshore current (East Coast Current).
Barron & Washington (1982, fig. 2) predict a mean annual range of approxi-
mately 12—22 °C in surface temperatures in the vicinity of coastal south-east
Africa for mid-Cretaceous times, in comparison with regional averages of
15-24 °C at present (7imes Atlas 1980). Coastal upwelling in modern times
effects a local gradient, lowering the temperature of the higher-latitude sites
along the coast by several degrees, with resultant faunal provincialism (Fig. 49).
Such a mechanism could not have operated in Santonian times for two reasons.
Firstly, the offshore westerly winds would have moved surface water to their left
(i.e. inshore), and secondly, the north-east flowing current had its left side to the
coast (and dynamic upwelling in the Southern Hemisphere occurs on the right
side of currents (G. Brundrit, University of Cape Town, pers. comm. 1984)). In
Table 17 the Santonian faunas from these two sites are referred to as ‘cool’- and
‘warm ’-water assemblages (high and low latitude), respectively, but at this stage it
is not clear how a significant temperature contrast between the areas was
maintained. One possibility is that the boundary between them represents the
southernmost limit of penetration by south-west moving inshore cells of warmer
water that broke off from the regional anti-clockwise gyre to the north of the
Madagascar-—India landmass (Fig. 50).
On Figure 51, a temperature gradient across the north-east flowing East
Coast Current is indicated, with warmer waters inshore, and cooler temperatures
in the deeper and/or more oceanic areas farther offshore. This arrangement is
suggested by the faunal differences between the inshore localities of Umzamba
and Zululand, and the offshore localities of borehole J(c)—1 on the outer Tugela
delta top and the Agulhas Bank. Although there is no substantive evidence for
strong links between J(c)—1 and the Agulhas Bank until Campanian times, the
presence of Dutoitella mimica in the Santonian of J(c)—1 suggests that the
environmental conditions responsible for the faunal differences between the
inshore and offshore areas around south-east Africa were already established by
Santonian times. Water-temperature differences seem the most likely determi-
nant because, although the Tugela delta top was subjected to large salinity
fluctuations, there is no evidence that this was the case on the Agulhas Bank.
Recolonization of south-east Africa after the mid-Cretaceous hiatus
Dingle (1982) recognized a major dichotomy in the ostracod faunas of
south-east Africa across the mid-Cretaceous hiatus, first described by Kennedy &
Klinger (1971). The extent of the non-sequence varies from place to place, and at
outcrop in Zululand includes uppermost Cenomanian to lower Coniacian strata
228 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Santonian coastline
Present coastline
False Bay
area Sy
southerly
penetration by
intermittent
inshore elements
of tropical
currents
YS Tugela delta
se)
Durban
=— cooler offshore
warmer waters
inshore if e
@
&
ff §
tf)
~
So
oe
Umzamba __, Go
~
er
Fig. 51. Santonian palaeogeography of south-east Africa, and
predicted nearshore current patterns and temperature characteristics.
BH¢9 locates Richard Bay. Coordinates are for modern location.
(e.g. Kennedy & Klinger 1975). Boreholes closer to the coast in Zululand indicate
a shorter break (?late Cenomanian to mid-Turonian—McLachlan & McMillan
1979), and suggest that the earliest sediments of the transgression become older
north-eastwards (e.g. Dingle et al. 1983). Using Van Hinte’s (1976) time-scale,
the hiatus across the Mzinene—St. Lucia formations boundary varies from
3 to 6 m.y. in duration. .
Figure 52 shows the temporal distribution of key ostracod taxa in south-east
Africa in Valanginian to earliest Campanian strata across the hiatus. Pre-Albian
assemblages are characterized by various species of genera such as Progono-
cythere, Rostrocytheridea, Procytherura, and Acrocythere, while Albian to
Cenomanian faunas are characterized by Arculicythere and Isocythereis. These
have been referred to as the South Gondwana ostracod faunas A and B,
respectively (Dingle 1984). In addition, they have common elements such as
Majungaella, Sondagella, Pirileberis, Makatinella, and Pongolacythere that give
them added distinctiveness. With the exception of Cythereis, none of the
cytheracean genera present prior to the mid-Cretaceous hiatus have representa-
tives above the Cenomanian in south-east Africa, and even in this case no species
are common (C. agulhasensis, Albian, Agulhas Bank; and C. klingeri, C. cf.
luzangaziensis, and C. mfoloziensis in the Coniacian of Zululand). The South
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 229
Fauna A Fauna B
k x I =
4 = oc oe a z oc z z =
=z = § ¢ a = Ww = <= <=
> =x a < < ro) _ no oO
faunas not known
PIRILEBERIS
mid- Cretaceous hiatus in S.E. Africa
MAKATINELLA
PONGOLACYTHERE aie
ISOCYTHEREIS
CYTHEREIS =
©
eS
PROGONOCY THERE
a
ROSTROCYTHERIDEA
esd
MAJUNGAELLA :
SONDAGELLA Were Ee .
aa ;
PROCYTHERURA ie |
ACROCYTHERE is
ARCULICY THERE
aa
c
Le
GIBBERLEBERIS
BRACHYCYTHERE
HAUGHTONILEBERIS me
AMPHICYTHERURA bee!
OERTLIELLA ee:
ee UNICAPELLA
| Relies
*-on Agulhas Bank RAYNERIA
DUTOITELLA |
PONDOINA ere
HERMANITES
TRACHYLEBERIS
Fig. 52. Distribution of the main cytheracean genera in south-east
Africa for Valanginian to Campanian time. Turonian occurrences are for
Tanzania as re-interpreted from Bate & Bayliss (1969). Numbers of
extant species are indicated by thickness of bars. Note the major
Cenomanian—Turonian/Coniacian dichotomy. Faunas A and B are the
South Gondwana faunas of Dingle (1984).
230 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Gondwana faunas are Cytheruridae—Schizocytheridae—Progonocytheridae-
dominated (Table 18).
TABLE 18
Cytheracea in south-east Africa shown as number of species (in parentheses) in families, as
percentage of cytheracean element. (After Dingle 1982, 1984, this paper.)
Collisarborisidae
Schulerideidae
Brachycytheridae
Cytheruridae
Schizocytheridae
Trachyleberididae
Cytherideidae
Bythocytheridae
Progonocytheridae
Loxoconchidae
Indet.
Total no. spp.
* = present on Agulhas Bank
Dingle (1982) characterized post-Coniacian faunas as Trachyleberididae—
Brachycytheridae—Schizocytheridae-dominated, and Table 18 and Figure 52
show that these higher taxa were all represented during Coniacian times. In other
words, elements that dominated during much of Upper Cretaceous time were also
aggressive recolonizers of the region after the non-sequence, in particular the
long-ranging cytheracean species Brachycythere longicaudata, Haughtonileberis
haughtoni, and Cythereis klingeri, medium-ranging cytheracean species such as
Gibberleberis africanus and Oertliella pennata, and long-ranging non-cytheracean
types such as Bythocypris richardsbayensis and Cytherelloidea umzambaensis. It is
interesting to note that the earliest known member of the subfamily Unicapellinae
(which forms a minor, but distinctive element of Campanian—Maastrichtian
faunas) occurs in the Coniacian IV of Zululand. The total failure of the original
cytheracean taxa (South Gondwana fauna B) to regain niches is a phenomenon of
considerable significance, because although the sedimentary environments of
Albian—Cenomanian and Coniacian—Santonian strata at Zululand outcrop sites
were probably not strictly comparable, with the latter probably somewhat deeper
(compare Fig. 39, this paper, and fig. 41 in Dingle 1984), the two were sufficiently
similar to indicate that a combination of phylogenetic and regional palaeo-
geographic factors was responsible. This question will be examined in the next
section.
GREATER AFRICA AND GONDWANALAND
Aspects of ostracod distribution in the South Atlantic during Cretaceous
times have been considered by Krémmelbein (1976), Bertels (1977), Dingle
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA Mai
(1982), and Tambareau (1982a, 1982b) amongst others, and the latter references
contain a comprehensive compilation of specific citations. These works have
shown that the major south-east African mid-Cretaceous faunal dichotomy,
which has been referred to in a previous section, is not present in west Africa and
Brazil, and recent studies in north Africa (e.g. Bismuth er al. 1981) indicate that it
is also not present along the south-west shores of Tethys. It is present in Iran
(Grosdidier 1973) and Tanzania (Bate & Bayliss 1969). The problem is therefore
twofold: when did the faunal change take place in south-east Africa, and why?
The difficulty in assessing the precise timing is caused by the non-sequence in
uppermost Cenomanian to Turonian strata in south-east Africa, but can be
tackled by considering the regional distribution of two key taxa: Brachycythere
longicaudata and Haughtonileberis haughtoni. These are particularly well suited
because there are numerous records of the two genera from greater Africa
(Tables 6, 9); in south-east Africa the two genera, and in particular the species
selected, are diagnostic elements in the post-Turonian populations (Figs 46, 48).
Figure 48 shows that in Zululand B. longicaudata is known from Coniacian III,
and H. haughtoni from Coniacian IV. Given the limitations of the sample
distribution, both species can be considered amongst the earliest (and most
abundant) colonizers of the area during the Upper Cretaceous transgression.
Neither genus is present in underlying Albian—Cenomanian Mzinene Formation
strata. SEM photographs of material originally described by Bate & Bayliss
(1969) show that both species occur in the Upper Turonian of Tanzania (recorded
as B. aff. sapucariensis and Curfsina turonica (paratype, BMNH 10783)). The
Cenomanian—Turonian succession appears to be complete in Tanzania, but a
faunal dichotomy with some of the significant characters of that noted in south-
east Africa is also present here: neither Brachycythere. nor Haughtonileberis
occurs in the Cenomanian; and Majungaella, which occurs in the Albian and
Lower Cenomanian, does not extend into the Turonian. In eastern Africa,
therefore, the dichotomy occurs between the local top of the Lower Cenomanian
(with Rotalipora appenninica and Planomalina buxtorfi), and local base of the
Upper Turonian (with Globotruncana helvetica and G. linneiana, amongst others,
see Table 5). In fact it could lie within the Cenomanian because Bate & Bayliss
(1969: 120) record a possible intra-Cenomanian hiatus above which Majungaella
does not occur (in beds with Rotalipora greenhornensis and R. cushmani). The
latter possibility can also not be ruled out in Zululand, because the highest record
so far for Majungaella is Cenomanian III (Dingle 1984). (No ostracod fauna was
recovered from Cenomanian IV, which is probably upper R. cushmani Zone.) In
view of the fact that Bate & Bayliss (1969) did not describe large faunas and had
no ostracods of Lower—Middle Turonian age, it seems more appropriate to
assume the less precise age for the faunal change at this stage of our knowledge.
On the basis of ammonite faunas, Reyment & Tait (1972: 93) postulate a late
Lower Turonian date at which ‘nekroplanktonic ammonite shells were able to
drift with oceanic currents over the entire Atlantic’. Reyment ef al. (1976) show a
series of palaeogeographies in which the various west African—Brazilian—north
V2) ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
African connections developed in Albian—Turonian times, and concluded that
free surface-water connections between north-west Africa and the south-west
Indian Ocean were established by Middle Turonian times. This accords with our
data, with the exception that no trans-Saharan connection was postulated before
the early Turonian (Reyment et al. 1976; Reyment 1980b). The occurrence of
Brachycythere gr. sapucariensis in the Cenomanian of Tunisia, Gabon, and
north-west Brazil (see Table 6) shows that at least temporary communication
must have been established by early Cenomanian times, presumably across the
Sahara, but conceivably around north-west Africa across the Brazil—west Africa
land bridge (Fig. 53A).
Neither B. longicaudata nor H. haughtoni has been recorded from west
Africa, Brazil and north Africa, but both of the genera involved have a longer
history in these areas than in the western Indian Ocean region (Tables 6, 9):
Brachycythere gr. or cf. sapucariensis appears in the Lower Cenomanian of
Tunisia and Upper (possibly Lower) Cenomanian of Gabon, and ranges into the
Lower Coniacian (Brazil), while several species of ‘Haughtonileberis’ have been
recorded from Gabon (Grosdidier 1979), the earliest of which is Upper Albian. In
addition, four other species of Brachycythere occur in Lower Turonian, or older
T
ee Ml
~~.
eecee
N.E. limit of
Pondoina near
BH9Q (Santonian)
A Bs land areas B
Upper Cenomanian _/ edge of deep-sea Lower Turonian
Be basins
Fig. 53. Cenomanian and Turonian ostracod distributions, migrations, and intercontinental
relationships. A. Upper Cenomanian. B. Lower Turonian.
Abbreviations—large type: M = Morocco, TU = Tunisia, E = Egypt, SA = Saudi Arabia,
I = Iran, TA = Tanzania, SE = south-east Africa, G = Gabon, BR = Brazil; small type:
B = Brachycythere, H = Haughtonileberis, P = Pondoina. 1 = Brazil—west Africa land bridge,
2 = Walvis—Rio Grande land bridge. Arrows denote migration routes. .
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 233
strata of north Africa. Brachycythere sapucariensis is very close to B. longi-
caudata, and its wide geographical distribution suggests that it was probably
ancestral to the latter.
From the above, it is clear that Brachycythere was widespread in the
Equatorial Atlantic—south-west Tethys, and Haughtonileberis was widespread in
the northern part of the South Atlantic before either genus appeared in the
western Indian Ocean sometime between the Middle Cenomanian and Middle
Turonian. In east Africa, they displaced the extant fauna, and in south-east
Africa they colonized inshore areas during the Turonian—Coniacian transgres-
sion. Significantly, the first appearance in Iran of Brachycythere (five species) was
in ?Coniacian—early Santonian strata (Grosdidier 1973). The questions to
consider now are why did these taxa infiltrate new areas, why were they so
successful, and why was there a phylogenetic ‘explosion’ in the newly colonized
areas (many of the post-Turonian genera in south and east Africa are endemic)?
Table 6 shows that Brachycythere spread rapidly along the southern shores of
Tethys between Morocco and Iran during Lower Cenomanian to Coniacian
times. Grosdidier (1973) records a major faunal break in the latter region across a
late Cenomanian to ?Coniacian—early Santonian hiatus, where the older fauna,
characterized by Cythereis (three species), Veeniacythereis jezzineensis, and
Dordoniella? is replaced by one characterized by Brachycythere (five species),
Veenia, Pterygocythere?, Ovocytheridea, Buntonia, and Cythereis. Because
Cythereis lindiensis is recorded in the Cenomanian of both Iran and Tanzania,
indicating that there was faunal contact between the two areas in pre-Turonian
times, it 1s superficially tempting to suggest that Brachycythere arrived in east
Africa, and even south-east Africa, via Arabia. Other evidence does not support
this suggestion, however, and in particular we can cite the restriction of Pondoina
to Gabon (Turonian), Brazil (Coniacian), and south-east Africa (Santonian)
(Krommelbein 1972), and the non-occurrence of Haughtonileberis in Arabia and
Veeniacythereis in the South Atlantic and western Indian oceans. These
distributions suggest two dispersion routes out of the Equatorial Atlantic
(Fig. 53B). They were favoured by different genera, so that the partitioning of
the original (Cenomanian—Turonian) Gabon-Brazil fauna resulted in two
generically distinct younger faunas along the southern shores of Tethys and in the
western Indian Ocean.
Figure 50 shows that the region in which early evolution of Brachycythere
and Haughtonileberis (Albian—early Cenomanian) took place lay in low latitudes,
presumably in warm waters as part of a ‘tropical’ population. This suggests that
water temperatures would have been a limiting factor in any migrations, at least
during the early part of their development, although these genera must have been
inherently more tolerant than the bulk of the Equatorial Atlantic-Tethyan
tropical fauna, which never managed to achieve significant expansion into the
Indian Ocean: for example Ovocytheridea, Veenia, Veeniacythereis, Buntonia,
Glenocythere, and Schuleridea (see Tambareau 19826 for a summary). A second
factor limiting migration would have been the palaeogeography of the
234 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Equatorial—South Atlantic in Albian—Cenomanian times. Structural elevations in
the vicinity of the Walvis Ridge—Rio Grande Rise and a north-west Brazil—west
Africa ridge (Rand & Makesoone 1983) prevented significant communication
between the two parts of the South Atlantic and the southern parts of the North
Atlantic until they were modified sufficiently to allow circulation in at least
surface waters. These considerations suggest that a combination of factors was
necessary for the proposed migrations: partial or complete breakdown of the
subaerial barriers, and the establishment of ocean currents that brought warm
water into the south-east Atlantic and west Indian oceans. Both would have been
dependent on the evolving palaeogeography of the fragmenting Gondwanaland.
Of the two barriers mentioned, only the Walvis—Rio Grande Ridge is thought to
have been significant, because the Gabon and Brazilian basins lay to the south of
the north-west Brazil—west African ‘land bridge’, which would not have been
effective in preventing trans-Saharan communication with Tunisia (Fig. 53B).
The mid-Cretaceous atmospheric and oceanic circulations suggested in Figure 50
imply that once the South Atlantic had opened sufficiently, and the Walvis barrier
was no longer complete, warm ocean currents, derived from the northern sector
of the South Atlantic, would have provided a suitable migration route for
shallow-water faunas around to south-east and east Africa. Warm water flowed
into the southern South Atlantic during the winter from the anticlockwise gyre
that lay to the north of the Walvis—Rio Grande Ridge. This flow may have been
strengthened in the summer by currents down the west coast of Africa if the gyre
reversed in a monsoon pattern (G. Brundrit, pers. comm. 1984). As a result,
currents flowing down the west coast of south-west Africa were relatively warm,
and would have penetrated into the palaeo- south-west Indian Ocean (Fig. 50).
This model is a modification of that proposed by Neale (1976), Dingle (1982), and
Tambareau (1982b). The fact that sedimentation had temporarily ceased in
coastal south-east Africa at the height of these migrations is merely a
stratigraphical complication (it was probably related to local crustal movements
and/or the circulation changes that were produced by continental separation) that
delayed the change in the local fossil record until sedimentation recommenced.
The success of the migrants in taking over most of the ecological niches is
presumably related to the general increase in ambient water temperatures, which
the incumbent (South Gondwana) faunas that had evolved in high latitudes could
not tolerate. It is also suggested that the rapid phylogenetic development that
occurred in Turonian—Coniacian times in the west Indian Ocean area can also be
attributed to this factor. As mentioned above, only a proportion of the Equatorial
Atlantic—south Tethys ostracod fauna was thermally tolerant enough to effect the
migration, while the extant south-east and east African faunas were put under
great stress by the arrival of new taxa and increasing water temperatures. Under
the circumstances, a period of radical readjustment and speciation in occupying
vacant ecological niches would be expected. Clearly, water temperatures in the
west Indian Ocean, particularly as long as a north-east current flowed along the
coast, would have been significantly lower than in the Equatorial Atlantic, so that
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 235
once the initial migrations had taken place, subsequent phylogenetic changes only
served to differentiate the colonists from their original tropical ancestors.
Consequently, south-east Africa has only a few significant faunal links with the
low-latitude Atlantic areas, but relatively strong links with east Africa, whose
faunas developed under similar circumstances.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
I gratefully acknowledge the assistance of Dr H. C. Klinger of the South
African Museum for guidance during fieldwork, and for valuable discussions on
the Cretaceous stratigraphy of south-east Africa. I also thank Professor
G. Brundrit (University of Cape Town) and Dr E. Schumann (National Research
Institute of Oceanology, Stellenbosch), who kindly gave advice and constructive
criticism on aspects of physical oceanography, and Professor A. C. Brown
(University of Cape Town) for discussions on the modern marine fauna along the
south-east African coast. The management of the Southern Oil Exploration
Corporation (SOEKOR) kindly supplied samples from the J(c)—1 borehole, and
permission to collect material from Umzamba was kindly granted by the
Secretary to the Minister of Agriculture, Forestry and Fisheries of the Transkei
Government. Thanks are also extended to Professor D. Crawford and Mr D.
Gerneke (Electron Microscope Unit, University of Cape Town) for their
assistance with SEM photography, and to Mrs Judy Woodford who draughted
most of the figures. The Editorial Board of the University of Cape Town is
thanked for a generous grant towards publication costs. Research grants from the
Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, and the University of Cape Town
for laboratory and fieldwork are gratefully acknowledged.
REFERENCES
ALEXANDER, C. I. 1929. Ostracoda of the Cretaceous of North Texas. Bull. Univ. Texas Bur.
econ. Geol. Technol. 2907: 1-137.
ALEXANDER, C. I. 1933. Shell structure of the ostracode genus Cytheropteron and fossil species
from the Cretaceous of Texas. J. Paleont. 7: 181-214.
APOSTOLESCU, V. 1963. Essai de zonation par les ostracodes dans le Crétacé du bassin du
Sénégal. Revue Inst. fr. Pétrole 18: 1675-1694.
BairD, W. 1845. Arrangement of British Entomostraca, with a list of species, particularly
noticing those which have as yet been discovered within the bounds of the Club. Hist.
Berwicksh. Nat. Club 2: 145-148.
BairD, W. 1850. The natural history of the British Entomostraca. London: Ray Society.
Barron, E. J. & WasuincTon, W. M. 1982. Cretaceous climate: a comparison of atmospheric
simulations with the geologic record. Palaeogeog. Palaeoclimat. Palaeoecol. 40: 103-133.
Bate, R. H. 1972. Upper Cretaceous ostracods from the Carnarvon Basin, Western Australia.
Spec. Pap. Palaeont. 10: 1-85.
Bate, R. H. & Baytiss, D. D. 1969. An outline of the Cretaceous and Tertiary Foraminifera
and of the Cretaceous ostracods of Tanzania. Proceedings of the 3rd African Micropaleonto-
logical Colloquium 1968: 113-164. Cairo: National Information and Documentation Centre.
236 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
BEenSon, R. H. 1977. The Cenozoic ostracode faunas of the Sao Paulo Plateau and the Rio
Grande Rise (DSDP Leg 39, Sites 356 and 357). Initial Rep. deep Sea Drilling Proj. 39:
869-883.
BerTELS, A. 1976. Evolutionary lineages of some Upper Cretaceous and Tertiary ostracodes of
Argentina. Abh. Verh. naturw. Ver. Hamburg 18/19 (suppl.): 175-190.
BErTELS, A. 1977. Cretaceous Ostracoda—South Atlantic. In: Swain, F. M., ed. Stratigraphic
micropalaeontology of Atlantic Basin and borderlands: 271-304. Amsterdam: Elsevier.
BismuTH, H., BOLTENHAGEN, C., DONZE, P., LE FEvrE, J. & Satnt-Marc, P. 1981. Middle and
Upper Cretaceous in the Djebel Semmama (northern central Tunisia); microstratigraphy
and sedimentological evolution. Bull. Cent. Rech. Explor.-Prod. Elf-Aquitaine 5: 193-267.
Bosquet, J. 1854. Monographie des crustacés fossiles du terrain crétacé du Duché Limbourg.
Mémoires de la Commission pour la description de la Carte géologique de la Néerlande 2:
53-126.
Brapy, G. S. 1880. Report on Ostracoda dredged by H.M.S. ‘Challenger’ during the years
1873-76. Rep. scient. Results Voy. Challenger (Zool.) 1 (3): 1-184.
Brapy, G. S., CrosskEYy, H. W. & RosBertson, D. 1874. A monograph of the post-Tertiary
Entomostraca of Scotland including species from England and Ireland. London: Palaeonto-
graphical Society.
Brown, A. C. & JARMAN, N. 1978. Coastal marine habitats. Jn: WERGER, M. J. A., ed.
Biogeography and ecology in southern Africa 2: 1239-1277. The Hague: Junk.
But er, E. A. & Jones, D. E. 1957. Cretaceous Ostracoda of Prothro and Rayburn salt domes,
Bienville Parish, Louisiana. Bull. geol. Surv. La 32: 1-65.
CHAPMAN, F. 1898. On Ostracoda from the ‘Cambridge Greensand’. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (2) 7:
331-346.
CHAPMAN, F. 1904. Foraminifera and Ostracoda from the Cretaceous of East Pondoland, South
Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 4: 221-237.
CHAPMAN, F. 1923. On some Foraminifera and Ostracoda from the Cretaceous of the Umzamba
River, Pondoland. Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 26: 107-118.
CoLLIGNon, M. 1965. Atlas des fossiles caractéristiques de Madagascar (Ammonites) 13.
(Coniacian). Tananarive: Service Géologique.
CoryELL_, H. N., SAmpLE, C. H. & JENNINGS, P. H. 1935. Bairdoppilata, a new genus of
Ostracoda, with two new species. Am. Mus. Novit. 777: 1-5.
DanmottE, R. & SAInT-Marc, P. 1972. Contribution a la connaissance des ostracodes crétacés du
Liban. Revta esp. Micropaleont. 4: 273-296.
DINGLE, R. V. 1969. Upper Cretaceous ostracods from the coast of Pondoland, South Africa.
Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 38: 347-385.
DINGLE, R. V. 1971a. Cytherelloidea gardeni nom. nov. (Ostracoda). Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 39:
355:
DINnGLE, R. V. 1971b. Some Cretaceous ostracodal assemblages from the Agulhas Bank (South
African continental margin). Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 39: 393-418.
DINGLE, R. V. 1976. Palaeogene ostracods fromthe continental shelf off Natal, South Africa.
Trans. R. Soc. S. Afr. 42: 35-79.
DINGLE, R. V. 1980. Marine Santonian and Campanian ostracods from a borehole at Richards
Bay, Zululand. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 82: 1-70.
DINGLE, R. V. 1981. The Campanian and Maastrichtian Ostracoda of south-east Africa. Ann. S.
Afr. Mus. 85: 1-181.
DINGLE, R. V. 1982. Some aspects of Cretaceous ostracod biostratigraphy of South Africa and
relationships with other Gondwanide localities. Cretaceous Research 3: 1-23.
DINGLE, R. V. 1984. Mid-Cretaceous Ostracoda from southern Africa and the Falkland Plateau.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 93: 97-211.
DINGLE, R. V., StESSER, W. G. & Newton, A. R. 1983. Mesozoic and Tertiary geology of
southern Africa. Rotterdam: Balkema.
DonzE, P., Coin, J. P., DAMotre, R., OERTLI, H. J., PEYPOUQUET, J. P. & Satp, R. 1982. Les
ostracodes du Campanien terminal a l’Eocéne inférieur de la coupe du Kef, Tunisie nord-
occidentale. Bull. Cent. Rech. Explor.-Prod. Elf-Aquitaine 6: 273-335.
Du Tort, S. R. & Leitn, M. J. 1974. The J(c)—1 borehole on the continental shelf near Stanger,
Natal. Trans. geol. Soc. S. Afr. 77: 247-252.
ETHERIDGE, R. 1904. Cretaceous fossils of Natal. 1. The Umkwelane Hill deposit. Rep. geol.
Surv. Natal Zululand 2: 71-93.
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA O37),
FLEGEL, K. 1905. Die Kreide en der bohmisch-schlesischen Grenze. Jb. geol. Bundesanst., Wien
35: 1—228:
Gorpon, W. A. 1973. Marine life and ocean surface currents in the Cretaceous. J. Geol. 81:
269-284.
Gowpa, S. S. 1966. Some ostracodes from the Trichinopoly Cretaceous of south India. Bull.
geol. Soc. India 3: 42-47.
GrekorF, N. 1951. Quelques ostracodes nouveaux du Senonien supérieur du Cameroun. Revue
mse jr. Petrole 22 53—59.
GrexorF, N. 1969. Sur la valeur stratigraphique et les relations paléogéographiques de quelques
ostracodes du Crétacé, du Paléocéne et de l’Eocéne inférieur d’Algérie orientale.
Proceedings of the 3rd African Micropaleontological Colloquium 1968: 227-248. Cairo:
National Information and Documentation Centre.
GROSDIDIER, E. 1973. Associations d’ostracodes du Crétacé d’Iran. Revue Inst. fr. Pétrole 28:
131-169.
GrosDIDIER, E. 1979. Principaux ostracodes marins de l’intervalle Aptien—Turonien du Gabon
(Afrique occidentale). Bull. Cent. Rech. Explor.-Prod. Elf-Aquitaine 3: 1-35.
Guna, D. K. 1971. A new species of Brachycythere (Ostracoda) from Upper Cretaceous of
Trichinopoly, south India. J. geol. Soc. India 12: 306-307.
Haq, B. U. 1981. Paleogene paleoceanography: early Cenozoic oceans revisited. Oceanol. Acta
(Special Issue). Proceedings of the 26th International Geological Congress, Paris 1980,
Colloquium C4, Geology of Oceans: 71-82.
HEINZ, R. 1928. Das Inoceramen-Profil der oberen Kreide Luneburgs. Mit Anfiithrung der neuen
Formen und deren Kennzeichnung. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der ober-Kretazischen Inocera-
men. Sond. 21. Jahr Jber. niedersdchs. geol. Ver. 21: 64-81.
HonicstTEIn, A. 1983. Senonian Ostracoda from Israel. Rep. Geol. Surv. Israel (Report
S/14/83): 1-295.
Howe, H. V. & LAurencicn, L. 1958. Introduction to the study of Cretaceous Ostracoda. Baton
Rouge, Louisiana: Louisiana State University.
JONES, T. R. 1849. A monograph of the Entomostraca of the Cretaceous Formations of England.
London: Palaeontological Society.
JoNEsS, T. R. 1884. Notes on the Foraminifera and Ostracoda from the deep boring at Richmond.
Q. Jl geol. Soc. Lond. 40: 766-777.
Jones, T. R. & HINDE, G. J. 1890. A supplementary monograph of the Cretaceous Entomostraca
of England and Ireland. London: Palaeontographical Society.
KENNEDY, W. J. & KLINGER, H. C. 1971. A major intra-Cretaceous unconformity in eastern
South Africa. J. geol. Soc. Lond. 127: 183-186.
KENNEDY, W. J. & KLINGER, H. C. 1975. Cretaceous faunas from Zululand and Natal, South
Africa. Introduction, stratigraphy. Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. (Geol.) 25: 263-315.
KLINGER, H. C., KAUFFMAN, E. G. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1980. Upper Cretaceous ammonites and
inoceramids from the off-shore Alphard Group of South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 82:
293-320.
KLINGER, H. C. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1977. Upper Cretaceous ammonites from a borehole near
Richards Bay, South Africa. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 72: 69-107.
KLINGER, H. C. & KENNEDY, W. J. 1980. The Umzamba Formation at its type section Umzamba
Estuary (Pondoland, Transkei), the ammonite content and palaeogeographical distribution.
Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 81: 207-222.
KLINGER, H. C., KENNEDY, W. J. & SIESSER, W. G. 1976. Yabeiceras (Coniacian ammonite)
from the Alphard Group off the southern Cape coast. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 69: 161-168.
KROMMELBEIN, K. 1964. Ostracoden aus der marinen ‘Kiisten-Kreide’ Brasiliens. 1:
Brachycythere (Brachycythere) sapucariensis n. sp. aus dem Turonium. Senckenberg. leth.
45: 489-495.
KROMMELBEIN, K. 1976. Remarks on marine Cretaceous ostracodes of Gondwanic distribution.
Proc. 5th African Colloquium on Micropalaeontology 1972, 1976: 539-551. Madrid: Revista
Espanola de Micropaleontologia.
LATREILLE, P. A. 1806. Genera Crustaceorum et Insectorum 1: 1-303. Paris.
Lioyp, C. R. 1982. The mid-Cretaceous; paleogeography; ocean circulation and temperature;
atmospheric circulation. J. Geol. 90: 393-413.
Lusimova, P. S. 1955. Ostracoda of the Middle Mesozoic formations of the central Volga area
and the Obshehego Sirta. Jn: LuBimova, P. S. & CHABAROVA, T. H., eds. Ostracoda of the
238 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM
Mesozoic sediments of the Volga-Urals region. Trans. All-Union Petrol. Sci. Res. Geol.
Explor. Inst. (V.N.I.G.R.1.) (N.S.) 84: 1-189. (In Russian.)
Makripes, M. 1979. Foraminifera of the Upper Cretaceous Mzamba Formation, Transkei,
southern Africa. Unpublished M.Sc. thesis, University of the Witwatersrand.
MANDELstTAM, M. I. 1960. Arthropods. In: Ortov, Y. A., ed. Elements of Palaeontology. 8:
1-515. Moscow: Geological and subsurface prospecting: Scientific and Technical Edition.
(In Russian. )
Martin, A. K. 1981. Evolution of the Agulhas Current and its palaeo-ecological implications. S.
Afr. J. Sci. 77: 547-554.
Masout, M. 1966. Sur quelques ostracodes fossiles mésozoiques (Crétacé) du bassin cétier de
Tarfaya (Maroc méridional). Colloq. int. Micropaléontologie, Dakar 1963: 119-134.
McLacuian, I. R. & McMittan, I. K. 1979. Microfaunal biostratigraphy, chronostratigraphy
and history of Mesozoic and Cenozoic deposits on the coastal mae of South Africa. Spec.
Publs geol. Soc. S. Afr. 6: 161-181.
Moore, R. C., ed. 1961. Treatise on invertebrate Paleontology. Pano, Arthropoda 3. Lawrence:
University of Kansas Press.
MULLER, G. W. 1894. Die Ostracoden des Golfes von Neapel und der angrenzenden
Meeresabschnitte. Fauna Flora Golf. Neapel 31: 1—404.
NEALE, J. W. 1975. The ostracod fauna from the Santonian chalk (Upper Cretaceous) of Gingin,
Western Australia. Spec. Pap. Palaeont. 16: 1-81.
NEALE, J. W. 1976. Cosmopolitanism and endemism—an Australian Upper Cretaceous para-
dox. Abh. Verh. naturw. Ver. Hamburg 18/19 (suppl.): 265-274.
NeuFvILLeE, E. M. H. 1973. Ostracoda from the Eze Aku shale (Turonian, Cretaceous),
Nkalagu, Nigeria. Bull. geol. Inst Univ. Upsala 8: 135-172.
OertTLi, H. J. 1963. Etude des ostracodes du Crétacé supérieur du bassin cétier de Tarfaya.
Notes Mém. Serv. Mines Carte géol. Maroc. 175: 267-279.
Poxorny, V. 1964. Oe6ertliella and Spinicythereis, new ostracod genera from the Upper
Cretaceous. Vest. ustred Ust. geol. 39: 283-284.
Puri, H. S. 1954. Contribution to the study of the Miocene of the Florida Panhandle. Part III
(Ostracoda). Bull. geol. Surv. Fla 3: 217-309.
RanpbD, H. M. & MAKEsoonge, J. M. 1983. Northeast Brazil and the final separation of South
America and Africa. Palaeogeog. Palaeoclimat. Palaeoecol. 38: 163-183.
Reuss, A. E. 1846. Die Versteinerungen der b6hmischen Kreide Formation 2: 59-148. Stuttgart:
Schweizerbart.
REYMENT, R. A. 1960. Studies on Nigerian Upper Cretaceous and Lower Tertiary Ostracoda.
Part 1: Senonian and Maastrichtian Ostracoda. Stockh. Contr. Geol. 8: 1-238.
REYMENT, R. A. 1980a. Paleo-oceanology and paleobiogeography of the Cretaceous South
Atlantic Ocean. Oceanologica Acta 3: 127-133.
REYMENT, R. A. 19805. Biogeography of the Saharan Cretaceous and Paleocene epicontinental
transgressions. Cretaceous Research 1: 299-327.
REYMENT, R. A., BENGTSON, P. & Tait, E. A. 1976. Cretaceous transgressions in Nigeria and
Sergipe—Alagoas (Brazil). Anais Acad. bras. Sci. 48 (suppl.): 253-264.
REYMENT, R. A. & Tait, E. A. 1972. Biostratigraphic dating of the early history of the South
Atlantic. Phil. Trans. R. Soc. Lond. (B) 264: 55-95.
Sars, G. O. 1866. Oversigt af Norges marine ostracoder. Forh. VidenskSelk. Krist. 7: 1-130.
Sars, G. O. 1888. Nye bidrag til kundskaken om Middelhavets Invertebrat fauna 4. Ostracoda
Mediterranea. Arch. Math. Naturv. 12: 173-324.
Sars, G. O. 1922-1928. An account of the Crustacea of Norway 9. Ostracoda, Parts 1-16:
1-277. Bergen: Bergen Museum.
SCHALLER, H. 1969. Revisao estratigrafica da Bacia de Sergipe/Alagoas. Boln tec. Petrobras 12:
21-86.
SEIDOvA, D. G. & YENIKEEV, V. H. 1983. Numerical modelling of the Mesozoic and Cenozoic
paleocirculation. Ocean Modelling 53: 5—8. Unpublished manuscript.
SYLVESTER-BRADLEY, P. 1948. The ostracode genus Cythereis. J. Paleont. 22: 792-797.
TAMBAREAU, Y. 1982a. Les ostracodes et l’évolution de l’Atlantique nord au Crétacé. Bull. Soc.
géol. Fr. 24 (S—6): 1077-1085.
TAMBAREAU, Y. 19826. Les ostracodes et Vhistoire géologique de |’Atlantique sud au Crétaceé.
Bull. Cent. Rech. Explor.-Prod. Elf-Aquitaine 6: 1-37.
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN, AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA 239
Times ATLAS 1980. The Times atlas of the world— Comprehensive edition, 6th edition. London:
Times Books.
TRIEBEL, E. 1950. Homdomorphe Ostracoden-Gattungen. Senckenbergiana 31: 313-330.
VAN DEN BoLp, W. A. 1964. Ostracoden aus der Oberkreide von Abu Rawash, Agypten.
Palaeontographica (A) 123: 111-136.
VAN HinteE, J. E. 1976. A Cretaceous time scale. Bull. Am. Ass. Petrol. Geol. 60: 269-287.
#
——
ns
6. SYSTEMATIC papers must conform to the /nternational code of zoological nomenclature (particu-
larly Articles 22 and 51).
Names of new taxa, combinations, synonyms, etc., when used for the first time, must be followed
by the appropriate Latin (not English) abbreviation, e.g. gen. nov., sp. nov., comb. nov., syn. nov.,
etc.
An author’s name when cited must follow the name of the taxon without intervening punctuation
and not be abbreviated; if the year is added, a comma must separate author’s name and year. The
author’s name (and date, if cited) must be placed in parentheses if a species or subspecies is trans-
ferred from its original genus. The name of a subsequent user of a scientific name must be separated
from the scientific name by a colon.
Synonymy arrangement should be according to chronology of names, i.e. all published scientific
names by which the species previously has been designated are listed in chronological order, with all
references to that name following in chronological order, e.g.:
Family Nuculanidae
Nuculana (Lembulus) bicuspidata (Gould, 1845)
Figs 14-15A
Nucula (Leda) bicuspidata Gould, 1845: 37.
Leda plicifera A. Adams, 1856: 50.
Laeda bicuspidata Hanley, 1859: 118, pl. 228 (fig. 73). Sowerby, 1871: pl. 2 (fig. 8a—b).
Nucula largillierti Philippi, 1861: 87.
Leda bicuspidata: Nicklés, 1950: 163, fig. 301; 1955: 110. Barnard, 1964: 234, figs 8-9.
Note punctuation in the above example:
comma separates author’s name and year
semicolon separates more than one reference by the same author
full stop separates references by different authors
figures of piates are enclosed in parentheses to distinguish them from text-figures
dash, not comma, separates consecutive numbers.
Synonymy arrangement according to chronology of bibliographic references, whereby the year is
placed in front of each entry, and the synonym repeated in full for each entry, is not acceptable.
In describing new species, one specimen must be designated as the holotype; other specimens
mentioned in the original description are to be designated paratypes; additional material not regarded
as paratypes should be listed separately. The complete data (registration number, depository, descrip-
tion of specimen, locality, collector, date) of the holotype and paratypes must be recorded, e.g.:
Holotype
SAM-A 13535 in the South African Museum, Cape Town. Adult female from mid-tide region, King’s Beach, Port Eliza-
beth (33°51’S 25°39’E), collected by A. Smith, 15 January 1973.
Note standard form of writing South African Museum registration numbers and date.
7. SPECIAL HOUSE RULES
Capital initial letters
(a) The Figures, Maps and Tables of the paper when referred to in the text
ez, 2.) . the Figure depicting C. namacolus .. .’: ‘. ... in C. namacolus (Fig. 10) . . .’
(b) The prefixes of prefixed surnames in all languages, when used in the text, if not preceded by
initials or full names
e.g. Du Toit but A.L.du Toit; Von Huene but F. von Huene
(c) Scientific names, but not their vernacular derivatives
e.g. Therocephalia, but therocephalian
Punctuation should be loose, omitting all not strictly necessary
Reference to the author should preferably be expressed in the third person
Roman numerals should be converted to arabic, except when forming part of the title of a book or
article, such as i
‘Revision of the Crustacea. Part VIII. The Amphipoda.’
Specific name must not stand alone, but be preceded by the generic name or its abbreviation to initial
capital letter, provided the same generic name is used consecutively. The generic name should
not be abbreviated at the beginning of a sentence or paragraph.
Name of new genus or species is not to be included in the title; it should be included in the abstract,
counter to Recommendation 23 of the Code, to meet the requirements of Biological Abstracts.
R. V. DINGLE
TURONIAN, CONIACIAN,
AND SANTONIAN OSTRACODA
FROM SOUTH-EAST AFRICA
SEPT98 |
t}
il
6924
|
i
IHU
woke =
poate
Cayurenrete 4
Fee lees
Ce Se as
me ping anette
Ae qn Die
Pa e ay
Pn
Says eee ay TESS
= BN Boa et eRe te
BES elke
rt SRO ey
Fara] e suywy noah eped= VET
yee cabene ve Gs CON
tases TUN NE SUMS
: etme on SERA
i Bes aA
i ae ORNS WO ALG Fey
SN EELS
Beer aa A ery
Me LEC Gert MS HL
age EAT EE PENS
Sores
IRAE EDIE WEN IRA Se Pye
Pinter ta try
Sa NSY #
ee SO hee eG,
Ioves TE WNT
ER ee
gata ‘
ee Ape aT ANSEL ERGY
oe Ye
wae heee sh
Fas en? anes
Sats
Wag SC STAR EES BONES BUGLE
a ge
qua
ere aa
Nile gat
FH WAGE
muse : AR UA ay
ARETE A eet eg NE EAE ATE HARE OL
ns ot
pow Fate
RAISES ANI
Re oan
yet! Wie
SAGE RET FA PAPAS
SAS ESP a OW |
whores
FONE RL ANY
usar ery iy seg ene Gs
Wks
gre Ve cade
EEE | Soe FS USE VE
pe SANE ERT CAN ER
Wnt 8 BSE SRT
= ipeaday Bip dy, >
Petr Ae riei
SASL
RAWAL
Me Sa A Oo LL
mye
args
SAVERS ae ck od Nips
RTE ay . Seis
on Pe es Cet A a
Be IN ROU tate ©
‘ ee
PRe Gs ae Che eae ee
ryt
Pree en ad a
EPA VRIES, §
. FAY VOL,
sede PeTNG My HEATa A Ate liery NIVEA Teenlti eRe
Thukb eb e8al ee ace arm
&
Ty AC aden anes Gea
waiter
ras
ae
DORN aks
On © Cm a a
Lette
Wrage thee
teu
ee aS
ore Us
rants at ad ahve s
Saas Pe Ve
i ae
oe Pa a
xhren get
a9 la WE eSATA BD
er)
ae aed
eaten
%
ty
Tees
ovation DAR Fis eae aE
Petes
“Seamer
: a a Me
ee etal
ap
by tere yD
ss eee etree
28g een
Sale ee
shee ee
Stee eee
PAC e Set he:
Neh sashes
a ee kes tar ad = ae
i - RN el Fer rs
oak pebe hyn MPS
Sp a TER
es eee oe
ee a sa ee bee
WN 5
Senter rn Py +
pay a prh rag sees eM
pig e preecleny) At pts SP ae PS aD
kn zy Dips y eg’
sett 2g Depa PAT a" Se
Nene yee ete
lg eG sets et
crore ox
Rp ae
peers
ts oats
* ne Yepmneneg rene 24)
Tee dale or seens
rid
ee pres SANS,
eee ee
Sgtle aF :
a ae tl ede et
ae Aan er
eget Gy aS every pe.
ween re era Ay
Sart see
*
Dp apd aR eae ey EAS Ow
Piles syrse oa
hi ogb ine eee tgs GS e
era re ars
none.
ya poe eees
7 se
tnt
=ee8